Seat New Ibiza 2017 User Manual

OWNER’S

MANUAL

Ibiza

6F0012720BC

Inglés

6F0012720BC (11.17)

Ibiza Inglés (11.17)

SEAT recommends

SEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommends

Castrol EDGE Professional

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-

stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason

no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error

or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the

equipment supplied with the vehicle at the

time this manual was published. Some of the

units described herein will not be available

until a later date or are only available in cer-

tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the

IBIZA, some of the equipment and functions

that are described in this manual are not in-

cluded in all types or variants of the model;

they may vary or be modiﬁed depending on

the technical requirements and on the mar-

ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general

guide and may vary from the equipment ﬁtted

in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward,

reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the

normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-

cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to

help users to understand certain car function-

alities better. It does not replace the instruc-

tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-

al to obtain more comprehensive information

and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-

isk* is ﬁtted as standard only in certain

versions, and is only supplied as op-

tional extras for some versions, or are

only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with

®. Although the copyright symbol does

not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-

ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-

mation on safety. They warn you about possi-

ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to

potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-

vant information concerning environmental

protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-

nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts,

which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed

alphabetical index that will help you quickly

ﬁnd the information you require.

Foreword

Thi

struction Manual and its correspond-

ing supplements should be read carefully to

familiarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of

the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-

serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-

tion concerning accessories, modifications

and part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board

documentation to the new owner, as it

should be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-

ual using:

●

Thematic table of contents that follows the

manual’s general chapter structure.

●

Visual table of contents that uses graphics

to indicate the pages containing “essential”

information, which is detailed in the corre-

sponding chapters.

●

Alphabetical index with many terms and

synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-

tion concernin

g the passenger's front air-

bag ››› page 92, Important information

regarding the front passenger's airbag.

Thank you for trusting in us.

We wish you safe and enjoya-

ble motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

Related video

Fig. 1 Opening and clos-

ing

Doors

Fig. 2 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 3 Centre console: Central lock buttons.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the

●

king: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button.

●

Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button.

●

Unlocking the rear lid: press the  button

››› Fig. 2 until all the turn signals on the vehi-

cle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-

ing switch

●

Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button. The 

symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it is

activated. None of the doors can be opened

from the outside. The doors can be opened

from the inside by pulling the inside door

handle.

●

Unlocking: Press the  button again

››› Fig. 3. The symbol reverts to its initial col-

our.



››› in Description on page 132



››› page 132

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 4 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-

e, the driv

er door can still be locked and

unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is

locked manually all other doors are locked.

When it is unlocked manually, only the driver

door opens. Please observe the instructions

relating to the anti-theft alarm system

›››



page 138.

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››



page 130.

The essentials

●

ser

the key shaft into the lower opening

in the cover on the driver door handle

››› Fig. 4 (arrow) then remove the cover up-

wards.

●

Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder

to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics

●

The anti-theft alarm will remain active when

vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm

will not be triggered ›››



page 138.

●

After the driver door is opened, you have

15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once

this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

●

Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-

mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and

deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the

vehicl

e is locked manually using the key

shaft ›››



page 138.

Emergency locking of doors without

door cylinder

Fig. 5 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to

ork

any time, doors with no lock cylinder

will have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visible

when the door is open) is provided on the

front passenger door.

●

Pull the cap out of the opening.

●

Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it

to the right as far as it will go (if the door is

on the right side) or to the left (if the door is

on the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-

ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-

rior door handle once to unlock and open the

door.

Rear lid

Fig. 6 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-

. It is activated by using the handle on

the boot lid.

This system may or may not be operative, de-

pending on the situation of the vehicle.

If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be

opened, however if it is unlocked then the

opening system is operative and the rear lid

may be opened.

To lock/unlock, press the  button or the 

button ››› Fig. 2 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel

display if the rear lid is open or not properly

closed.* An audible warning is also given if

the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is

moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

The essentials

●

Openin

g the r

ar lid: pull on the release

lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 6. The rear lid opens

automatically.

●

Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the

handles on the interior lining and close it by

pushing gently.



››› in Opening and closing on

page 141



››› page 17

Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 7 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

This allows the vehicle to be opened if the

entr

locking does not work (for example, if

the battery is flat).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-

ment allowing access to the emergency

opening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage

compartment

●

Insert the key in the groove and unlock the

locking system, turning the key from right to

left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 7.

Related video

Fig. 8 Bonnet

Bonnet

Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwell

Fig. 10 Lever under the bonnet.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that

the w

ind

creen wiper arms are in place

against the windscreen.

●

Open the door and pull the lever under the

dashboard ››› Fig. 9

The essentials

●

o lif

the bonnet, press towards the left on

the lever located under the bonnet, in the

centre ››› Fig. 10

. The arrester hooks are

ased.

●

Release the bonnet stay and secure it in

the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.



››› in Safety notes for work in the en-

gine compartment on page 263



››› page 263

Controls for the windows*

Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for

the w

indo

●

Opening the window: Press the  b

utt

on.

●

losing the window: Pull the  button.

Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door (only vehi-

cles with rear electric windows)

Window on the rear right door (only vehi-

cles with rear electric windows)

Safety switch for deactivating the electric

window buttons on the rear doors (only

vehicles with rear electric windows)



››› in Opening and closing of the elec-

tric windows* on page 142



››› page 141

Sliding sunroof*

Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: sunroof

utt

on.

●

Opening: press button

backwards.

●

Closing: press button

forwards.

●

To tilt open: press the rear part of button

●

Lowering: press the front part of button



››› in Introduction on page 144



››› page 144

The essentials

Before driving

ed video

Fig. 13 Vehicle interior

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 14 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forward/back: pull the lever and move

the se

orwards or backwards.

Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.

Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.



››› in Adjusting the front seats on

page 154

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-

aint

●

To raise or lower the head restraint, press

the s

ide b

utt

and move it upwards or

ards until it engages in the desired

position.



››› in Adjusting the front head re-

straints on page 155



››› page 79, ››› page 155

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat

belt

kle.

The essentials

Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint

position

s, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should-

s, a

dju

st the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should be

well centred over it, never over the neck. The

seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the

upper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across the

pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat

belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-

vis.



››› page 82



››› page 84

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the front

seats ar

e retracted automatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.



››› in Maintenance and disposal of belt

tensioners on page 86



››› page 85

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for

the e

erior mirr

or.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob

o the c

orr

esponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-

tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver

L/R

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,

right) to the direction desired.

Folding in mirrors.



››› in Electric exterior mirrors* on

page 154



››› page 153

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the

eerin

g column.

●

Adjusting the position of the steering

wheel: P

l the ››› Fig. 19

lever down,

e the s

teering wheel to the desired posi-

tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.



››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-

sition on page 77



The essentials

Airbags

ed video

Fig. 20 Vehicle interior

Front airbags

Fig. 21 Driver airbag located in steering

wheel

Fig. 22 Front passenger airbag located in

sh p

anel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in

the s

eerin

g wheel ››› Fig. 21 and the airbag

for the front passenger is located in the dash

panel ››› Fig. 22. Airbags are identified by the

word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbags

are deployed, the covers remain attached to

the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-

tively ››› Fig. 21 ››› Fig. 22.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front

airbag system gives the driver and the front

passenger additional protection for the head

The essentials

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-

ion.

The s

pecial design of the airbag allows the

controlled escape of the propellant gas when

an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,

the head and chest are surrounded and pro-

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.



››› page 88

Deactivating the front passenger front

airb

ag*

Fig. 23 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 24 Centre side of dash panel: control

lamp for de

activated front passenger airbag

in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger front air-

ag:

●

ch the ignition off.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the door on the front passenger side.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

››› Fig. 23. About 3/4 of the key should enter;

this is as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If

you have difficulty, ensure that you have in-

serted the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp remains lit where it

says      in the centre of the

dash panel ››› Fig. 24.



››› in Activation and deactivation of

front passenger airbag* on page 91



››› page 90

Side airbags*

Fig. 25 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 26 Illustration of completely inflated side

airb

ag on l

t side of vehicle.

The essentials

The side airbags are located in the driver's

and fr

ont passenger seat backrests

››› Fig. 25. The locations are identified by the

text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the

backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side

airbag system provides additional protection

for the upper body in the event of a severe

side collision.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce

the risk of injury to passengers to the areas

of the body facing the impact. In addition to

their normal function of protecting the occu-

pants in a collision, the front and rear outer

seat belts also hold the passengers in the

event of a side collision; this is how these air-

bags provide maximum protection.



››› in Side airbags* on page 88

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 27 Location and deployment area of the

d-pr

otection airbag.

There is a head airbag on each side of the in-

erior abo

e the doors ››› Fig. 27. Airbags are

identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red is covered by the

head-protection airbag when it is deployed

››› Fig. 27 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-

jects should never be placed or mounted in

this area ›››

in Head-protection airbags* on

e 89

In the event of a side collision the curtain air-

bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-

hicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk

of injury to passengers in the front and rear

side seats facing the impact.



››› in Head-protection airbags* on

page 89

Child seats

Related video

Fig. 28 Vehicle interior

The essentials

Important information regarding the

ont

assenger's airbag

Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the

senger-side sun blind  and on the rear

frame of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 30 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the

senger-side sun blind  and on the rear

frame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about

the p

senger airbag is located on the pas-

senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger

side door frame.



››› in Important information regarding

the front passenger's airbag on page 92



››› page 92

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: Possible installations

for the chi

ld seat.

Figure ›

›› Fig. 31

shows the basic child re-

aint

system mounting using lower retain-

ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-

ure ››› Fig. 31

shows the child restraint

em mounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer-

sal type child seats to the vehicle seats

marked with a U in the table below.

●

In a front passenger seat without height ad-

justment: It is necessary to place the front

passenger seat in its rearmost position

●

In a front passenger seat with height ad-

justment: it is necessary to place the front

passenger seat in its rearmost and highest

position

To correctly use a child seat in the back, the

front backrest must be adjusted so that there

is no contact with the child seat in the back

in the case that it goes opposite to the direc-

tion of the car. In the case of front facing re-

straint systems, the front backrest must be

adjusted so that there is no contact with the

child's feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-

date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a

perfect position, adjust the passenger back-

rest as far forward as possible

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-

led, in which the method of attachment to

the car is through the seat belt and support

bracket, it should never be installed in the

central rear seat as the ground clearance is

lower than in other places and the support

bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-

ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraint sys-

tem mounting with an upper retaining strap

(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on

the seat.

Compliance with current national legislation and

the manufact

urer's instructions is required when us-

ing or installing child seats.

The essentials

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X U

U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U

U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U

U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF

UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF

UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.

U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.

UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.

Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.



››› in Safety instructions on page 93

The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 32 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

Fig. 33 Position of the Top Tether rings on the

back

of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily

and s

ely

on the rear outer seats with the

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on

each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings

are secured to the seat frame and, in others,

they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-

FIX” rings are located between the rear seat

backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 32.

The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear

part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

hind the seat backrest or in the boot)

››› Fig. 33.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-

FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table

below.

The body weight permitted and information

regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-

bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-

universal” certification.

Weight group Size class

Electrical equip-

ment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrier

F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

The essentials

Weight group Size class

Electrical equip-

ment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.

IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list

into account.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.



››› in Safety instructions on page 93

The essentials

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” ISOFIX System

Fig. 34 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

Fig. 35 Rear seat: cut-out grooves.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-

er's

instructions.

●

Open the cut-out section behind the

marked grooves to access the retaining rings

››› Fig. 35.

●

Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”

retaining rings until the child seat is heard to

engage securely. If the child seat is equipped

with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to

the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 36. Observe

the manufacturer's instructions.

●

Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-

sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

attachment system are available from Techni-

cal Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top

ether* r

aining straps

Fig. 36 Position of the Top Tether rings on the

of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come

ith a s

ap for securing the seat to the vehi-

cle anchor point, located at the back of the

rear seat backrest and provide greater re-

straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-

ward movements of the child seat in a crash,

to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from

hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted

seats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing child

safety seats that have Top Tether. Please

carefully read and follow the seat manufac-

turer instructions to learn the proper way to

install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the Top Tether* to the an-

chorage point

Fig. 37 Retainer strap: adjustment and as-

semb

cording to the Top Tether belt.

Securing the retainer strap

●

Follow the manufacturer's instructions to

dep

the child seat Top Tether retainer

strap.

●

Place the belt under the head restraint of

the back seat ››› Fig. 37 (depending on the in-

structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the

head restraint if necessary).

●

Slide the strap and secure it properly with

the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 36.

●

Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-

facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

●

Loosen the strap following the manufactur-

er's instructions.

●

Push the lock and release it from the an-

choring support.



››› in Safety instructions on page 93

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition loc

Fig. 38 Ignition key positions.

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-

tion and s

t the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

●

Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove

the key from the ignition and turn the wheel

until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic

gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-

tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,

press the locking key on the selector lever

and release it again.

●

Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key

into the ignition and turn it at the same time

as the steering wheel in the direction indica-

ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn

the steering wheel, it may be because it is

locked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow

plugs reheating

●

Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the

position.

●

Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the

position.

●

Diesel vehicles :

The glo

w p

lugs reheat

when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine

●

Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all

the way down and move the gearbox lever in-

to neutral.

●

Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal

and move the selector lever to the P position

or into N.

●

Turn the key to the

position. The key au-

atic

ally returns to the

position. Do not

s the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,

the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.

The ignition remains switched on.



››› in Ignition key positions on

page 175



››› page 175

Lights and visibility

ed video

Fig. 39 Dash panel

Light switch

Fig. 40 Dash panel: light control.

●

Turn the switch to the required position

›

Fig. 40.

The essentials

Sym-

bol

Ignition switch-

ed off

Ignition is switch-

ed on



Fog lights, dipped

beam and side

lights off.

Light off or daytime

driving light on.



The “Coming home”

and “Leaving

home” guide lights

may be switched

on.

Automatic control of

dipped beam and day-

time running light.



Side light on.

Daylight running

lights switched on.



Dipped beam head-

light off

Dipped beam switch-

ed on.

 Front fog lights: mo

ve the switch to the

first position, from positions ,  or .



Rear fog light: move the switch completely

from positions







Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or

turn it to the



position.



››› page 146

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 41 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right

urn s

ignal: Right-hand parking

light (ignition switched off).

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light

(ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: control lamp 

lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is

pushed. Control lamp  lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.



››› in Turn signal and main beam lever

on page 148



››› page 147

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 42 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-

g lights.

Switched on, for example:

●

When approaching a traffic jam

●

In an emergency

●

The vehicle has broken down

●

When towing or being towed



››› in Hazard warning lights



page 150



››› page 150

The essentials

Interior lights

Fig. 43 Detail of headliner: front interior light-

Knob Function



Switches interior lights off.



Switches interior lights on.



Switches door contact control on (central

position).

The interior lights come on automatically

when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is

opened or the key is removed from the igni-

tion.

The lights go off a few seconds after all the

doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or

the ignition is switched on.

Knob Function



Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on the

vehicl

e version.



››› page 150

Windscreen wipers and window wiper

bla

Fig. 44 Operating the windscreen wiper and

ar w

iper.

More the lever to the required position:



Windscreen wiper off.



Windscreen wipers interval wipe.

Using the control ››› Fig. 44

adjust the

interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or

the sensitivity of the rain sensor.



Slow wipe.



Continuous wipe.



Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.



Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer

function is activated by pushing the lever

forwards, and simultaneously the wind-

screen wipers start.



Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper

will wipe the window approximately every

six seconds.



The rear window wash function is activa-

ted by pressing the lever, and the rear

wiper starts simultaneously.



››› in Windscreen wiper and window

wiper on page 152



››› page 152



››› page 73

The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settin

Fig. 45 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 46 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available and

the n

ame of

the

arious options will depend

on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If the Infotainment System is off, switch it

on.

●

Press the Infotainment button  /



and

then the

ehic

function button ›

›

Fig. 45

or, press the Infotainment button  /



o t

o the

Vehicle menu ›

›› Fig. 46.

●

Press the

SETTINGS

function button to open

the Vehicle settings menu.

●

To select a function in the menu, press the

ed b

utton.

When the function button check box is activa-

ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button



will always take

ou t

o the l

st menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus

are automatically saved on closing those me-

nus.

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 183

Tyres

Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 278

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 280

Lights

Light assist

Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch sig-

nalling.

››› page 146,

››› page 149

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 150

“Coming home/Leaving home” func-

tion

Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 148

Driver assistance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 216

Front Assist (emergency brake as-

sist system)

Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 212

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 227

Parking and manoeu-

vring

Parking and manoeuvring settings

Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound

treble

››› page 232

Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour ››› page 151

Mirrors and wind-

screen wipers

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking ››› page 153

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing ››› page 33

Opening and closing

Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver ››› page 143

Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving ››› page 132

Instrument panel

–

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Advice,

travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display, speed

warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for “total calcu-

lation”

››› page 38

Date and time – Time, summer time, time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 119

The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –

Service –

Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change serv-

ice

››› page 43

Factory settings

All Restore all settings

–

Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring



››› in Car menu on page 123

The essentials

Driver information System

Intr

oduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible

to re

ad the different functions of the display

by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,

the multifunction display can only be operat-

ed with the steering wheel buttons.

The number of menus displayed on the in-

strument panel will vary according to the ve-

hicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-

gramme or modify additional functions, ac-

cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-

ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Some menu options can only be read when

the vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it

will not be possible to read the menus

›››

page 41. Some warning messages can

be confirmed and made to disappear with the

windscreen wiper lever button or the multi-

function steering wheel button.

The information system also provides the fol-

lowing information and displays (depending

on the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data

›››

page 38

■

MFD from departure

■

MFD from ref

uelling

■

MFD total calculation

Assist systems ››› page 40

Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system

Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-

tion system

Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet

Navigation system

Vehicle status ››› page 34

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with

the risk of

injury.

●

Do not operate the instrument panel con-

trols when driving.

Operating the instrument panel me-

Fig. 47 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-

Fig. 48 Right side of multifunction steering

wheel: c

ontr

l buttons.

The driver information system is controlled

ith the mu

ltif

unction steering wheel buttons

››› Fig. 48 or with the windscreen wiper lever

››› Fig. 47 (if the vehicle is not equipped with

multifunction steering wheel).

The essentials

Enabling the main menu

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,

s button ››› Fig. 47

on the windscreen

iper l

er or button



on the multifunction

eerin

g wheel ››› Fig. 48.

●

If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-

er: to display the main screen or to return to

the main menu from another menu, hold

down the rocker button ››› Fig. 47

●

If managed from the multifunction steering

whe

the main menu list is not displayed.

To go from point to point in the main menu,

press button

 

 

several times

›

Fig. 48.

Select a submenu

●

Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 47

on the

ind

creen wiper lever up or down or turn

the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering

wheel ››› Fig. 48 until the desired option ap-

pears marked on the menu.

●

The selected option will be displayed with a

horizontal line underneath.

●

To consult the submenu option, press but-

ton ››› Fig. 47

on the windscreen wiper

er or b

utton



on the multifunction steer-

g wheel

›

›› Fig. 48.

Making changes according to the menu

●

Make the desired changes with the rocker

switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the

thumbwheel of the multifunction steering

wheel. To increase or decrease the values

more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.

●

Mark or confirm the selection with button

››› Fig. 47

on the windscreen wiper lever

or b

utt



on the multifunction steering

wheel

›

› Fig. 48.

Selection menu

Menu Function

Driving

data

Information and possible configura-

tions of the multifunction display

(MFD) ››› page 38, ››› page 123.

Assist

systems

Information and possible configura-

tions of the driver assistance systems

››› page 40.

Navigation*

Information instructions from the acti-

vated navigation system: when a route

guidance is activated, the turning ar-

rows and proximity bars are displayed.

The appearance is similar to the Easy

Connect system.

If route guidance is not activated, the

direction of travel (compass) and the

name of the street along which you are

driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga-

tion system.

Audio

Station display on the radio.

Track name on the CD.

Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet

Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation sys-

tem.

Menu Function

Telephone

Information and possible configura-

tions of the mobile phone preinstalla-

tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet

Navigation system.

Vehicle

status

Display of the current warning or infor-

mation texts and other system compo-

nents, depending on the equipment

››› page 123.

Journey data

The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-

ent

alues for the journey and the consump-

tion.

Changing between display modes on the

MFD

●

In vehicles without multifunction steering

wheel: Press the rocker switch



on the

ind

creen wiper lever

›››

Fig. 47.

●

Vehicles with a multifunction steering

wheel: turn the thumbwheel

›››

Fig. 48.

Multifunction display memory

The multifunction display is equipped with

three memories that work automatically: MFD

from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD

total calculation. On the screen display, you

can read which memory is currently dis-

played.

The essentials

Toggle between memories with the ignition

on and the memor

splayed

Press the



button on the windscreen

iper l

er or the



button of the multifunc-

tion s

eerin

g wheel.

Menu Function

MFD from de-

parture

Display and storage of the values for

the journey and the consumption

from when the ignition is switched

on to when it is switched off.

If the journey is continued in less

than 2 hours after the ignition is

switched off, the new data is added

to the data already stored in the

memory. The memory will automati-

cally be deleted if the journey is in-

terrupted for more than 2 hours.

MFD from re-

fuelling

Display and storage of the values for

the journey and the consumption.

By refuelling, the memory will be

erased automatically.

MFD total

calculation

The memory records the values for a

specific number of partial trips, up

to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-

nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,

or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend-

ing on the model of instrument pan-

el. On reaching either of these lim-

its

, the memory is automatically

erased and starts to count from 0

again.

It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually

●

Select the memory that you wish to erase.

●

Hold the



button of the multifunction

eerin

g wheel or the



button of the multi-

nction wheel

pressed down for about 2 sec-

onds.

Personalising the displays

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust

which of the possible displays of the MFD can

be shown on the instrument panel display

with the



button and the

TINGS

function

utt

on ›

››



page 123.

Data summary

Menu Function

Current fuel

consumption

The current fuel consumption dis-

play operates throughout the

journey, in litres/100 km; and

with the engine running and the

vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.

Average fuel

consumption

After turning on the ignition, aver-

age fuel consumption in li-

tres/100 km will be displayed af-

ter travelling about 300 metres.

Otherwise horizontal lines are

displayed. The value shown is up-

dated approximately every 5 sec-

onds.

Menu Function

Operating

range

Approximate distance in km that

can still be travelled with the fuel

remaining in the tank, assuming

the same style of driving is main-

tained. This is calculated using

the current fuel consumption.

Travelling

time

This indicates the hours (h) and

minutes (min) since the ignition

was switched on.

Journey

Distance covered in km (m) after

switching on the ignition.

CNG quality

Whenever you refuel the quality

of the natural gas is automatically

verified and is displayed when

the ignition is switched on. The

display is made in a percentage

of between 70% and 100%. The

greater the percentage displayed

the lower the consumption may

be.

Average speed

The average speed will be shown

after a distance of about 100 me-

tres has been travelled. Otherwise

horizontal lines are displayed.

The value shown is updated ap-

proximately every 5 seconds.

Digital dis-

play of speed

Current speed displayed in digital

format.

The essentials

Menu Function

Speed warning

at --- km/h or

Speed warning

at --- mph

If the stored speed is exceeded

(between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -

155 mph), an audible warning is

given together with a visual warn-

ing.

Oil tempera-

ture

Updated engine oil temperature

digital display

Coolant tem-

perature gauge

Digital display of the current tem-

perature of the liquid coolant.

Convenience

consumers

Information about the vehicle’s

main convenience consumers. It

is displayed by means of a con-

sumption indicator bar.

Eco tips Tips on how to save fuel.

Reset data

“when setting

off”

Reset journey data when setting

off.

Reset data for

“total calcu-

lation”

Reset travel journey to zero.

Storing a speed with the speed warning

●

Select the display Speed warning at

---

km/h (---

mph)

●

Press the button



on the windscreen

iper l

er or the button



on the multifunc-

tion s

eerin

g wheel to store the current speed

and activate the warning.

●

To switch system on: adjust to the desired

speed within 5 seconds using the rocker

switch



on the windscreen wiper lever or

urning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel. Next, press the button





again or wait several seconds.

The s

peed i

stored and the warning activa-

ted.

●

To switch system off: press the but-

ton





. The stored speed is de-

ed.

Assist systems menu

Menu Function

ACC

Display of Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) ››› page 216.

Front Assist

Switching the monitoring system

on and off ››› page 212.

Fatigue detec-

tion*

Switching the fatigue detection

on or off (pause recommenda-

tion) ››› page 227.

Status display

Bonnet, r

ar lid and door

s open

Fig. 49 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:

ont

eft door open; D: right rear door open.

When the ignition is switched on or when

driv

g, the bonnet, r

ear lid or doors that are

open will be indicated on the instrument pan-

el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-

dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-

ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.

The essentials

Illustra-

tion

Key to ››› Fig. 49



Do not continue driving!

The bonnet is open or is not properly

closed ››› page 263.



Do not continue driving!

The rear lid is open or is not properly

closed ››› page 16.

C, D



Do not continue driving!

A vehicle door is open or is not properly

closed ››› page 132.



››› page 118

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo-

nents

and f

nctions when the ignition is

switched on and while the vehicle is moving.

Faults in the operation are displayed on the

screen using red and yellow symbols and

messages on the instrument panel display

(›››



page 122, ››› page 47) and, in

some cases, with audible warnings. The dis-

play may vary according to the type of instru-

ment panel fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.



Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning

symbols on page 122 !

Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-

ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.

A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct

levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ›››

in Warn-

ing symbols on page 123

Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-

sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.



››› page 122

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 50 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-

or (m

anual

gearbox).

Gear-change recommendation

Whi

e driv

ing, the instrument panel of certain

vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-

tion for saving fuel ›››



page 197.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C

(+39°F), the  symbo

arning of risk of

freezing) is displayed. At first, this symbol

flashes and then it remains lit until the out-

side temperature rises above +6°C (+43°F)

›››

in Indications on the display on

e 119

When the vehicle is at a standstill or when

travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

ture displayed may be higher than the true

The essentials

outside temperature as a result of the heat

oduc

ed b

y the engine.

The temperatures measured range from

-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Engine oil temperature display

The engine reaches its operating temperature

when in normal driv

ing conditions the oil

temperature is between 80°C (178°F) and

120°C (248°F). If the engine is required to

work hard and the outside temperature is

high, the engine oil temperature can in-

crease. This does not present any problem as

long as the warning lamps  ››› table on

page 48 or  ››› table on page 48 do not

appear on the display.

Vehicles without multifunction steering

wheel

●

Press the rocker switch

›››

Fig. 47

until

the m

ain menu ap

ars. Enter into Driving

data. With the button

move to the oil

emper

ure gauge.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel

●

Enter the submenu Driving data and

turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-

ture display appears.

Additional consumers

●

Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:

Pres

s the rocker switch ››› Fig. 47

until the

main menu appe

ars. Enter into the section

Driving data. With the rocker switch,

move to the display Convenience con-

sumers.

●

Operation with the multi-function steering

wheel*: move with the buttons

 

 

to Driving data and enter with

OK. Turn

the right thumbwheel until the Conven-

ience consumers display appears.

In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-

rent sum of all the additional appliances.

Saving tips

Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in

ondition

that increase fuel consumption.

Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-

cations appear automatically only with the ef-

ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will

disappear automatically.

If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately

after it appears, press any button on the

windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-

ing wheel*.

Note

●

If y

ou hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-

ter you switch the ignition on again.

●

The saving tips do not appear in all situa-

tions, but rather with a large separation of

time.

Speed warning device

The speed warning device warns the driver

when they hav

e exceeded the pre-set speed

limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning

signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and

the driver message Speed limit excee-

ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the

instrument panel. The warning lamp 

switches off when reducing speed below the

stored maximum limit.

Speed warning programming is recommen-

ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-

mum speed, such as when travelling in a

country with different speed limits or for a

maximum speed for winter tyres.

Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to

set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

●

Vehicles with radio: pres

s the

SETUP

button

> c

ontr

l button  Driver Assistant >

Speed warning.

The essentials

●

ehicle

with Easy Connect: Press the



button and the function button SETTINGS >

Driver assistance > ACC > Dis-

tance.

The w

arnin

g limit

can be set from 30 to

210 km/h (18 to 150 mph) ›››



page 209.

The adjustment is made at 10 km/h (6 mph)

intervals.

Note

●

Plea

se bear in mind that, even with the

speed warning function, it is still important

to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the

speedometer and to observe the legal speed

limits.

●

The speed limit warning function in the ver-

sion for some countries warns you at a speed

of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set

speed limit.

Service intervals

Fig. 51 Instrument panel

The service interval indication appears on the

trument

panel display ››› Fig. 51

T di

stinguishes between services with en-

gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

services without engine oil change (e.g. In-

spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time

or mileage, the service intervals are already

pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-

vals are determined individually. Thanks to

technological progress, maintenance work

has been greatly reduced. Because of the

technology used by SEAT, with this service

you only need to change the oil when the ve-

hicle so requires. To calculate this change

(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of

use and individual driving styles are consid-

ered. The advance warning first appears 20

days before the date established for the cor-

responding service. The kilometres (miles)

remaining until the next service are always

rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)

and the time is given in complete days. The

current service message cannot be viewed

until 500 km after the last service. Prior to

this, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, when

the ignition is switched on a Service remind-

er is displayed.

Vehicles without text messages: a span-

ner  will be displayed on the instrument

panel plus an indication in km.

The kilometres indicated are the maximum

number of kilometres that can be travelled

until the next service. After a few seconds,

the display mode changes. A clock symbol

appears and the number of days until the

next service is due.

Vehicles with text messages: Service in

--- km or --- days will be shown on the

instrument panel display.

The essentials

Service due

When the ser

e date is due, an audible

warning is given when the ignition is switch-

ed on and the spanner displayed on the

screen flashes for a few seconds .

Vehicles with text messages: Service now

will be shown on the instrument panel dis-

play.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine off

and the vehicle at a standstill, the current

service notification can be read:

Press and hold the button

0.0/SET

for more

an 5 sec

ond

s to consult the service mes-

sage

When the ser

e date has passed, a minus

sign is displayed in front of the number of kil-

ometres or days.

Vehicles with text messages: the following

message is displayed: Service --- km

(miles) or --- days ago.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEAT

dealership, the display can be reset as fol-

lows:

●

Switch off the ignition, press and hold the

button

0.0/SET

●

Switch ignition back on.

●

Release the button

0.0/S

and press it

ain f

or the ne

xt 20 seconds.

Note

●

The servic

e message disappears after a few

seconds, when the engine is started or when

OK/RESET

is pressed on the windscreen wiper

lever

, or

on the multifunction steering

wheel.

●

In v

ehicles with the LongLife system in

which the battery has been disconnected for

a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-

culate the date of the next service. Therefore

the service interval display may not be cor-

rect. In thi

s case, bear in mind the maximum

service intervals permitted in the ››› Booklet

Maintenance Programme.

●

If you reset the display manually, the next

service interval will be indicated as in vehi-

cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-

son we recommend that the service interval

display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.

The essentials

Cruise control

Oper

atin

g the c

ruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 52 Related video:

Dash panel

Fig. 53 On the left of the steering column:  con-

troller and buttons to operate the cruise control

system;  third lever to operate the cruise con-

trol system.

Function

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 53



or of the third lever ››› Fig. 53



Effect

Switching on the cruise control sys-

tem

Move controller

to the



position on the turn signal lever or move the third lever

forward.

The system switches on. The last set speed of the

cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control sys-

tem

Press the button

on the turn signal lever or button



on the third lever.

The current speed is stored and the cruise control is

activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruise

control

Move controller

of the turn signal lever to the



position or move the third

lever into pressure point



The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will

be stored.

The essentials

Function

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 53



or of the third lever ››› Fig. 53



Effect

Switching on the cruise control sys-

tem again

Press the button

on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into the pressure

point



The set speed control is activated.

Increasing the set speed of the cruise

control

Briefly press the button

on the turn signal lever in the area



or press



on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and

set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.

Press



on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h

(5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or hold down



to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the cruise

control

Briefly press the button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or move the third

lever into position



to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)

and set it.

The speed is changed to the set value.

Press



on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)

and set it.

Hold down the button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or hold down



to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then

set it.

Switching off the cruise control sys-

tem

Move controller

of the turn signal lever into position



or the third lever into po-

sition



The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.



››› in How it works on page 208



››› page 207

The essentials

Warning lamps

On the in

trument

panel

Fig. 54 Related video:

Dash panel

Fig. 55 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Red warning lamps



Central warning lamp: additional

information on the instrument

panel display

–



Parking brake on.

››› page

182





Do not continue driving!

The brake fluid level is too low or

there is a fault in the brake sys-

tem.

››› page

181



Lit up or flashing:



Do not continue driving!

Fault in the steering.

››› page

198



Driver or passenger has not fas-

tened seat belt.

››› page



Use the foot brake!

››› page

218

The essentials

Yellow warning lamps



Central warning lamp: additional

information on the instrument

panel display

–



Front brake pads worn.

››› page

181



it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or

disconnection caused by the sys-

tem.

››› page

183

flashes: ESC or ASR activated.



it lights up: fault in the ASR or

disconnection caused by the sys-

tem.

››› page

184

flashes: ASR working.



ASR manually deactivated.

Or else: ESC in Sport mode.

››› page

183



ABS faulty or does not work.

››› page

187



Rear fog light switched on. ››› page 31



lights up or flashes: fault in the

emission control system.

››› page

203



it lights up: pre-heating of diesel

engine.

››› page

203

flashes: fault in the diesel engine

management.



fault in the petrol engine man-

agement.

››› page

203



lights up or flashes: fault in the

steering system.

››› page

198



Tyre pressure too low, or fault in

the tyre pressure monitoring sys-

tem.

››› page

278



Fuel tank almost empty.

››› page

121



Fault in airbag system and seat

belt tensioners.

››› page

Other warning lamps



Left or right turn signal. ››› page 32

Hazard warning lights on.

››› page 32

››› page

150



Trailer turn signals

››› page

243



it lights up green: Press the brake

pedal!

It blinks in green: the selector lev-

er locking button has not engag-

ed.

››› page

190



it lights up green: cruise control

activated or speed limiter switch-

ed on and active.

››› page 45

››› page

209

it blinks in green: the speed set

by the speed limiter has been ex-

ceeded.



Main beam on or flasher on. ››› page 32



Natural gas operating mode

››› page

121



››› in Warning symbols on page 122



››› page 122

On the instrument panel display

Fig. 56 On the instrument panel display: door

open.





Do not continue driving!

With the corresponding indica-

tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet

open or not properly closed.

››› page 40

The essentials



Ignition:



Do not carry on

driving! Engine coolant level

too low, coolant temperature

too high

››› page

269

Flashing: Fault in the engine

coolant system.





Do not continue driving!

Engine oil pressure too low.

››› page

267



Fault in the battery.

››› page

272



Driving light totally or partially

faulty.

››› page

106

Fault in the cornering light sys-

tem.

››› page

149



particulate filter blocked.

››› page

202



Flashing: Fault in the oil level

detection. Control manually.

››› page

267

Ignition: Insufficient engine

oil.



Fault in the gearbox.

››› page

196



Immobiliser active.

››› page

177



Service interval display ››› page 43



Mobile telephone is connected

via Bluetooth to the original

telephone device.

››› page

124

››› page

129

››› Booklet

Audio or

navigation

system



Mobile telephone battery

charge meter. Available only

for devices pre-installed in fac-

tory.



Freezing warning. The outside

temperature is lower than

+4°C (+39°F).

››› page 41



Start-Stop system activated.

››› page

204



Start-Stop system unavailable.



Low consumption driving sta-

tus

››› page

225



››› page 118

On the instrument panel

Fig. 57 Warning lamp for disabling the front

senger airbag.





Front passenger front airbag is

disabled (











››› page





The front passenger front airbag

is activated (











››› page



››› in Activation and deactivation of

front passenger airbag* on page 91



››› page 90

The essentials

Gearbox lever

anua

gearbox

Fig. 58 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed

anual

earbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the

arbo

x lever ››› Fig. 58.

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

Move the gearbox lever to the required po-

sition.

●

Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

●

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot

right down.

●

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it

downwards, move it to the left as far as it will

go and then forwards to select reverse

››› Fig. 58

●

ase the clutch.



››› in Driving with a manual gearbox on

page 189



››› page 189

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 59 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-

ition

Parking lock

se gear

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards

(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to

go down a gear.

D/S

+/–



››› in Selector lever positions on

page 191



››› page 190



››› page 50

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 60 Selector lever: manual release from

ition P

Should the power supply be interrupted,

ther

e i

a manual unlocking device located

under the console of the selector lever, on

the right. Releasing the selector lever re-

quires a certain degree of practical skill.

●

Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver

blade.

The essentials

Removing the cover from the selector lever

●

Apply the handbrake  ›

›

to ensure that

the c

ar doe

not move.

●

Carefully pull the corners of the selector

lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-

er handle.

Releasing the selector lever

●

Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-

low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 60.

●

Press the interlock button on the selector

lever and move the selector lever to posi-

tion N.

●

After carrying out the manual release, at-

tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox

console again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-

charged battery) and the vehicle has to be

pushed or towed, the selector lever must first

be moved to position N, after operating the

manual release mechanism.

WARNING

The selector lever may be moved out of posi-

tion P only when the h

andbrake is firmly ap-

plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-

cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-

cle could otherwise start to move inadver-

tently after shifting the selector lever out of

position P - accident risk!

Air conditioning

ed video

Fig. 61 Air conditioning

The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 62 In the centre console: Climatronic con-

trol

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opri

e button. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Fan

The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons

Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.



Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-

screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.



The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

The essentials



Air distribution towards the footwell.



Upward air distribution.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



Air recirculation

 

Seat heating buttons



Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.



Press the



button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in order to set

a different temperature.



Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off

Press the



button or manually set the fan to





››› in General notes on page 166



››› page 173

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 63 In the centre console: Manual air condi-

tioning contr

ols.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opri

e button. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Fan

Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off

Level 4: maximum fan level.

Air distribution



: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the

fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.



: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.



: Air distribution to footwells.



: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

The essentials



Air recirculation



Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

 

Seat heating buttons



››› in General notes on page 166



››› page 171

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 64 In the centre console: heating system and

fresh air controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-

opri

e button. Press the button again to

switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate

that the respective function of a control has

been switched on.

The essentials

Temperature

Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool

or dehumidify the air.

Fan

Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off

Level 4: maximum fan level.

Air distribution



: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.



: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.



: Air distribution to footwells.



: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.



Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.



››› in General notes on page 166



››› page 169

The essentials

Fluid Level control

lin

g capacities

Capacities

Fuel tank 40 litres. 7 litre re-

serve.

Windscreen washer fluid con-

tainer

3 litres

Fuel

Fig. 65 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The tank flap is released electronically by

of the central locking and is located at

the rear of the vehicle, on the right. The tank

holds approximately 40 litres.

Opening the fuel tank cap

●

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the

left side.

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

●

Place it in the space on the hinge of the

open flap ››› Fig. 65.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as

far as it will go.

●

Close the lid.



››› in Refuelling on page 257



››› page 257

The essentials

Oil

Fig. 66 Engine oil dipstick. Fig. 67 In the engine compartment: Engine

oil fi

ller cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-

ed in the en

gine c

ompartment

›››



page 266.

The oil should leave a mark between zones

and

. It should never exceed zone

●

Zone

: Do not add oil.

●

Zone

: You can add oil but keep the level

in th

zone.

●

Zone

: Add oil up to zone

g up engine oil

●

Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.

●

Add oil slowly.

●

At the same time, check the level to ensure

you do not add too much.

●

When the oil level reaches at least zone

crew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the

engine oil. The deterioration caused by these

additives is not covered by the warranty.

The essentials

Engine oil specifications

Service interval Engine type Specification

Petrol engines with Set Service Intervals (dependent on

time/distance travelled)

1.0l / 1.0l GNC / 1.5l VW 504 00

1.0l / 1.6l VW 502 00

Petrol engines with Flexible Service Intervals (LongLife) 1.0l / 1.5l

VW 508 00

VW 504 00

Diesel engines with Set Service and Flexible Service In-

tervals

With particulate filter (DPF) VW 507 00

If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards.

Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicle’s exhaust gas values.

Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.



››› in Changing engine oil on page 269



››› page 266

Coolant

Fig. 68 Engine compartment: coolant expan-

ion t

ank

cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine

omp

tment ›››



page 266.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant

when the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from

the factory with a specially treated mixture of

water and at least 40 % of the additive G13

(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the

necessary frost protection down to -25°C

(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of

the engine cooling system against corrosion.

It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-

ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentage

of additive must always be at least 40 %,

even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-

tection is not required.

The essentials

If for weather reasons further protection is

nec

sary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-

tifreeze protection will diminish and this will

worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture

of distilled water and at least 40 % of the

G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive

(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-

corrosion protection ›››

in Topping up cool-

ant on p

e 271

. The mixture of G13 with

G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11

(green-blue) engine coolants will significant-

ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and

should therefore be avoided ›››

in Topping

up c

ant on page 271.



››› in Topping up coolant on page 270



››› page 269

Brake fluid

Fig. 69 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-

oir c

ap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-

gine c

omp

tment ›››



page 266.

The level should be between the  and 

marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-

cal Service.



››› in Changing the brake fluid on

page 271



››› page 271

Windscreen washer

Fig. 70 In the engine compartment: wind-

een washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in

the en

gine c

omp

artment ›››



page 266.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-

mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-

dows.



››› in Checking and topping up the

windscreen washer reservoir water on

page 272



››› page 272

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment

›



page 266. It does not require

The essentials

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-

pection

Ser

vice.



››› in Symbols and warnings on han-

dling the battery on page 272



››› page 272

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuse location

Fig. 71 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse

over.

Fig. 72 In the engine compartment: fuse box

er.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated

belo

w the d

sh panel

●

Opening: remove the fuse box cover in the

direction indicated ››› Fig. 71.

●

Closing: click the cover back into place.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

●

Raise the bonnet.

●

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse

box cover ››› Fig. 72

●

Then lift the cover out.

●

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.

Push the locking tabs down until they click

audibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash

panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Colour Amp rating

Green 30

Orange 40



››› in Introduction on page 104



››› page 104

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 73 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation

●

Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-

tric

equipment

●

Open the corresponding fuse box

›››



page 104.

The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse

A f

se i

s blown if its metal strip is ruptured

››› Fig. 73.

●

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has

blown.

To replace a fuse

●

Remove the fuse.

●

Replace the blown fuse by one with an

identical amperage rating (same colour and

markings) and identical size.

●

Replace the cover again or close the fuse

box lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: D

epending on the level of equipment

fitt

ed in the

vehicle, LEDs may be used for

part or all of the interior and/or exterior light-

ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds

that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to

an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Halogen headlights. Type

Side light/DRL (daytime running

light)

W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight with LED

DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime running

light)

LED

In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have

it replaced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs.

In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to

have it replaced.



››› page 106

Action in the event of a punc-

elated video

Fig. 74 Wheels

What to do first

●

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface

and in a s

e p

lace as far away from traffic as

possible.

●

Apply the handbrake.

●

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

●

Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.

●

Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever

to position P.

●

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from

your vehicle.

●

Have the vehicle tool kit*

›››

page 65 and

the spare wheel

›››



page 279 ready.

●

Observe the applicable legislation for each

country (reflective vest, warning triangles,

etc.).

The essentials

●

occupants should leave the vehicle and

wait in a safe place (for instance behind the

roadside crash barrier).

WARNING

●

Alwa

ys observe the above steps and pro-

tect yourself and other road users.

●

If you change the wheel on a slope, block

the wheel on the opposite side of the car with

a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-

e k

Fig. 75 Standard representation: contents of

the anti-p

nct

ure kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under the

floor p

anel

in the lug

gage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

●

Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use

the ››› Fig. 75

tool to remove the insert.

e it

on a clean surface.

●

Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously

››› Fig. 75

●

Screw the inflator tube ›

›

Fig. 75

into

the se

ant

bottle. The bottle's seal will break

automatically.

●

Remove the lid from the filling tube

››› Fig. 75

and screw the open end of the

ube int

o the ty

re valve.

●

With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,

fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant

bottle.

●

Remove the bottle from the valve.

●

Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-

ing the tool ››› Fig. 75

Infl

atin

g the ty

●

Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube

››› Fig. 75

into the tyre valve.

●

Check that the air bleed screw is closed

›

Fig. 75

●

Start the engine and leave it running.

●

Insert the connector ›

›

Fig. 75

into the

ehic

e's 12-volt socket ›››



page 160.

●

Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF

switc

h ››› Fig. 75

●

eep the air c

ompr

essor running until it

reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar

(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8

minutes.

●

Disconnect the air compressor.

●

If it does not reach the pressure indicated,

unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

●

Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is

distributed throughout the tyre.

●

Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the

valve.

●

Repeat the inflation process.

●

If the indicated pressure still cannot be

reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop

and request assistance from an authorised

technician.

●

Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew

the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

●

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and

2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding

80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Check the pressure again after 10 minutes

›››



page 99.



››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on

page 98



››› page 98

The essentials

Changing a wheel

ed video

Fig. 76 Wheels

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 77 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-

e c

ompartment: vehicle tool kit.

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

wline anc

horage

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

Jack*

Hook

or e

xtracting the central wheel

trims*

Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.



››› in Vehicle tools on page 97



››› page 97

Central trim for steel rims*

Fig. 78 Correct positioning of the central

wheel

trim f

or s

teel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access

o the wheel

lts.

Removing

●

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools

›

Fig. 77

) to one of the chambers of the

entr

wheel trim.

●

Insert the box spanner through the hook,

supporting it on the tyre and remove the

wheel trim.

Fitting

●

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The

bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should

align with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 78

●

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in

ith an audib

e click.

Note

There is also a valve mark on the back of the

centra

l wheel trim that indicates the correct

alignment.

The essentials

Central trim for alloy rims*

Fig. 79 Removing the central wheel trim.

Fig. 80 Fitting the central wheel trim.

Removing

●

Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools

›

››

Fig. 77

) to the housing provided for this

›

Fig. 79.

●

Pull on it to remove the trim ››› Fig. 79.

Fitting

●

Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim, fit-

ting the protrusion on the trim into the recess

in the rim ››› Fig. 80 (arrows).

●

Press the central trim firmly until it locks in

with an audible click.

Wheel covers*

Fig. 81 Remove the wheel cover.

The wheel covers must be removed for access

o the wheel

lts.

Removing

●

Remove the wheel cover using the wire

hook ››› Fig. 81.

●

Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the

wheel cover.

Fitting

●

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by

pressing it firmly.

●

Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for

the valve.

●

Next fit the rest of the wheel cover.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 82 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

●

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the

ap u

nti

l it clicks into place ››› Fig. 82.

●

Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The essentials

Wheel bolts

Fig. 83 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel

lts.

Fig. 84 Changing a wheel: tyre valve

and

the c

orr

ect

position for the anti-theft wheel

locking bolt

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the

ar t

o loo

sen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn

before raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push

on the end of the wheel wrench with your

foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and

take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts

●

Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go

››› Fig. 83.

●

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the

bolt approximately one turn anticlock-

wise ›››

in Removing and fitting the wheel

on p

e 69

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should

be pushed fully on again after changing the

tyre.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt

●

Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel

bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.

●

Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft

wheel bolt ››› Fig. 84.

●

Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over

the adapter.

●

Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the

bolt approximately one turn anticlock-

wise ›››

in Removing and fitting the wheel

on p

e 69

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different cap.

This cap only fits on anti-theft locking bolts

and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Important information about wheel bolts

Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-

cially matched during construction. There-

fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct

wheel bolts with the right length and heads

must be used. This ensures that wheels are

fitted securely and that the brake system

functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not

even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the

same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft

locking bolt must be threaded onto positions

›

› Fig. 84

, taking the tyre valve’s po-

ition a

reference

. Otherwise it will not

be po

ible to mount the hubcap.

The essentials

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 85 Jack position points.

Fig. 86 Fitting the jack.

●

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm

nd. If

necessary use a large, strong

board or similar support. If the surface is slip-

pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a

rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-

ping ›››

●

Find the s

por

t point on the strut (sunken

area) closest to the wheel to be changed

››› Fig. 85.

●

Turn the jack* crank handle, located below

the strut support point, to raise it until the

tab

›

›› Fig. 86

s below the housing provi-

ded.

●

Align the jack* so that tab

“grips” onto

the hou

g provided on the strut and the

mobile base

is resting on the ground. The

se p

late

should fall vertically with re-

pect

o the support point

●

Continue turning the jack* until the wheel

lightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING

●

Make s

ure that the jack* remains stable. If

the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could

slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant

risk of injury.

●

Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-

plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles

could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.

●

Only mount the jack* on the support points

designed for this purpose on the strut, and

always align the jack correctly. If you do not,

the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-

equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!

●

The height of the parked vehicle can

change as a result of variations in tempera-

ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-

bar. On

ly place the jack* on the points de-

signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-

wise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel

bolts and r

aising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

●

Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box

spanner and p

lace them on a clean surface.

●

Take off the wheel

›››

uttin

g on the s

pare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation

direction, observe the instructions in

›››

page 69.

●

Mount the wheel.

●

Screw on the wheel bolts in position and

tighten them loosely with a box spanner.

●

Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

●

Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs

using the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turn

easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

The essentials

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-

These surfaces must be clean before fit-

ting the wheel.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel

bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

After changing a wheel, have the tightening

torque checked immediately with a torque

wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any

rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re-

placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to

the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have

been tightened to the prescribed torque, they

could come loose while driving.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not properly tightened,

they cou

ld come loose while driving and

cause an accident, serious injury and loss of

vehicle control.

●

Use only wheel bolts which correspond to

the rim in question.

●

Never use different wheel bolts.

●

Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,

free of oil and grease, and it should be possi-

ble to screw them easily.

●

To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only use

the wheel wrench that came with the car from

the factory.

●

Loosen the wheel

bolts only about one turn

before raising the vehicle with the jack.

●

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or

to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts

have been tightened to the prescribed tor-

que, they could come loose while driving.

●

Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel

rims with bolted ring trims.

●

If wheel bolts are tightened below the pre-

scribed torque, the bolts and rims could come

loose while driving. If tightening torque is too

high, the wheel bolts or threads can be dam-

aged.

CAUTION

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim

may

hit and damage the brake disc. For this

reason, please take care and get a second

person to assist you.

Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-

ation

A directional tread pattern can be identified

the arr

ows on the sidewall that point in

the direction of rotation. Always observe the

direction of rotation indicated when fitting

the wheel to guarantee optimum properties

of this type of tyres with regard to grip,

noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare

tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive

with care as this means the tyre does not of-

fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-

ticular importance when the road surface is

wet.

To return to directional tread tires, replace

the punctured tyre as soon as possible and

restore the obligatory direction of rotation of

all tyres.

Subsequent work

●

Alloy wheels: r

ace the wheel bolt caps.

●

Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.

●

Return all tools to their proper storing loca-

tion.

●

If the replaced wheel does not fit in the

spare wheel housing, store it safely in the

luggage compartment ›››



page 160.

●

Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-

ted tyre as soon as possible.

●

In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-

cator, adjust the pressure and store it in

memory

›››



page 278.

●

Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-

que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-

while, drive carefully.

●

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as

poss

ible.

The essentials

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be used on the

front wheel

●

Check that they are correctly seated after

driving for a few yards; correct the position if

necessary, in accordance with the manufac-

turer's fitting instructions.

●

Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

●

If there is a danger of being trapped de-

spite h

aving mounted the chains, it is best to

disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC

›››



page 183.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as

well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only

be used with the following wheel rim/tyre

combination.

185/70 R14 Chains with links of maximum 13.5

185/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 13.5

195/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

Remove wheel covers and any integral trim

rin

g bef

e fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free of

snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the

wheels become damaged quickly and may

even be rendered unusable.

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened in

accor

dance with the manufacturer's instruc-

tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-

to contact with the wheel housing.

Emergency towing of the vehi-

owing

Fig. 87 Right side of the front bumper: Tow-

g rin

Fig. 88 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing

ring.

Towline anchorages

Att

h the b

ar or rope to the towline ancho-

rages.

The towline anchorages are located under

the floor panel in the luggage compartment,

next to the vehicle tools ››› page 65.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw

connection ››› Fig. 87 or ››› Fig. 88 and tighten

it with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-

ed using a tow bar. You should only use a

tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-

duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-

able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-

bre or similarly elastic material.

The essentials

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the

wline anc

horages provided or a towing

bracket.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

●

The tow rope must be taut before you drive

off.

●

Release the clutch very carefully when start-

ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-

ate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especially

when using a tow rope. Both drivers should

realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-

experienced drivers should not attempt to

tow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle

and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.

When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-

ways a risk of overloading and damaging the

anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must

be switched on to prevent the steering wheel

from locking and also to allow the use of the

turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and

washers.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles

with a manual gearbox. With an automatic

gearbox, place the lever in N.

The brake servo only works when the engine

is running. When not running, you must ap-

ply considerably more pressure to the brake

pedal.

As the power assisted steering does not work

if the engine is not running, you will need

more strength to steer than you normally

would.



››› in General information on page 100



››› page 100

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting it

g the battery of another vehicle

››› page 71. You should only attempt to tow-

start a vehicle if charging the battery does

not work. This is done by leveraging wheel

movement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-

gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-

tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the

catalytic converter.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star-

ted:

●

Engage 2

or 3

gear.

●

Keep the clutch pressed down.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

As soon as the engine starts, press the

clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.

This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.



››› in General information on page 100



››› page 100

How to jump start

Jump l

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire

ss section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-

charged battery, the battery can be connec-

ted to the battery of another vehicle to start

the engine.

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN

72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-

tions). The wire cross section must be at least

25 mm

for petrol engines and at least

35 mm

for diesel engines.

The essentials

Note

●

The vehic

les must not touch each other,

otherwise electricity could flow as soon as

the positive terminals are connected.

●

The discharged battery must be properly

connected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 89 Diagram of connections for vehicles

ithout

Start-Stop system.

Fig. 90 Diagram of connections for vehicles

with St

art-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

h off the ignition of both vehicles

›››

onnect

one end of

the red jump lead to

the positive

terminal of the vehicle

ith the fl

battery

›

› Fig. 89

Connect the other end of the red jump

lead to the positive terminal

in the

ehic

e providing assistance

vehicles without Start-Stop system:

connect one end of the black jump lead

to the negative terminal

–

of the vehi-

e pr

oviding the current

›

› Fig. 89

For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-

nect one end of the black jump lead

to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid

piec

e of

met

al in the engine block, or to

the engine block itself ››› Fig. 90.

4a.

4b.

Connect the other end of the black jump

lead

to a solid metal component bol-

ed t

o the en

gine block or to the engine

block itself of the vehicle with the flat

battery. Do not connect it to a point near

the battery

ition the leads in such a way that

they cannot come into contact with any

moving parts in the engine compart-

ment.

Starting

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

boosting battery and let it run at idling

speed.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the

flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes

until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

Before you remove the jump leads,

switch off the dipped beam headlights if

they are switched on.

Turn on the heater blower and heated

rear window in the vehicle with the flat

battery. This helps minimise voltage

peaks which are generated when the

leads are disconnected.

When the engine is running, disconnect

the leads in reverse order to the details

given above.

10.

11.

The essentials

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient

met

al-t

o-met

al contact with the battery termi-

nals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-

onds, switch off the starter and try again after

about 1 minute.

WARNING

●

Plea

se note the safety warnings referring to

working in the engine compartment

›››



page 263, Working in the engine

compartment.

●

The battery providing assistance must have

the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)

and approximately the same capacity (see

imprint on battery). Failure to comply could

result in an explosion.

●

Never use jump leads when one of the bat-

teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-

ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could

leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery

freezes, it should be replaced.

●

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes

away from batteries, danger of explosion.

Failure to comply could result in an explo-

sion.

●

Observe the instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the jump leads.

●

Do not connect the negative cable from the

other vehicle directly to the negative terminal

of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the

battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of

explosion.

●

Never attac

h the negative cable to fuel sys-

tem components or the brake lines in the oth-

er vehicle.

●

The non-insulated parts of the battery

clamps must not be allowed to touch. The

jump lead attached to the positive battery

terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-

hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

●

Position the leads in such a way that they

cannot come into contact with any moving

parts in the engine compartment.

●

Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-

sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-

erwi

se electricity could flow as soon as the

positive terminals are connected.

Changing the windscreen wiper

des

Changing the wiper blades

Fig. 91 Wipers in service position.

Fig. 92 Changing the windscreen wiper

de.

To change the blades it is necessary to move

the w

iper

from the rest position into the

service position.

The essentials

Do not change the windscreen wipers when

out

the ser

vice position, as it could cause

paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction

with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades)

●

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

●

Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-

in approximately 9 seconds) push the wind-

screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The

windscreen wipers will move to the service

position ››› Fig. 91.

Removing the wiper blade

●

Lift the windscreen wiper arm.

●

Press the securing tab down

›

› Fig. 92

●

Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade

●

Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

●

Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in-

itial position.

●

Turn the ignition on, push the windscreen

wiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turn

the ignition off.



››› in Changing the windscreen and

rear window wiper blades on page 100



››› page 100

Changing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 93 Removing and fitting the rear window

iper b

ade.

Removing the wiper blade

●

Lift the wiper arm away from the glass

●

Slide the blade adapter in the direction of

the arr

w and r

emove the blade ››› Fig. 93 A.

Fitting the wiper blade

●

With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-

er arm.

●

Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 93 B

and slide the adapter along until it engages.



››› in Changing the windscreen and

rear window wiper blades on page 100



››› page 100

Safe driving

Safety

Saf

e driv

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information,

tips, sug

gestions and warnings that you

should read and consider for both your own

safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

●

This m

anual contains important informa-

tion about the operation of the vehicle, both

for the driver and the passengers. The other

sections of the on-board documentation also

contain further information that you should

be aware of for your own safety and for the

safety of your passengers.

●

Ensure that the on-board documentation is

kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-

cially important when lending or selling the

vehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

e setting off

For your own safety and the safety of your

sengers, always note the following points

before every trip:

–

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn

signals are working properly.

–

Check tyre pressure.

–

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and

good view of the surroundings.

–

Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured

››› page 160.

–

Make sure that no objects can interfere

with the pedals.

–

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-

rors properly according to your size.

–

Ensure that the passenger in the central

rear seat always has the head restraint in

the correct position for use.

–

Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-

straints according to their height.

–

Protect children with appropriate child

seats and properly applied seat belts

››› page 92.

–

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct

your passengers also to assume a proper

sitting position ››› page 76.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your

passengers also to fasten their seat belts

properly ››› page 81.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself

and your p

assengers. When your concentra-

tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as

others on the road ›››

, for this reason:

–

Always pay attention to traffic and do not

get di

stracted by passengers or telephone

calls.

–

Never drive when your driving ability is im-

paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

–

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

–

Always reduce your speed as appropriate

for ro

ad, traffic and weather conditions.

–

When travelling long distances, take

breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

–

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired

or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,

the risk of

injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your

sengers in danger. In the event of an acci-

dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part

the s

ety equipment in your SEAT

●

three-point seat belts,

●

Belt tension limiter for the front and rear

side seats

●

belt tensioners for the front and rear seats,

●

front airbags,

●

side airbags in the front seat backrests,

●

“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear

child seat system

●

height-adjustable front head restraints,

●

Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-

sition and non-use position

●

adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above

works together to provide you and your pas-

sengers with the best possible protection in

the event of an accident. However, these

safety systems can only be effective if you

and your passengers are sitting in a correct

position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehicle

occupants

Correct sitting position for the driver

Fig. 94 The proper distance between driver

and s

eerin

g wheel.

Fig. 95 Correct head restraint position for the

driv

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injur

in the ev

ent of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the driv-

er:

–

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a

distance of at least 25 cm between the

steering wheel and the centre of your chest

››› Fig. 94.

–

Move the driver's seat forwards or back-

wards so that you are able to press the ac-

celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the

floor with your knees still slightly angled

›››

–

Ensure that you can reach the highest point

the s

eering wheel.

–

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

head, or as close as possible to the same

level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 95.

–

Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back rests completely

against it.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.

–

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you

have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 154.

Depending on the version/market.

Safe driving

WARNING

●

An incorrect

sitting position of the driver

can lead to severe injuries.

●

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at

least 25 cm distance between the centre of

the chest and the centre of the steering

wheel ››› Fig. 94. If distance is less than 25

cm, the airbag system may not protect you

properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of 25

cm, contact a specialised workshop. The

workshop will help you decide if special spe-

cific modifications are necessary.

●

When driving, always hold the steering

wheel with both hands on the outside of the

ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.

This reduces the risk of injury when the driver

airbag is triggered.

●

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12

o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.

in the centre of the steering wheel). In such

cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-

tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver

during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-

cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far

back! The airbag system and seat belts can

only provide optimal protection when the

backrest is in an upright position and the

driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-

ly.

●

Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-

ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 20

WARNING

●

Never adju

st the position of the steering

wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this

could cause an accident.

●

Move the lever up firmly so the steering

wheel position does not accidentally change

during driving. risk of accident!

●

Make sure you are capable of reaching and

firmly holding the upper part of the steering

wheel: risk of accident!

●

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it

points towards your face, the driver airbag

will not protect you properly in the event of

an accident. Make sure that the steering

wheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front passen-

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of

injur

in the ev

ent of an accident, we recom-

mend the following adjustments for the front

passenger:

–

Move the front passenger seat back as far

as possible

›››

–

e the se

at backrest to an upright posi-

tion so that your back rests completely

against it.

–

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is at the same level as the top of your

head, or as close as possible to the same

level as the top of your head ››› page 79.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the front passenger seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.

It is possible to deactivate the front passen-

ger airbag in exceptional circumstances

››› page 90.

Adjusting the front passenger seat

›››



page 19.

WARNING

●

An incorrect

sitting position of the front

passenger can lead to severe injuries.

●

Adjust the front passenger seat so that

there is at least 25 cm between your chest

and the dash panel. If distance is less than

25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you

properly.

●

If your physical constitution prevents you

from maintaining the minimum distance of 25

cm, contact a specialised workshop. The

workshop will help you decide if special spe-

cific modifications are necessary.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

●

Alwa

ys keep your feet in the footwell when

the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the

dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An

incorrect sitting position exposes you to an

increased risk of injury in case of a sudden

braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-

gered, you could sustain severe injuries due

to an incorrect sitting position.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-

senger in events such as sudden braking ma-

noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the

backrest tilted far back! The airbag system

and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-

tection when the backrest is in an upright po-

sition and the front passenger is wearing his

or her seat belt properly. The further the seat

backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater

the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning

of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-

sition!

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order

to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seat

sengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a

den br

aking manoeuvre or an accident,

passengers on the rear seat bench must con-

sider the following:

–

Sit up straight.

–

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-

sition ››› page 79.

–

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of the rear seat.

–

Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.

–

Use an appropriate child restraint system

when you take children in the vehicle

››› page 92.

WARNING

●

If the pa

ssengers in the rear seats are not

sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-

juries.

●

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order

to achieve maximum protection.

●

Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-

tion when seat backrests are in an upright

position and the vehicle occupants are wear-

ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In

the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-

sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-

tioning of the seat belt increases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-

tion

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-

when the belt

ebs are properly posi-

tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-

tially reduce the protective function of seat

belts and increase the risk of injury due to in-

correct seat belt position. As the driver, you

are responsible for all passengers, especially

children.

–

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect

sitting position in the vehicle while travel-

ling ›››

The f

lowing list contains examples of sit-

ting positions that could be dangerous for all

vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,

but we would like to make you aware of this

issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

●

Never stand in the vehicle.

●

Never stand on the seats.

●

Never kneel on the seats.

●

Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

●

Never lean against the dash panel.

●

Never lie on the rear bench.

●

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

●

Never sit sideways.

●

Never lean out of a window.

●

Never put your feet out of a window.

●

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

●

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-

well.

●

Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

●

Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-

gage compartment.

Safe driving

WARNING

●

Any inc

orrect sitting position increases the

risk of severe injuries.

●

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the

vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags

are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant

who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-

tion.

●

Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-

er sitting position and maintain it throughout

the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-

sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-

sition during the trip ››› page 76, Correct posi-

tion of the vehicle occupants.

Correct adjustment of front head re-

aint

Fig. 96 Correctly adjusted head restraint as

iew

ed fr

om the front and the side.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

por

ant

part of passenger protection and can

reduce the risk of injuries in most accident

situations.

–

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper

edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-

el as the top of your head, or at the very

least, at eye level ››› Fig. 96.

WARNING

●

Trav

elling with the head restraints removed

or improperly adjusted increases the risk of

severe injuries. An improper adjustment of

the head restraints may cause death in an ac-

cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-

ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-

pected manoeuvres.

●

The head restraints must always be adjus-

ted according to the height of the passenger.

Correct adjustment of rear head re-

aint

Fig. 97 Head restraints in the correct posi-

tion.

Fig. 98 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-

por

ant

part of the passenger protection and

can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-

dent situations

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

Rear head restraints

–

The rear head restraints have 2 positions:

and

non-use.

–

One position for use (head restraint raised)

››› Fig. 97. In this position, the head re-

straints are used normally, protecting pas-

sengers along with the rear seat belts.

–

And one position for non-use (head re-

straint lowered).

–

To fit the head restraints in position for use,

pull on the edges with both hands in the

direction of the arrow.

WARNING

●

Under no circ

umstances should the rear

passengers travel while the head restraints

are in the non-use position. See the warning

label located on the rear side fixed window

››› Fig. 98.

●

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint

with either of the outer seat rear head re-

straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment of

the head r

estraints ››› page 154.

Pedal area

–

Ensure that you can always press the accel-

erator

, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired

to the floor.

–

Ensure that the pedals can return unim-

paired to their initial positions.

–

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-

tened during the trip and do not obstruct

the pedals

›››

se floor mats which leave the pedals

clear and which are secured to prevent them

from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor

mats from a specialised dealership.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must

be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop

the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet

properly and give you a good feeling for the

pedals.

WARNING

●

If the peda

ls are obstructed, an accident

may occur. Risk of serious injuries.

●

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-

erings over the original floor mats. This

would reduce the pedal area and could ob-

struct the ped

als. Risk of accident.

●

Never place objects in the driver footwell.

An object could move into the pedal area and

impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-

den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will

not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-

celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

Seat belts

ear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five se

ats, two in the front

and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped

with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

●

Never tran

sport more than the permitted

amount of people in your vehicle.

●

Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-

ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or

her seat. Children must be protected with an

appropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp* 

Fig. 99 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-

upied and c

orr

esponding seat belt fastened

display.

The control lamp illuminates to remind the

driv

er t

o f

asten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

–

Fasten your seat belt securely.

–

Instruct your passengers to fasten their

seat belts properly before driving off.

–

Protect children by using a child seat ac-

cording to the child's height and weight.

When the ignition is switched on, the control

lamp  in the instrument panel lights up (de-

pending on the model version) if the driver or

passenger have not fastened their seat belts.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed

surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the

seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened

during the drive, a warning sound will be

heard for a few seconds. The warning light

will also flash .

The lamp  goes out when the driver and

passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-

nition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when the

ignition is switched on, the seat belt status

display ››› Fig. 99 on the instrument panel in-

forms the driver whether the passengers in

the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

The  symbol indicates that the passenger in

this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened

or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-

played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-

dication can be hidden by pressing the

0.0/SET

button on the dash panel.

The se

belt

status flashes for a maximum of

30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats

is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.

An audible warning will also be heard if the

vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h

(15 mph).

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 100 Drivers with properly worn seat belts

l not be thrown forward in the event of sud-

den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants

in the pr

oper po

ition. These also help pre-

vent uncontrolled movements that may result

in serious injury and reduce the risk of being

thrown out of the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts

correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the

belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,

the front part of your vehicle and other pas-

sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-

gy released in a collision. Taken together, all

these features reduce the releasing kinetic

energy and consequently, the risk of injury.

This is why it is so important to fasten seat

belts before every trip, even when "just driv-

ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat

belts as well. Accident statistics have shown

that wearing seat belts is an effective means

of substantially reducing the risk of injury

and improving the chances of survival when

involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,

properly worn seat belts improve the protec-

tion provided by airbags in the event of an

accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt

is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-

bags, the seat belts must be fastened and

worn. The front airbags, for example, are only

triggered in some cases of head-on collision.

The front airbags will not be triggered during

minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-

sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-

bag trigger threshold value in the control unit

is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat

belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants

have fastened their seat belts properly before

you drive off!

Important safety instructions for the

use of seat belts

–

Always wear the seat belt as described in

thi

section.

–

sure that the seat belts can be fastened

at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

●

If seat

belts are worn incorrectly or not at

all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The

optimal protection from seat belts can be

achieved only if you use them properly.

●

Fasten your seat belt before every trip -

even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-

cupants must also wear the seat belts at all

times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-

jured.

●

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection

if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

●

Never allow two passengers (even children)

to share the same seat belt.

●

Always keep both feet in the footwell in

front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in

motion.

●

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

●

The seat belt must never be twisted while it

is being worn.

●

The seat belt should never lie on hard or

fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)

because this can cause injuries.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or

jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

●

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or

in any other incorrect position.

●

Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an

overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper

fit and function of the seat belts, reducing

their capacity to protect.

Seat belts

●

The slot in the se

at belt buckle must not be

blocked with paper or other objects, as this

can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-

curely.

●

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or

similar items to alter the position of the belt

webbing.

●

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the

connections, belt retractors or parts of the

buckle could cause severe injuries in the

event of an accident. Therefore, you must

check the condition of all seat belts at regular

intervals.

●

Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-

dent and have been stretched must be re-

placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal

may be necessary even if there is no apparent

damage. The belt anchorage should also be

checked.

●

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat

belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-

moved or modified in any way.

●

The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the

retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of

ics

Fig. 101 A driver not wearing a seat belt is

thr

wn f

orward violently.

Fig. 102 The unbelted passenger in the rear

s thrown forward violently, hitting the

driver who is wearing a seat belt.

It is easy to explain how the laws of physics

ork

in the c

ase of a head-on collision: when

a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

called “kinetic energy” is created both in the

passengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on

the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of

the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher

the speed and the greater the weight, the

more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an

accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the

speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles

from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h

(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-

netic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-

ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the

event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-

cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed

solely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to

50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-

ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne

(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are

not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on

collision, they will move forward at the same

speed their vehicle was travelling just before

the impact. This example applies not only to

head-on collisions, but to all accidents and

collisions.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the

body

in a c

llision are so great that it is not

possible to brace oneself with one's hands.

In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers

are thrown forward and will make violent con-

tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,

windscreen or whatever else is in the way

››› Fig. 101.

It is also important for rear passengers to

wear seat belts properly, as they could other-

wise be thrown forward violently through the

vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in

the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-

danger not only themselves but also the front

occupants ››› Fig. 102.

How to properly adjust your

seatbelt

Fastening and unfastening your seat

belt

Fig. 103 Positioning and removing the seat

belt

kle.

Fig. 104 Position of seat belt during pregnan-

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 19.

Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if

the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

●

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

●

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch

plate and pull it slowly across your chest and

lap.

●

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the

appropriate seat and push it down until it is

securely locked with an audible click

›››

Fig. 103.

●

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is

securely engaged in the buckle.

Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat-

etr

actor on the shoulder strap. Full free-

dom of movement is permitted when the

shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-

ing sudden braking, during travel in steep

areas or bends and during acceleration, the

automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front

seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners

››› page 85.

Releasing the seat belt

●

Press the red button on the belt buckle

››› Fig. 103. The latch plate is released and

springs out ›››

●

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls

up e

ily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-

ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING

●

The seat belt

s offer best protection only

when the backrests are in an upright position

and the seat belts have been fastened prop-

erly.

●

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of

another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will

not protect you properly and the risk of injury

is increased.

●

Never unb

uckle a seat belt while the vehi-

cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the

risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

●

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-

vere injuries in the event of an accident.

●

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie

on the centre of the shoulder, never across

the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit

comfortably on the torso

●

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across

the pelvis, never across the stomach. The

seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on

the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to

take up any slack.

●

For pregnant women, the lap part of the

seat belt must lie as low as possible over the

pelvis, never across the stomach, and always

lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the

abdomen ››› Fig. 104.

●

Always engage the retractor lock when you

are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1

››› page 92.

●

Read and observe the warnings ››› page 82.

Seat belt tensioners*

belt

tensioner operation

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc-

cupants are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,

although only in severe head-on and lateral

collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat

belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc-

cupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered in

the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle

overturns, or in accidents where no major

forces act on the vehicle.

Note

●

If the seat

belt tensioners are triggered, a

fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is

not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

●

The relevant safety requirements must be

observed when the vehicle or components of

the system are scrapped. Specialised work-

shops are familiar with these regulations,

which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belt ten-

ioner

The belt tensioners are components of the

belts

that are installed in the seats of

your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-

ers or remove and install parts of the system

when performing other repair work, the seat

belt may be damaged. The consequence may

be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

tensioners function incorrectly or may not

nction at

all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-

sioner is not reduced and that removed parts

do not cause any injuries or environmental

pollution, regulations, which are known to

the specialised workshops, must be ob-

served.

WARNING

●

Improper use or r

epairs not carried out by

qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-

vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may

fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-

cumstances.

●

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or

install parts of the belt tensioners or seat

belts.

●

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-

matic retractor cannot be repaired.

●

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat

belts, including the removal and refitting of

system parts in conjunction with other repair

work, must be performed by a specialised

workshop only.

●

The belt tensioners will only provide pro-

tection for one accident and must be changed

if they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief

intr

oduction

y is it so important to wear a seat

belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best

protection, the se

at belt must always be worn

properly and the correct sitting position must

be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat

belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's

overall passive safety system. Please bear in

mind that the airbag system can only work ef-

fectively when the vehicle occupants are

wearing their seat belts correctly and have

adjusted the head restraints properly. There-

fore, it is most important to properly wear the

seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most countries, but also

for your safety

›››

page 81, Why wear a seat

belt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so

if you are not properly seated when the air-

bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-

ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle

occupants assume a correct sitting position

while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause

a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

thrown forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may

inflict critic

al or fatal injuries on the occu-

pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-

tance between yourself and the front airbag.

This way, the front airbags can completely

deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-

mum protection.

The most important factors that will trigger

an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle

of collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-

pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration

rate resulting from the collision and detected

by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration

occurring during the collision and measured

by the control unit remains below the speci-

fied reference values, the front, side and/or

curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-

to account that the visible damage in a vehi-

cle involved in an accident, no matter how

serious, is not a determining factor for the

airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

●

Wearin

g the seat belt incorrectly or assum-

ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to

critical or fatal injuries.

●

All vehicle occupants, including children,

who are not properly belted can sustain criti-

cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.

Children up to 12 years old should always

Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transport

chil

dren in the vehicle if they are not restrain-

ed or the restraint system is not appropriate

for their age, size or weight.

●

If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you

lean forward or to the side while travelling or

assume an incorrect sitting position, there is

a substantially increased risk of injury. This

increased risk of injury will be further in-

creased if you are struck by an inflating air-

bag.

●

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating

airbag, always wear the seat belt properly.

●

Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 21.

The airbag system is not a substitute for the

seat belts. The airbag system offers addition-

al protection for the driver and passenger in

combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system mainly comprises (as per

vehicle equipment):

●

an electronic control and monitoring sys-

tem (control unit)

●

frontal airbags for driver and passenger,

●

side airbags,

●

curtain airbags,

●

a control lamp  on the dash panel

››› page 91.

●

key-operated switch for front passenger air-

bag,

●

a control lamp for disabling/enabling the

front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored

electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-

luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-

nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control

lamp :

●

does not light up when the ignition is

switched on ››› page 91,

●

turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition

is switched on,

●

turns off and then lights up again after the

ignition is switched on,

●

illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is

moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

●

the ignition is switched off

●

there is a minor frontal collision

●

there is a minor side collision

●

there is a rear-end collision

●

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

●

The seat belt

s and airbags can only provide

maximum protection if the occupants are

seated correctly ››› page 76, Correct position

of the vehicle occupants.

●

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,

have the system checked immediately by a

specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a

frontal collision the system might not trigger

correctly or may fail to trigger at all.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within

thou

andths

of a second, to provide addi-

tional protection in the event of an accident.

A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-

ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function

when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-

bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-

sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-

over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag system

activating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role,

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi-

e hits

(hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle

speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-

vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-

tory and activates the respective restraint

system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-

fined reference value in the control unit the

airbags will not be triggered, even though

the accident may cause extensive damage to

the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous head-on collisions:

●

Driver airbag.

●

Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-

ous side-on collisions:

●

Front side airbag on the side of the acci-

dent.

●

Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-

cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

●

the interior lights switch on (if the interior

light switch is in the courtesy light position);

●

the hazard warning lights switch on;

●

all doors are unlocked;

●

the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 21.

WARNING

●

The seat belt

s and airbags can only provide

maximum protection if the occupants are

seated correctly ››› page 76, Correct position

of the vehicle occupants.

●

The deployment space between the front

passengers and the airbags must not in any

case be occupied by other passenger, pets

and objects.

●

The airbags provide protection for just one

accident; replace them once they have de-

ployed.

●

It is also important not to attach any ob-

jects such as cup holders or telephone

mountings to the surfaces covering the air-

bag units.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 22.

WARNING

●

If y

ou do not wear a seat belt, if you lean

forward, or are not seated correctly while the

vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk

of injury if the side airbag system is triggered

in an accident.

●

In order for the side airbags to provide their

maximum protection, the prescribed sitting

position must always be maintained with

seat belts fastened while travelling.

●

Occupants of the outer seats must never

carry any objects or pets in the deployment

space between them and the airbags, or al-

low children or other passengers to travel in

this position. It is also important not to at-

tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to

the doors. This would impair the protection

offered by the side airbags.

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used only

for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any

heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

●

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,

must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-

ster because the system may be damaged. In

this case, the side airbags would not be trig-

gered.

●

Under no circumstances should protective

covers be fitted over seats with side airbags

Airbag system

unless the covers have been approved for use

in your

vehicle. Because the airbag deploys

from the side of the backrest, the use of con-

ventional seat covers would obstruct the side

airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-

tiveness.

●

Any damage to the original seat upholstery

or around the seams of the side airbag units

must be repaired immediately by a special-

ised workshop.

●

The airbags provide protection for just one

accident; replace them once they have de-

ployed.

●

Any work on the side airbag system or re-

moval and installation of the airbag compo-

nents for other repairs (such as removal of

the front seat) should only be performed by a

specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may

occur during the airbag system operation.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

●

The side and head airbags are managed

through sensors located in the interior of the

front doors. To ensure the correct operation of

the side and curtain (head) airbags neither

the doors nor the door panels should be

modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-

ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

system may not work correctly. All work car-

ried out on the front door must be done in a

specialised workshop.

●

In a side-on collision the side airbags will

not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-

ure the pressure increase on the interior of

the doors, due to air escaping through the

areas with holes or openings in the door pan-

el.

●

Never driv

e if the interior door panels have

been removed or if the panels have not been

correctly fitted.

●

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers

in the door panels have been removed, un-

less the holes left by the loudspeakers have

been closed properly.

●

Always check that the openings are closed

or covered if additional loudspeakers or other

equipment are fitted inside the door panels.

●

Any work carried out to the doors should be

made in an authorised specialised workshop.

Head-protection airbags*

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 23.

WARNING

●

In order for the he

ad-protection airbags to

provide their maximum protection, the pre-

scribed sitting position must always be main-

tained with seat belts fastened while travel-

ling.

●

For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must

be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a

screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.

See your technical service to make this ad-

justment.

●

There mus

t be no other persons, animals or

objects between the occupants of the outer

seats and the deployment space of the head-

protection airbags so that the head-protec-

tion airbag can deploy completely without re-

striction and provide the greatest possible

protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have

not been expressly approved for use in your

vehicle may not be attached to the side win-

dows

●

The built-in coat hooks should be used only

for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any

heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-

ers.

●

The airbags provide protection for just one

accident; replace them once they have de-

ployed.

●

Any work on the head-protection airbag

system or removal and installation of the air-

bag components for other repairs (such as re-

moval of the roof lining) should only be per-

formed by a specialised workshop. Other-

wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-

tem operation.

●

Do not attempt to modify components of

the airbag system in any way.

●

The side and head airbags are managed

through sensors located in the interior of the

front doors. To ensure the correct operation of

the side and curtain airbags neither the

doors nor the door panels should be modified

in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the

front door is damaged, the airbag system

may not work correctly. All work carried out

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

on the front door must be done in a special-

ised work

shop.

Deactivating airbags

Activation and de

activation of front

passenger airbag*

Fig. 105 Switch for activating and deactivat-

g the fr

ont

passenger airbag.

Fig. 106 Centre side of dash panel: control

lamp for de

activated front passenger airbag

in centre console.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag

you have to use a rear-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the

rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the

front passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switch

When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-

ted, this means that only the front passenger

front airbag is deactivated. All the other air-

bags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front airbag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the door on the front passenger side.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

››› Fig. 105. About 3/4 of the key should en-

ter; this is as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If

you have difficulty, ensure that you have in-

serted the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp remains lit where it

says      in the centre of the

dash panel ››› Fig. 106.

Connect the front passenger front airbag

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the front passenger door.

●

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for

deactivating the front passenger airbag

››› Fig. 105. About 3/4 of the key should en-

ter, as far as it will go.

●

Turn the key gently to the  position. If you

have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted

the key as far as it will go.

●

Close the front passenger door.

●

Check, with the ignition switched on, that

the   control lamp does not remain lit

where it says      in the cen-

tre of the dash panel ››› Fig. 106. The  

control lamp lights up for 60 seconds and

then goes off.

Airbag system

WARNING

●

The driver of the

vehicle is responsible for

disabling or switching on the airbag.

●

Always switch off the ignition before disa-

bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do

so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-

vation system.

●

Never leave the key in the airbag disabling

switch as it could get damaged or enable or

disable the airbag during driving.

●

If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,

reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can

fulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps



It lights up on the combi-in-

strument

Fault in airbag

system and seat

belt tensioners.

Have the system checked immedi-

ately by a specialised workshop.

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger

front airbag disa-

bled.

Check whether the airbag should

remain disabled

 

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger

front airbag ena-

bled.

The control lamp switches off auto-

matically 60 seconds after the igni-

tion is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a few sec

onds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system

control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi-

cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat

belt tensioner system

›››

. Have the system

hec

ed immediately by a specialised work-

shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,

the warning lamp      re-

mains lit on the dash panel to remind you

that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the

front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp

does not remain lit or if it is lit together with

the control lamp  on the dash panel, there

is a fault in the airbag system

›››

. If the

ontr

l lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the

disabling of the airbag system

›››

. Have the

em checked immediately by a specialised

workshop.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat

belt ten

sioner system, the airbags and seat

belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to

trigger or m

ay even trigger unexpectedly.

●

The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-

taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the sys-

tem checked immediately by a specialised

workshop.

●

Do not mount a child seat in the front pas-

senger seat or remove the mounted child

seat! The front passenger front airbag may

deploy during an accident in spite of the

fault.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control lamps

and to the corr

esponding descriptions and in-

structions to avoid damage to the vehicle or

harm to the occupants.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

Transporting children safely

Chi

d s

afety

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from

accident

statistics, we recommend that chil-

dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear

seats. Depending on their age, height and

weight, children travelling in rear seats must

use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-

sons, the child seat should be installed in the

rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or

in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces

acting in a collision apply also to children

›››

page 83. But unlike adults, children do not

have fully developed muscle and bone struc-

tures. This means that children are subject to

a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must

always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-

ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-

gramme, which includes systems for all ages

made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see

www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-

signed and appr

oved, complying with the

ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats

shown on the website as described below:

●

Child seats in the opposite direction of

travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket

(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).

●

Child seats in the direction of travel (group

1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX

DUO Plus).

●

Child seats in the direction of travel (group

2): seat belt and ISOFIX (RÖMER KIDFIX XP

●

Child seats in the direction of travel (group

3): with seat belt (TAKATA MAXI PLUS

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats. Always read

and note ››› page 92.

We recommend you always carry the manu-

facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-

gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding the

front passenger's airbag

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 24.

Read and always observe the safety informa-

tion included in the following chapters:

●

Safety distance with respect to the passen-

ger airbag ››› page 86.

●

Objects between the passenger and the

passenger side airbag ›››

in Front airbags

on p

e 88

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-

bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing

backward since the airbag can strike the seat

with such force that it can cause serious or

fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old

should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to

transport children on the rear seats. This is

the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-

ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-

bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 90.

When transporting children, use a child seat

suitable for the age and size of each child

››› page 94.

WARNING

●

If a chi

ld seat is secured to the front pas-

senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-

ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an

accident increases.

●

An inflating front passenger airbag can

strike the rear-facing child seat and project it

with great force against the door, the roof or

the backrest.

Transporting children safely

●

Never ins

tall a child seat facing backwards

on the front passenger seat unless the front

passenger front airbag has been disabled.

Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!

However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-

ses, to transport a child in the front passen-

ger seat, the front passenger front airbag

must always be disabled ››› page 90, Activa-

tion and deactivation of front passenger air-

bag*. If the passenger seat has a height ad-

justment option, move it to the highest, most

upright position. If it is a fixed seat, it should

be moved to the rearmost position possible.

●

For those vehicles that do not include a key

lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-

cle must be taken to a technical service. Do

not forget to reconnect the airbag when an

adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.

●

All vehicle occupants, especially children,

must assume the proper sitting position and

be properly belted in while travelling.

●

Never hold children or babies on your lap,

this can result in potentially fatal injuries to

the child!

●

Never allow a child to be transported in a

vehicle without being properly secured, or to

stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.

In an accident, the child could be flung

through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-

juries to themselves and to the other vehicle

occupants.

●

If children assume an improper sitting posi-

tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose

themselves to greater risk of injury in the

event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an

accident. This is particularly important if the

chil

d is travelling on the front passenger seat

and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-

dent; as this could cause serious injury or

even death.

●

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

●

Never leave a child alone in the child seat

or inside the vehicle because depending on

the season, very high temperatures may be

reached inside a parked vehicle, which could

be fatal.

●

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall

must not wear a normal seat belt without a

child seat, as this could cause injuries to the

abdominal and neck areas during a sudden

braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

●

Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-

ted and the seat belt should be properly in

place ››› page 81.

●

Only one child may occupy a child seat

››› page 93, Child seats.

●

When a child seat is mounted in the rear

seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-

tivated ››› page 138.

Child seats

Saf

ety

structions

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 23.

WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured in

the vehic

le with a restraint system suitable

for age, weight and size.

●

Read and always observe information and

warnings concerning the use of child seats

››› page 92.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for use

with “ISOFIX” and Top

Tether* system child

seats.

●

Never secure other child seats that do not

have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or

retaining belts or objects to the fastening

rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-

ries to the child.

●

Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-

rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-

curing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat will

incre

ase the risk of injury in the event of a

crash.

●

Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the

luggage compartment.

●

Never secure or tie luggage or other items

to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper

ones (Top Tether).

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

Categorisation of child seats into

oup

Use only child seats that are officially ap-

prov

ed and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or

ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco-

nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-

ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9

months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18

months)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4

years old)

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7

years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7

years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-

proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129

standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE-

R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with

the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and

observe any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the

manufact

urer's Child Seat Instruction Manual

together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from

the Original Accessories Catalogue. These

child seats have been designed and tested

for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the

right child seat for your model and age group

at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval category

of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific

(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-

Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

●

Universal: Child seats with universal appro-

val can be installed in all vehicles. There is

no need to consult any list of models. In the

case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the

child seat is additionally provided with a Top

Tether belt.

●

Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in

addition to the standard requirements of uni-

versal approval, requires safety devices to

lock the child seat, which require additional

testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-

proval include a list of vehicle models for

which they can be installed.

●

Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval

requires a dynamic test of the child seat for

each vehicle model separately. Child seats

with vehicle-specific approval also include a

list of vehicle models for which they can be

installed.

●

i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must

meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-

R 129 standard in relation to installation and

safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you

which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-

cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-

ment

tems are used for safely installing

child seats.

Attachment systems overview

●

ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-

ment system allowing quick and safe attach-

ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-

tachment establishes a rigid connection be-

tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,

called connectors. These connectors are fit-

ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found

between the seat cushion and the backrest of

the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX

attachment systems are used mainly in Eu-

rope

›››



page 27. If necessary, ISOFIX at-

tachment may have to be supplemented with

a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

Transporting children safely

●

Aut

atic

three-point seat belt. Whenever

possible, it is preferable to attach the child

seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at-

taching them with an automatic three-point

seat belt ›››



page 25.

Additional attachment:

●

Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided

over the back of the rear seat and attached to

an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points

are located at the back of the rear seat back-

rest on the boot side ›››



page 30. The

rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are

marked with an anchor symbol.

●

Support bracket: Some child seats rest on

the floor of the vehicle with a support brack-

et. The support bracket prevents the child

seat from tipping forward in the event of im-

pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket

should only be used in the passenger seat

and side rear seats ›››

. For the assembly of

thi

type of

seat you should also consult the

list of approved vehicles for this assembly,

available in the instructions for child restraint

systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child

seats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats as

follows:

●

Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite

direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack-

et or iSize.

●

Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-

FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support bracket can

cause seriou

s or fatal injury.

●

Make sure the support bracket is correctly

and safely installed.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Safety

Event Data Recorder

cription and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder

(EDR).

The EDR’s fu

nction is to record data in the

event of a mild or serious accident. These da-

ta are used to support the analysis of how

different vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range

(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-

ing data and data from the restraint systems,

such as:

●

How different vehicle systems worked.

●

Whether the driver and the occupants were

wearin

g their seatbelts.

●

How hard the acceleration or brake pedal

was pressed.

●

Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also

recorded. This includes data such as whether

the systems were inactive or active and if

such action had an impact on the vehicle’s

dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the

aforementioned situations, accelerating or

decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-

cludes data from systems such as:

●

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

●

Emergency brake assist system (Front As-

sist).

●

Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac-

cident situations. No data are recorded in

normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the

vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances

are personal data such as name, age, or gen-

der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties

(such as criminal proceedings authorities)

may relate the contents of the EDR data to

other data sources and create a personal ref-

erence in the context of an accident investi-

gation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary

to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-

face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless

the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee

or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-

tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related

products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field

research and in order to improve vehicle sys-

tem quality. Any data used for the purposes

of research will be treated anonymously (in

other words, no reference will be made to the

vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Self-help

Emergencies

Self

-help

Emer

ency equipment

Emergency warning triangle*

The use of reflective warning triangles is

oblig

atory in emergencies in some countries.

As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light

bulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storage

compartment which is located under the lug-

gage compartment floor.

Note

●

The warning tri

angle is not part of the vehi-

cle's standard equipment.

●

The warning triangle should meet legal re-

quirements.

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*

The first-aid kit can go in the storage com-

tment

which is located under the luggage

compartment floor.

The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-

gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

Note

●

The first

-aid kit and the fire extinguisher

are not part of the vehicle's standard equip-

ment.

●

The first aid kit must comply with legal re-

quirements.

●

Observe the expiry date of the contents of

the first aid kit. After it has expired you

should purchase a new one.

●

The fire extinguisher must comply with le-

gal requirements.

●

Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully

functional. The fire extinguisher should,

therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker

on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the

next date for checking.

●

Before acquiring accessories and emergen-

cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces-

sories and spares” ››› page 247.

Vehicle tools

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 65

Depending on the equipment, the tools and

anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor

panel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

●

Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts*

●

Towline anchorage

●

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

●

Jack*

●

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover* /

wheel bolt cap clip.

Some of the items listed are only provided in

certain model versions, or are optional ex-

tras.

WARNING

●

The factor

y-supplied jack is only designed

for changing wheels on this model. On no ac-

count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-

hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

●

Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.

●

Never start the engine when the vehicle is

on the jack. Risk of accident.

●

If work is to be carried out underneath the

vehicle, this must be secured by suitable

means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Note

The jack does not generally require any main-

tenanc

e. If required, it should be greased us-

ing universal type grease.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Tyre repair

yre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 64

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)

will reliably seal punctures caused by the

penetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-

jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,

you must again check the tyre pressure about

10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if

the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are

familiar with the procedure and you have the

necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you

should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following

cases:

●

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

●

In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).

●

In the event of cuts or perforations in the

tyre gr

eater than 4 mm.

●

If you have been driving with very low pres-

sure or a completely flat tyre.

●

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by

date.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerou

s, especially when filling the tyre at the

roadside. Please observe the following rules

to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Park it at a safe distance from surrounding

traffic to fill the tyre.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat

and solid.

●

All passengers and particularly children

must keep a safe distance from the work area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Use the tyre mobility system only if you are

familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-

erwise, you should seek professional assis-

tance.

●

The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-

rary emergency use only until you can reach

the nearest specialised workshop.

●

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-

bility set as soon as possible.

●

The sealant is a health hazard and must be

cleaned immediately if it comes into contact

with the skin.

●

Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the

reach of small children.

●

Never use a jack, even if it has been ap-

proved for your vehicle.

●

Always stop the engine, apply the hand-

brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a

manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of

vehicl

e involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the

ame perf

ormance properties as a conven-

tional tyre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and

fast cornering.

●

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum

speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check

the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of used or expired sealant observing

any l

egal requirements.

Note

●

A new bottle of se

alant can be purchased at

SEAT dealerships.

●

Take into account the separate instruction

manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-

er.

Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 107 Standard representation: contents of

the anti-p

nct

ure kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath

the floor c

ering in the luggage compart-

ment. It includes the following components

››› Fig. 107:

Valve insert remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.

80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated

in the inflator tube).

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-

orin

g sy

stem (it can also be integrated in

the inflator tube).

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover

has a gap at the

er end f

or the valve insert. The valve in-

sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this

way. This also applies to its replacement part

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressor

and the inflator t

ube may become hot.

●

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

●

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or

hot air compressor on flammable material.

●

Allow them to cool before storing the de-

vice.

●

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at

least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is

too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-

tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-

mum of 8 operation

al minutes to avoid over-

heating! Before switching on the air compres-

sor again, let

it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube ›››

Fig. 107

again and check the pressure on the gauge

1.3 bar (19 ps

i / 130 kPa) and lower:

●

Stop the vehicle! The tyre c

annot be sealed

sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

●

You should obtain professional assistance

›››

1.4 b

ar (20 p

i / 140 kPa) and higher:

●

Set the tyre pressure to the correct value

again.

●

Carefully resume your journey, without ex-

ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach

the nearest specialised workshop and re-

place the tyre.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous

and can cau

se accidents and serious injury.

●

Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure

is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

●

Seek specialist assistance.

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Changing the windscreen wiper

des

Changing the windscreen and rear

window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 73.

Perfect windscreen wiper blade condition is

essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper

blades should be replaced immediately.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as

standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-

lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the

noise of the water as it is wiped across the

windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,

they should be changed if they are damaged,

or cleaned if they are dirty

›››

thi

does not produce the desired results,

the setting angle of the windscreen wiper

arms might be incorrect. They should be

checked by a specialised workshop and cor-

rected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility

through al

l windows!

●

Cle

an the windscreen wiper blades and all

windows regularly.

●

The wiper blades should be changed once

or twice a year.

CAUTION

●

Dam

aged or dir

ty windscreen wipers could

scratch the glass.

●

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win-

dows. This could damage the windscreen

wiper blades.

●

Never move any windscreen wiper by hand.

This could cause damage.

●

To prevent damage to the bonnet and the

windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only

be lifted off the windscreen when in service

position.

Note

●

The winds

creen wiper arms can be moved

to the service position only when the bonnet

is properly closed.

●

You can also use the service position, for

example, if you want to fix a cover over the

windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of

ice.

Towing or tow-starting

Gener

information

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 70.

Tow-starting means starting the engine of

the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another

that is not roadworthy.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access

system, towing is only allowed with the igni-

tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is

towed with the engine switched off and the

ignition connected. Depending on the battery

charge status, the drop in voltage may be so

large, even after just a few minutes, that no

electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with

the Keyless Access system, the steering

wheel could lock up.

WARNING

If the vehicle has no electrical power, the

brake light

s, turn signals and all other lights

will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-

cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident.

100

Self-help

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-

ing, for e

xample, the towed vehicle can easily

be driven into the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant

in the automatic

transmission the car may

only be towed with the driven wheels lifted

clear of the road, or transported on a special

car transporter or trailer.

CAUTION

Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at-

tempt t

o start it. There is risk of damage to

the catalytic converter.

Note

●

Plea

se observe related legal requirements.

●

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both

vehicles. However, observe any regulations

to the contrary.

●

The tow rope must not be twisted. Other-

wise the front tow line anchorage could be

pulled off the vehicle.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-

ed.

The jump s

tart should be used instead

›››



page 71.

For technical reasons, towing the following

vehicles is not allowed:

●

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

●

If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-

cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access

locking and ignition system the steering re-

mains locked and the electronic parking

brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-

tronic lock of the steering column be re-

leased if they are activated.

●

If the battery is flat, it is possible that the

engine control units may not operate correct-

ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be

tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-

es):

●

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

●

Keep the clutch pressed down.

●

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-

ing lights.

●

Once both vehicles are moving, release the

clutch.

●

Once the engine starts, press the clutch

and disengage the gear to avoid colliding

with the towing vehicle.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if the

electronic

parking brake and, if appropriate,

the electronic lock of the steering column are

deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-

ply or ther

e is an electric system fault, the

engine must be tow-started to deactivate the

electronic parking brake and the electronic

lock of the steering column.

101

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Anchoring the front tow line

Fig. 108 Right side of the front bumper: re-

e the lid.

Fig. 109 Right side of the front bumper: tow-

line anc

hor

e screwed in.

The front towline anchorage is only mounted

the

ehicle has to be towed.

There is a cover with an opening into which

the towline anchorage is screwed on the right

part of the front bumper.

–

Take the towline anchorage from the on-

board tool set.

–

Remove the front cover by pressing down

on its left-hand side ››› Fig. 108.

–

Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in

the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 109.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage

and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the

towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool

kit. The towline anchorage should always be

kept in the vehicle.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 110 Right side of the rear bumper: cover-

Fig. 111 Right side of the rear bumper: tow-

line anchorag

e screwed in.

The rear towline anchorage should only be

mou

ed if

you wish to tow another vehicle.

Vehicles with towline anchorage

On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov-

er which covers a threaded hole.

–

Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-

cle tool set ››› page 97.

–

To open the cover, press the top right side

››› Fig. 110.

–

Screw the towline anchorage into the screw

connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 111

and tighten with the wheel brace.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage

and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace

the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-

age should always be kept in the vehicle.

102

Self-help

WARNING

●

If the to

wline anchorage is not screwed in

as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw

connection shearing off during towing (acci-

dent risk).

●

If your car has a towing bracket, only use

special towing ropes. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only

use spec

ial tow bars to prevent damage to

the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe-

cially approved for use with towing brackets.

Towing vehicles with a manual gear-

Towing is relatively straightforward.

se observe the relevant instructions

›››

page 100.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or

tow rope in the normal way, with all four

wheels on the road; it can also be towed with

either the front or rear wheels lifted off the

road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h

(30 mph).

Towing a vehicle equipped with auto-

matic gearbox

Certain restrictions must be observed when

tow

ing your vehicle.

Please observe the relevant instructions

››› page 100.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or

tow rope in the normal way, with all four

wheels on the ground. When doing so,

please note the following points:

●

Make sure the selector l

ever is in the N po-

sition.

●

The vehicle must not be towed faster than

50 km/h (30 mph).

●

The vehicle must not be towed further than

50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine

is not running, the gearbox oil pump does

not work and the gearbox is not adequately

lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan-

ces.

If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-

down truck, it must only be suspended at the

front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-

cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed

with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.

travelling backwards), the drive shafts also

turn backwards. The planetary gears in the

automatic gearbox then turn at such high

speeds that the gearbox will be severely

damaged in a short time.

Note

●

If it i

s not possible to tow the vehicle in the

normal way, or if it has to be towed further

than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported

on a special car transporter or trailer.

●

Should the power supply to the selector

lever be interrupted in position P, the selector

lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be

recovered/manoeuvred you must manually

release the selector lever.

103

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various

electrical

components. Likewise, an electrical

component can be protected by several

fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the

problem has been solved. If a newly inserted

fuse blows after a short time, you must have

the electrical system checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system can

give serious

electrical shocks, causing burns

and even death!

●

Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-

tion system.

●

Take care not to cause short circuits in the

electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or

bridging a curr

ent circuit without fuses can

cause a fire and serious injury.

●

Never use a f

use with a higher value. Only

replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-

age (same colour and markings) and size.

●

Never repair a fuse.

●

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple

or similar.

CAUTION

●

o prev

ent damage to the vehicle's electric

system, before replacing a fuse always turn

off the ignition, the lights and all electrical

elements and remove the key from the igni-

tion.

●

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating

fuse, you could cause damage to another part

of the electrical system.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-

vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can

damage the electrical system.

●

Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-

ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems

with your vehicle.

Note

●

One component m

ay have more than one

fuse.

●

Several components may run on a single

fuse.

●

In the vehicle, there are more fuses than

those indicated in this chapter. These should

only be changed by a specialised workshop.

●

Pos

itions not containing a fuse do not ap-

pear in the following tables.

●

Some of the equipment listed in the tables

below pertain only to certain versions of the

model or are optional extras.

●

Please note that the above lists, while cor-

rect at the time of printing, are subject to

change.

Fuses to the left of the instrument

panel

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 62

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow Hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

5 Panoramic Roof 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow Hook 20

11 GNC solenoid valves 7.5

104

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

Lights switch, steering column LSS

and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/light

sensor

7.5

14 steering column LSS: wiper controls 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 30

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated Rear Window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

Connectivity Box, external audio

source wiring (Double USB-Aux IN),

telephone amplifier, MIB display

25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

No. Consumer/Amps

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10

Lights switch, diagnostic port, head-

light range control, steering column

LSS: lights, halogen headlights, re-

verse light switch, electrochromic mir-

ror, RKA without radio

7.5

Regulation of unfolded exterior mir-

rors

7.5

Clutch pedal, ignition relays, CNG re-

lay coil, AC sensor pressure

7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper mo-

tor, heated nozzles

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5

46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5

Steering Column Lock, Kessy Control

Unit

7.5

49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

No. Consumer/Amps

58 Double Water Pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

60 Tow Hook 30

61 Tow Hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compart-

ment

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 62

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

No. Consumer/Amps

MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

Diesel Engine Injection Module 30

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low

temperature coolant pump

(TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regulating

Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve AGR (TJ1),

High and Low Water Bumps (TJ1), SCR

relay coil

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

105

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), Gauge

control unit (TSI and Diesel)

Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid

Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electric fan,

Camshaft Control Valve, Active Carbon

Tank Valve and Oil Pressure Regulat-

ing Valve (TSI)

Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20

Glow plug relay, Suction hose resist-

ance (Diesel)

7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15

Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI and

CNG), Fuel metering valve (diesel)

9 Servo sensor 7.5

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5

Engine Injection Module, Main Engine

Relay, ESC

7.5

15 Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and AQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 Starter Motor 30

ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

TH4 Electric fan without A/C for mod-

erate climate countries

No. Consumer/Amps

TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate

climate countries

PTC1 40

TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric fan

for warm climate countries

TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate

climate countries

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Changing bulbs

Gener

notes

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 63

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of

practical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-

ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a

dangerous area ›››

in Safety notes for work

in the en

gine c

omp

artment on page 263.

Always use identical bulbs with the same

designation. The name can be found on the

base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,

there are different sets of headlights and tail

lights:

●

Halogen headlights.

●

Full-LED main headlights*

●

Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-

ning lights*

●

Rear bulb light

●

LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions

(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped

beam and route light) with light emitting di-

odes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the

lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be

replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to

an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING

●

Take p

articular care when working on com-

ponents in the engine compartment if the en-

gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.

●

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The

glass can break when you touch the bulb,

causing injury.

●

When changing bulbs, please take care not

to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-

light housing.

106

Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION

●

Remov

e the ignition key before working on

the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit

could occur.

●

Switch off the lights or parking lights be-

fore you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment

Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-

pose of u

sed bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

●

Depending on w

eather conditions (cold or

wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail

lights and the turn signals may be temporari-

ly misted. This has no influence on the useful

life of the lighting system. By switching on

the lights, the area through which the beam

of light is projected will quickly be demisted.

However, the edges may continue to be mis-

ted.

●

Please check at regular intervals that all

lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on

your vehicle is functioning properly. This is

not only in the interest of your own safety,

but also that of all other road users.

●

Before changing a bulb, make sure you

have the correct new bulb.

●

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with

your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel

instead. The residue left by the fingerprints

would vaporise as a result of the heat gener-

ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on

the reflect

or and will impair its surface.

●

Depending on the level of equipment fitted

in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or

all of the interior and/or exterior lighting.

LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than

that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to an

authorised workshop for its replacement.

Halogen headlights.

Pos

ition of the bulbs

Fig. 112 Halogen headlights.

Turn signal

ain be

am he

adlights

Dipped beam headlights

DRL (daytime running light)/side light

Main beam headlights

Fig. 113 In the engine compartment: main

am he

dlight bulb.

–

Raise the bonnet.

–

Turn the cover

anti-clockwise and take it

out

›

› Fig. 113.

–

Remove the bulb connector

by pulling it

outw

–

Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit

the new one.

–

Fit the bulb connector

–

Fit cover

, turning it towards the right.

–

Check whether the new bulb is working.

107

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 114 In the engine compartment: remove

the lid.

Fig. 115 In the engine compartment: dipped

am he

dlight.

–

Raise the bonnet.

–

e the loop ›

›› Fig. 114

in the direc-

tion of

the arr

w and remove the cover.

–

Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 115

–

Unclip the retainer spring ›

›

Fig. 115

pressing inwards to the right.

–

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so

the lug on the b

ase fits into the recess

on the reflector.

–

Fit the connector.

–

Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure

that the gasket sits well on the casing cover

during the operation.

–

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal light and DRL(daytime

running light)/sidelight

Fig. 116 In the engine compartment: turn sig-

light

bulb

and DRL (daytime running

light) b

–

Raise the bonnet.

–

Turn the bulb holder ›

›

Fig. 116

the l

and pull.

–

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb

holder and turning it anticlockwise at the

same time.

–

Installation involves all of the above steps

in reverse sequence.

In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light

source c

annot be replaced. It is designed to last the

length of the car’s service life. In case of failure, go

to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

108

Fuses and bulbs

Changing the fog light bulbs

ont

og light bulb

Fig. 117 Front fog light.

Follow the steps indicated:

er the gr

oove with a screwdriver

››› Fig. 117  (arrow). Next, remove the

clips located on the edge of the grill, lev-

ering them gently.

Remove the two bolts

 and l

ever on

the c

lip

to remove the fog light.

emo

e the bulb connector.

Turn the bulb holder to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on it and

turning it anticlockwise at the same

time.

Replace the bulb, making sure that the

fixing guides are in the right position

and then press it and turn it clockwise.

To install the headlight go back through

the above steps in reverse.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Changing the tail light bulbs

Tail light summary

Bulb light

Left Right

Brake lights

2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light W21W –

Reverse light – W16W

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

Light with LEDs

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED –

Reverse light – W16W

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

The tables correspond to a right-hand traffic

vehicl

e. The position of lights may vary ac-

cording to the country.

109

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

Changing bulbs

Fig. 118 Luggage compartment: access to the

sec

uring the tail light unit.

Fig. 119 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail

light

Follow the steps indicated:

Chec

whic

h of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering the flat side of

a screwdriver into the recess

››› Fig. 118

emo

e the bulb connector

rew the bolt securing the light

by hand or using a screwdriver.

emo

e the light from the body, gently

pulling it toward you, and place on a

clean, smooth surface.

Remove the bulb holder unlocking the

retaining tabs ››› Fig. 119

e the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order,

taking special care when fitting the bulb

holder. The securing tabs must click into

place.

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit to

make s

ure there is no damage to the paint-

work or any of its components.

Note

●

Make s

ure you have a soft cloth ready to

place under the glass on the rear light unit, to

avoid any scratches.

●

For LED lights, you can only change the turn

signal and reverse light bulbs.

Number plate light

–

Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the

speci

al slot and remove the bulb.

–

Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until

it is free.

–

Change the bulb.

–

Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until

it fits fully.

–

Fit the light into the space and press until

you hear a “click”.

Side turn signals

Fig. 120 Turn signal integrated in the rear

iew mirr

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-

ed in the r

ear view mirrors.

110

Fuses and bulbs

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-

shop t

o h

e it replaced.

Additional brake light

Given the difficulty involved in the replace-

ment of thi

s light it should be done by Tech-

nical Services.

Changing the interior bulbs

Interior light and front reading lights

Fig. 121 Front reading light.

To remove the glass

–

Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

g and the gl

ss ››› Fig. 121.

–

Carefully remove the glass, levering it to

avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs

–

Pull the bulbs outwards.

–

To remove the central bulb, hold and press

to one side.

Assembly

–

Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

–

First fit the glass with the fastening tabs

over the frame of the switch. Next press the

front part until the two long tabs click on

the support.

Note

In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to re-

plac

e the light sources. If the light does not

work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

Luggage compartment light*

Fig. 122 Boot light.

Fig. 123 Boot light.

–

Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside

edg

e u

ing the flat side of a screwdriver

››› Fig. 122.

–

Disconnect the cable.

–

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from

its housing ››› Fig. 123.

111

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Emergencies

–

e the bulb.

–

Connect the cable again.

–

Refit the bulb and press it in until it engag-

es.

112

Operation

Fig. 124 Dash panel.

114

Controls and displays

Operation

ontr

ls and displays

General instrument panel

Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . 141

Door release lever

Contro

l for adjusting electric exteri-

or mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Air vents

Lever f

or:

–

Turn signals/main beam head-

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

–

Cruise c

ontrol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Depending on equipment fitted:

–

Lever f

or cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 207

Steering wheel with horn and:

–

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

–

On-board c

omputer controls . . . . 37

–

Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue

system

›››

Booklet Radio

–

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 192

Instrument panel and warning

lamps:

–

struments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

–

arnin

g and indic

ation lamps . . . 47

Lever for:

–

Windscreen wipers and washer . . 152

–

Rear window washer system* . . . 152

–

Multi-function display control* . . 37

Infotainment system:

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Depending on the equipment,

glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 158

–

CD player* and/or SD card*

››› Booklet Radio

Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front passenger airbag disconnec-

tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Switches for:

–

Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 169

–

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

–

limatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Front passenger seat heating con-

trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

ar lever

–

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

–

Automatic

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Depending on the equipment, but-

tons

for:

–

Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

–

Start

-Stop operation button . . . . . 204

–

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

–

ark

ssist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

–

Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 278

Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Starter button (Keyless Access lock-

ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 178

Depending on the equipment:

–

USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

–

Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Driver seat heating control* . . . . . . . 156

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-

less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Steering column control lever* . . . . 20

Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 150

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Note

●

Some of the equipment li

sted in this sec-

tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-

tional extras.

●

A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed

if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted

radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-

gation system.

●

The arrangement of switches and controls

on right-hand drive models* may be slightly

different from the layout shown in

115

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

››› page 115. However, the symbols used to

identify

the controls are the same.

116

Instruments and warning/control lamps

trument

General instrument panel

Fig. 125 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

The layout of the instruments depends upon

the model

and the en

gine.

ev counter (with the engine running, in

hundreds of revolutions per minute)

››› page 118.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev

counter indicates the maximum speed in

any gear after running-in and with the en-

gine hot. However, it is advisable to

change up a gear or move the selector

er t

o D (or lift your foot off the acceler-

ator) before the needle reaches the red

zone ›››

gine c

lant temperature display

››› page 120; OR:

natural gas gauge in vehicles with natural

gas engine (CNG) ››› page 121.

Displays on the screen ›

›



page 40,

››› page 118.

Adjuster button and display

››› page 120.

Speedometer.

Fuel gauge ››› page 121.

117

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with

the risk of

injury.

●

Do not operate the instrument panel con-

trols when driving.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is

cold, avoid high revs

and heavy acceleration and do not make the

engine work hard.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-

gine r

lutions per minute

›››

Fig. 125

ether w

ith the gear-change indicator, the

rev counter offers you the possibility of using

the engine of your vehicle at a suitable

speed.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicates

the maximum engine speed which may be

used briefly when the engine is warm and af-

ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-

ing this range, you should change to a higher

gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for

automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in

“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-

al.

We recommend that you avoid high revs and

that you follow the recommendations on the

gear-change indicator. Consult the additional

information in ›››



page 41, Gear-change

indicator.

CAUTION

Never allow the rev counter needle

››› Fig. 125 to go int

o the red zone on the

scale for more than a very brief period, other-

wise there is a risk of engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear early will help you to save

fuel and minimi

se emissions and engine

noise.

Indications on the display

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 40

A variety of information can be viewed on the

instrument panel display

›››

Fig. 125

de-

pendin

g on the

ehicle equipment:

●

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open

›››



page 40.

●

Information and warning texts.

●

Mileage.

●

Time.

●

Navigation instructions.

●

Outside temperature.

●

Compass.

●

Shift lever position ››› page 190.

●

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

›››



page 41.

●

Multifunction display (MFD) and menus

with different setting options ›››



page 37.

●

Service interval display ›››



page 43.

●

Second speed display ››› page 119.

●

Speed warning function ›››



page 42.

●

Start-Stop system status display

››› page 204.

●

Active cylinder management display

(ACT

)* ››› page 200

●

Low consumption driving status ()

››› page 119

●

Engine code (MKB) ››› page 119.

Distance travelled

The odometer registers the total distance

travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance

travelled since the last odometer reset. The

last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-

ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

●

Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 125

to re-

set

the trip r

order to 0.

●

Keep the button

pressed for about 3

sec

ond

and the previous value will be dis-

played.

118

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Time

●

To set the time, keep the button ›

›

Fig. 125

pressed for more than 3 seconds to select

the hour or minut

e di

play.

●

To continue setting the time, press button

. Hold button down to scroll through the

number

quic

kly.

●

Once you have set the time, the second

count will begin from 0 automatically.

●

Press the button

again in order to finish

settin

g the time.

●

Onc

you have set the time, the time indi-

cator will disappear and the changes will re-

main.

The time can also be set on the Easy Connect

system using the



button and the function

utt

SETTINGS > Date and time

››› page 123.

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-

tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to

the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-

played on the instrument panel.

Selector lever position

The selected gear is displayed on the side of

the selector lever and on the instrument pan-

el display. In positions D and S, and with the

Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-

played.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The r

ecommended gear in order to save fuel

is displayed on the instrument panel while

you are driving ›››



page 41.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speed

can also be displayed in a different unit of

measurement (in miles or in km per hour).

This option cannot be deactivated in models

destined for countries in which the second

speed must always be visible.

The second speed display can be adjusted in

the Easy Connect system by means of the



button and the function button SETTINGS >

Units ›

›

page 123.

Speed warning

When the speed setting is exceeded, this will

be indicated on the instrument panel display.

This is very useful, for example when using

winter tyres that are not designed for driving

at the maximum speed of the vehicle

›››



page 42.

The speed warning settings can be adjusted

in the Easy Connect system by means of the



button and the function button SET-

TINGS > Driver Assistance

›

page 123.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status is

displayed on the instrument panel

››› page 204.

Low consumption driving status (ECO)*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,

the “ECO” display appears on the instrument

panel when the vehicle is in low consump-

tion status due to active cylinder manage-

ment (ACT

)* ››› page 200.

Identifying letters on engine (MKB)

Hold the button ››› Fig. 125

down for more

an 15 sec

ond

s to display the identifying

letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do

this, the ignition must be switched on and

the engine switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are above

freezin

g, some roads and bridges may be icy.

●

At outside temperatures above +4°C

(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal” symbol

is not visible, there may still be patches of ice

on the road.

●

The outside temperature sensor takes a

guideline measurement.

119

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Note

●

Different

versions of the instrument panel

are available and therefore the versions and

instructions on the display may vary. In the

case of displays without warning or informa-

tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by

the warning lamps.

●

Depending on the equipment, some set-

tings and instructions can also be carried out

in the Easy Connect system.

●

When several warnings are active at the

same time, the symbols are shown succes-

sively for a few seconds and will stay on until

the fault is rectified.

Odometer

Fig. 126 Instrument panel: odometer and re-

set

utt

on.

The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-

s” or mi

les “m”. It is possible to change

the measurement units (kilometres

“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.

Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions

Manual for more details.

Odometer/trip recorder

The odometer shows the total distance cov-

ered by the vehicle.

The trip recorder shows the distance that has

been travelled since it was last reset. It is

used to measure short trips. The last digit of

the trip recorder indicates distances of 100

metres or tenths of a mile.

The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-

ing

0.0/SET

›

› Fig. 126

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the

letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder

display. Have the fault repaired immediately,

as far as is possible.

Coolant temperature gauge

Fig. 127 Instrument panel: coolant tempera-

e g

auge

For vehicles with no coolant temperature

aug

e, a c

ontrol lamp  appears for high

coolant temperatures ››› page 269. Please

note ›››

The c

ant temperature gauge only works

when the ignition is switched on ››› Fig. 127.

In order to avoid engine damage, please read

the following notes for the different tempera-

ture ranges.

Engine cold

If only the diodes in the lower part of the

scale light up, this indicates that the engine

has not yet reached operating temperature.

Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and

do not make the engine work hard.

120

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Normal temperature

in norm

operations, the diodes light up

until the central zone, it means that the en-

gine has reached operating temperature. At

high outside temperatures and when making

the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-

ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This

is no cause for concern, provided the control

lamp  does not light up on the instrument

panel digital display.

Heat range

When the diodes light up in the upper area of

the display and the control lamp appears 

on the instrument panel display, the coolant

temperature is excessive ››› page 269.

CAUTION

●

To ens

ure a long useful life for the engine,

avoid high revs, driving at high speed and

making the engine work hard for approxi-

mately the first 15 minutes when the engine

is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-

so depends on the outside temperature. If

necessary, use the engine oil temperature*

›››



page 42 as a guide.

●

Additional lights and other accessories in

front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect

of the coolant. At high outside temperatures

and high engine loads, there is a risk of the

engine overheating.

●

The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-

bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is

moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-

duce the coo

ling effect, which could cause

the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

Fuel level

Fig. 128 Fuel gauge.

The display ›

›

› Fig. 128

only works when the

ignition is switched on. When the display rea-

ches the reserve mark, the lower diode lights

up in red and the control lamp  appears

››› page 117. When the fuel level is very low,

the lower diode flashes in red.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrument

panel ››› Fig. 125

ou c

an c

onsult the tank capacity of your ve-

hicle in the ›››



page 57 section.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-

regu

lar fuel supply could cause misfiring. In

this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-

haust system, which could cause the catalytic

converter to overheat resulting in damage.

Fuel level - Natural Gas (GNC)

3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas engine

(GNC)

Fig. 129 Instrument panel: Natural gas gauge

The gauges

›

Fig. 129 and

›››

Fig. 128 only

work when the ignition is on. When the dis-

play reaches the reserve mark, the lower LED

lights up in red and the control lamp



ap-

pears. When the fuel level is very low, the

lower diode flashes in red.

●

The green warning lamp



›››

Fig. 129

lights up when the vehicle is running in natu-

as operating mode.

121

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

The gr

een w

arnin

g lamp 

turns off

when the n

al gas is exhausted. The en-

gine changes to operate with petrol.

●

The yellow control lamp  lights up when

the reserve level has been reached.

Things to note

If the vehicle is left parked for a long time im-

mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-

el indicator may not accurately indicate the

same level shown after refuelling when the

vehicle is started up again. This is not due to

a leak in the system, but to a drop in pres-

sure in the gas tank for technical reasons af-

ter a cooling phase just after refuelling.

Warning and control lamps

Warning symbols

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47

There are red warning symbols (priority 1)

and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).

Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warning

lamp will light up or flash and will be accom-

panied by three audible warnings. This is a

danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch

off the engine. Check the fault and correct it.

Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are detected at the

same time, the symbols will be displayed one

after the other for about 2 seconds at a time

and will continue until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the display for the

duration of a priority 1 warning message.

Examples of priority 1 warning messages

(red)

●

Brake system symbol  with the warning

message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC-

TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN-

STRUCTION MANUAL.

●

Coolant symbol  with the warning mes-

sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION

MANUAL.

●

Engine oil pressure symbol  with the

warning message STOP ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)

If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-

ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-

nied by an audible warning. Check the corre-

sponding function as soon as possible al-

though the vehicle may be used without risk.

If several priority 2 warning messages are de-

tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-

played one after the other for about 2 sec-

onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-

tion text will disappear and the symbol will

be shown as a reminder at the side of the

display.

Priority 2 warning messages will not be

shown until all Priority 1 warning messages

have been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel-

low):*

●

Fuel warning light with the information text

PLEASE REFUEL.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-

ed, the vehic

le may stall in traffic, or may

cause accidents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps or text

messages.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

●

Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-

sure that there are no highly flammable ma-

terials under the vehicle that could come into

contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry

grass, fuel).

●

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-

dent for the driver and for other road users. If

necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-

vise other drivers.

●

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the

engine and allow it to cool.

122

Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

●

In any

vehicle, the engine compartment is a

hazardous area and could cause severe inju-

ries ››› page 263.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and text

ages when they appear may result in

faults in the vehicle.

Introduction to the Easy

onnect

stem*

System settings (CAR)*

Car menu

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 34

To select the settings menus, depending on

the version, press the Easy Connect button



and the

TINGS

function button, OR

s the button and then

SETTINGS

.

The act

ual

number of

menus available and

the name of the various options in these me-

nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics

and equipment.

When the function button check box is activa-

ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button



will always take

ou t

o the l

ast menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus

are automatically saved on closing those me-

nus.

Menu Vehicle settings Page

ESC system ››› page 183

Tyres ››› page 278

Menu Vehicle settings Page

Lights ››› page 146

Driver assistance

››› page 216

››› page 212

››› page 227

Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 232

Ambient lighting ››› page 151

Mirrors and windscreen wipers

››› page 153

››› page 33

Opening and closing

››› page 143

››› page 132

Instrument panel ››› page 38

Date and time –

Units –

Service ››› page 43

Factory settings –

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with

the risk of

injury. Operating the Easy Connect

system while driving could distract you from

traffic.

123

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Communications and multi-

medi

eerin

g wheel controls*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction

module fr

om where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigation

functions without needing to distract the

driver.

There are two versions of the multifunction

module:

●

Audio, telephone and navigation with voice

contro

l version: for controlling the audio

functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,

iPod

®1)

, USB

, SD

) and Bluetooth system

from the steering wheel.

●

Audio, telephone and navigation without

voice control version: for controlling the au-

dio functions available (radio, audio CD,

MP3, iPod

®1)

, USB

, SD

) and Bluetooth sys-

tem from the steering wheel.

Depending on the vehicle equipment.

124

Communications and multimedia

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 130 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in telephone

mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need to

be in navigation mode but

there has to be an announce-

ment active when you adjust

the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

Activate/deactivate voice control.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s function

is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press: Switch to the pre-

vious/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-

dio/Media functionality (ex-

cept AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other

modes (navigation, assistants,

vehicle status, travel data).

Change instrument panel menu.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

125

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Coloured instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.

Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

Turn

Coloured instrument panel: List

of stations available (only if

the instrument panel is in au-

dio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:

next track (only if the instru-

ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: List of

latest calls.

– Active call: access the call

options list (call on hold, hang

up, mute microphone, private

number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view

to halt guidance to destination.

– No active route: list of recent

destinations.

Press

Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

126

Communications and multimedia

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 131 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in audio mode

(media).

Turn volume up/down. You do

not need to be in telephone

mode.

Turn announcement volume

up/down. You do not need to

be in navigation mode but

there has to be an announce-

ment active when you adjust

the volume.

Press

Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-

nouncement.

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (hold down).

– Active call: hang up active call (short press).

– No active/incoming call: open telephone menu (short press), redial the last active call (hold down).

These functions can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Search for the previous/next

station

Short press: Switch to the pre-

vious/next song.

Hold down: Fast rewind/for-

ward

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-

dio/Media functionality (ex-

cept AUX)

– Active call: no function

No function for the other

modes (navigation, assistants,

vehicle status, travel data).

Change instrument panel menu.

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

127

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone

Navigation

Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available).

This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Turn

Coloured instrument panel: List

of stations available (only if

the instrument panel is in au-

dio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:

next track (only if the instru-

ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: List of

latest calls.

– Active call: access the call

options list (call on hold, hang

up, mute microphone, private

number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view

to halt guidance to destination.

– No active route: list of recent

destinations.

Press

Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

According to the vehicle's equipment package.

This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

128

Communications and multimedia

Multimedia

USB/A

-INP

ort

Fig. 132 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and

the c

ntr

y, the vehicle may have a

USB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the

storage compartment area of the centre con-

sole ››› Fig. 132.

The operating description is located in the re-

spective Instruction Manuals of the audio

system or the navigation system.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger*

Fig. 133 Related video

Fig. 134 Centre console: Connectivity Box.

Depending on the features and the country,

the

ehic

le may have one of these two op-

tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.

With the Connectivity Box you can charge

your mobile device wirelessly with Qi

tech-

nology as well as reduce the radiation in the

vehicle and have better reception.

With the Wireless Charger you only have the

wireless charging function if your mobile de-

vice has Qi technology.

The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is in

the storage compartment area of the centre

console ››› Fig. 134.

The operating description is located in the re-

spective Instruction Manuals of the audio

system or the navigation system.

Note

Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-

les

s inductive charging interface standard for

proper operation.

Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile

phone wirel

essly.

129

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Opening and closing

Set

of keys

Fig. 135 Set of keys.

The set of keys may consists of the following,

dependin

g on the

ersion of your vehicle:

●

a remote control key ››› Fig. 135

●

a key without remote control

●

a plastic key tab*

●

two keys with remote control

●

a plastic key tab*

Duplicate keys

ou need a replacement key, go to a Techni-

cal Service with your vehicle identification

number.

WARNING

●

An incorrect

use of the keys can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Never leave children or disabled persons in

the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may

not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on

their own.

●

An uncontrolled use of the key could start

the engine or activate any electric equipment

(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-

dent. The doors can be locked using the re-

mote control key. This could become an ob-

stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-

tion.

●

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An

unauthorised use of your vehicle could result

in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always

take the key with you when you leave the ve-

hicle.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-

ing could suddenly block and it would be im-

possible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are electronic components in the re-

mote contr

ol key. Avoid wetting and hitting

the keys.

Remote control*

Fig. 136 Assignment of buttons on the re-

mot

e c

ontr

ol key.

Fig. 137 Vehicle key with alarm button.

The radio frequency remote control key is

sed t

o loc

k and unlock the vehicle from a

distance.

By using button

›

› Fig. 136

on the control,

the key shaft is released.

Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 136

130

Opening and closing

Locking the vehicle  ›

›

Fig. 136

loc

ing the rear lid. Press button 

››› Fig. 136

until all the turn signals on the

ehic

e flash briefly. When the unlocking but-

ton 

is pressed, you have 2 minutes to

open the door

. Onc

e thi

s time has passed, it

will lock again.

Moreover, the battery indicator on the key

››› Fig. 136 (arrow), will flash.

The remote control transmitter and the bat-

teries are integrated in the key. The receiver

is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de-

pends on different factors. The range is re-

duced as the batteries start to lose power.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button in the event of an

emergency ››› Fig. 137

! When the al

arm

utt

on is pressed, the vehicle horn is heard

and the turn signals are switched on for a

short time. When the alarm button is pressed

again, the alarm is switched off.

WARNING

Read and observe the relevant warnings ›››

in Set of keys on page 130.

Note

●

The remote c

ontrol key works only when

you are in its scope.

●

If the v

ehicle cannot be unlocked or locked

by using the radio frequency remote control,

the remote control key will have to be re-

synchronised. For this, go to your technical

services.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 138 Vehicle key: opening the battery

omp

tment.

Fig. 139 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised

ork

shop t

o replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-

cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 130.

●

Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

hicle key ››› Fig. 138 in the direction of the ar-

row ›››

●

Extract the battery from the compartment

g a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 139.

●

Place the new battery in the compartment

as shown ››› Fig. 139, pressing in the oppo-

site direction to that shown by the arrow

›››

●

Fit the cover as shown ›

›

Fig. 138, pressing

it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite

direction to that shown by the arrow until it

clicks into place.

CAUTION

●

If the batt

ery is not changed correctly, the

vehicle key may be damaged.

●

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage

the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the

same voltage, size and specifications.

●

When fitting the battery, check that the po-

larity is correct.

131

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

For the sake of the environment

Please dispose of your used batteries correct-

ly and with r

espect for the environment.

Synchronising the remote control key

If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door

with the remot

e control, it should be re-

synchronised.

While the vehicle is open:

–

Press the  button

›

Fig. 136 on the re-

mote control.

–

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft

within one minute.

While the vehicle is closed:

–

Press the  button

›

Fig. 136 on the re-

mote control.

–

Then close the vehicle using the key shaft

within one minute.

It is possible that the vehicle could no longer

be opened and closed with the remote con-

trol if the button  is repeatedly pressed out-

side of the effective range of the radio fre-

quency remote control. The remote control

key will have to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys are available at

your Technical Service, where they must be

matched to the locking system.

Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Central locking system

Description

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 15.

The central locking system enables you to

lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by

just pushing the button.

Central locking can be activated by using any

of the following options:

●

the key, by inserting it into the driver door

cylinder and rot

ating it in the opening direc-

tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei-

ther all doors will be unlocked or only the

driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be

locked on locking the vehicle using the key.

●

the interior central lock button

›››

page 134.

●

the radio frequency remote control, using

the buttons on the key

›››

page 130.

Various functions are available to improve

the vehicle safety:

Locking system “Safe*”

Selective* unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involunta-

ry unlocking

Automatic speed dependent locking and

unlocking system*

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press the  button ››› Fig. 136 on the re-

mote control to unlock all the doors and

the rear lid.

Locking the vehicle*

Press the  button ››› Fig. 136 on the re-

mote control to lock all doors and the

rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock

all doors and the rear lid.

WARNING

●

Lock

ing from the outside carelessly or with-

out good visibility may lead to bruising, par-

ticularly in the case of children.

●

When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-

dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out-

side it will be difficult to provide assistance if

required.

●

Having the doors locked prevents intruders

from getting in, for example when stopped at

a traffic light.

–

132

Opening and closing

Note

For anti-theft security, only the driver door is

fitted with a loc

k cylinder.

Safe security system*

This is an anti-theft device which consists of

a double loc

k for the door locks and a deacti-

vation function for the boot in order to pre-

vent forced entry.

Activation

The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-

cle is locked using the key or the remote con-

trol.

To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in-

serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking

direction.

To activate the system using the remote con-

trol, press the lock button once  on the re-

mote.

Once this system is activated, opening doors

from the outside and the inside is not possi-

ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-

tral lock button does not work.

When the ignition is switched off, the instru-

ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”

system is on.

Deactivation

Rotat

e the key inserted in the lock cylinder

twice towards the locking direction.

To activate the system using the remote con-

trol, press the lock button on the remote

twice  in less than five seconds.

On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm

volumetric sensor is also deactivated.

With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be

opened from the interior but not from the ex-

terior.

See “Selective unlocking system*”

“Safe” status

On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-

ble from outside the vehicle through the win-

dow which shows the “Safe” system status.

We will know that “Safe” system is activated

by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator

will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted

with an alarm, until they unlock.

Remember:

Safe activated with or without an alarm:

warning lamp flashes continuously.

Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn-

ing lamp stays off.

Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning

lamp stays off.

WARNING

No one should remain inside the vehicle if the

“Safe” sys

tem is activated because opening

the doors will not be possible in the event of

an emergency neither from the inside nor the

outside and help from the outside is made

difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could

become trapped inside in case of emergency.

Selective unlocking system*

This system allows to unlock either just the

driv

er door or al

the vehicle.

Driver door unlock button

Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote

control.

Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,

rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver

door will remain without “Safe” and un-

locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see

the Anti-theft Alarm section

›››

page 138.

Using the remote control, press the unlock

button on the remote  once. The “Safe” sys-

tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the

Available depending on market and version.

133

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

driver door is unlocked and both the alarm

and the w

arnin

g l

amp are also turned off.

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com-

partment

The unlock button on the remote control

must be pressed twice  so that all doors

and the luggage compartment can be

opened.

Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate

the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all

doors and to use the luggage compartment.

The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-

cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Unlocking the luggage compartment

See ›››



page 16.

Self-locking system to prevent invol-

untary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-

int

ention

unlocking of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the

doors (including the boot) are opened within

30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Automatic speed-dependent locking

and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevents access

to the v

ehicle from the outside when it is run-

ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors will lock automatically if the speed

of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid

will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h

(4 mph) is exceeded.

If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors

open, when starting again and exceeding the

mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.

Unlocking

On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle

will returns to its status prior to self-locking.

Each door can be unlocked and opened inde-

pendently from the inside (for example, when

a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper-

ate the lever inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when

the vehic

le is running: the door would open.

Note

If the airbags are triggered during an acci-

dent, the vehic

le is unlocked, except for the

luggage compartment. It is possible to lock

the vehic

le from inside with the central lock-

ing, after turning the ignition off and back on

again.

Central lock button*

Fig. 140 Central lock button.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 15

The central lock button allows you to lock and

unlock the vehicle from the inside.

The central lock button also works with the

ignition switched off, except when the “safe”

system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your ve-

hicle with the central lock button:

134

Opening and closing

●

ing the doors and rear lid prevents ac-

cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.

when stopped at a traffic light).

●

The driver door cannot be locked while it is

open. This avoids the user from forgetting his

key inside the vehicle.

●

All doors can be unlocked separately from

inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re-

lease lever once.

WARNING

●

If the v

ehicle is locked, children and disa-

bled people may be trapped inside it.

●

Repeated operation of central locking will

prevent the central lock button from working

for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un-

locked in case it has been previously locked.

After few seconds, the central locking be-

comes operative again.

●

The central lock button is not operative

when the vehicle is locked from the outside

(with the remote control or the key).

Related videos Keyless Access

Fig. 141 Convenience

Fig. 142 Technology

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

with Keyl

ess Access*

Fig. 143 Keyless Access locking and ignition

em: In the proximity of the car.

Fig. 144 Keyless Access locking and ignition

syst

em: sensor surface

for unlocking in-

side the door handl

e and sensor surface

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle

have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-

tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle

without actively using its key. To do this, all

that is required is to have a valid vehicle key

in the detection area where you are attempt-

ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 143 and to

touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door

handles ››› Fig. 144 ›››

The

ehic

le can be unlocked and locked via

the driver door only. When doing so, the re-

mote control key must be no further than ap-

prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, for

instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or

in a briefcase.

135

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Once the doors have been locked, they can-

not

be opened ag

ain immedi

ately. This will

enable you to check that the doors are prop-

erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock

only the driver’s door, the side being un-

locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary

adjustments can be performed in vehicles

with a driver information system

›››



page 34.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of the

car ››› Fig. 143, the Keyless Access locking

and starting system gives the key entry as

soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the

driver door handle is touched. The following

features are then available without having to

use the vehicle key actively:

●

Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using

the handle of the front driver’s door or the

softtouch/handle on the rear lid.

●

Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the

sensor on the driver door handle.

●

Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en-

gine with the starter button ››› page 178.

The central locking and locking systems oper-

ate in the same way as a normal locking and

unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a

double flash of the indicator lights; locking

by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and

the rear lid are closed leaving the last key

used inside the vehicle and none outside,

the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the

vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.

The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if

you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-

onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open

any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-

Entry)

●

Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the

sensor surface ››› Fig. 144

(arrow) on the

andl

e i

s touched and the vehicle unlocks.

●

Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-

tainment system configuration, pulling the

door handle twice will unlock all doors.

On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-

tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-

it)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The door

s used must be closed.

On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:

shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Close the driver's door.

●

Touch (once) the locking sensor surface

(arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle

loc

with the “Safe” ››› page 133 system.

The door that is used must be closed.

●

Touch (twice) the sensor surface

(arrow)

the driv

er door h

andle to lock the vehicle

without activating the “Safe” security system

››› page 133.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-

matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-

id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 143.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If

the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid

will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle with

a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and

it is locked from the outside with a second

vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is

136

Opening and closing

blocked for engine ignition ›

›

page 175. In

order to enable engine ignition, the button

on the key  inside the vehicle needs to be

pressed.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a

long period of time, the proximity sensors on

the passenger doors are automatically disa-

bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-

dles is often activated in an unusual manner

with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity

sensors are disabled for a certain period of

time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

●

After a time.

●

OR: If the vehicle is unlocked with the

 button on the key.

●

OR: if the boot is opened.

●

OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with

the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection

function*

You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-

cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking

cycle.

●

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-

hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-

wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

●

Close the door.

●

Push the central locking button  on the

remote control and touch the locking sensor

surface ››› Fig. 144

on the driver door han-

e onc

e w

ithin the following 5 seconds. Do

not grip the door handle, otherwise the vehi-

cle will not lock. Deactivation is also possible

if the vehicle is locked through the driver’s

door lock.

●

To check that the function has been deacti-

vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

on the door handle. The door should not

open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked

via the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,

Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows and the sun-

roof using the convenience function, keep a

finger for a few seconds on the locking sen-

sor surface

(arrow) of the door handle un-

the w

indows and roof have closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensor

surface of the door handle depend on the

settings that have been activated in the Easy

Connect system with the



button and the

SETTINGS

and

Openin

g and c

sing

function but-

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handles

coul

d engage if hit with a water jet or high

pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key

in the proximity. If at least one of the electric

windows is open and the sensor surface

(arrow) on the handle is activated continu-

ously

, all windows will close.

Note

●

If the v

ehicle battery has little or no charge,

or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-

ly out of charge, you will probably not be able

to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless

Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked

or locked manually.

●

To control the proper locking of the vehicle,

the release function is disabled for approx. 2

seconds.

●

If the message Keyless access system

faulty is displayed on the screen of the

dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the

operation of the Keyless Access system. Con-

tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

●

Depending on the function set on the info-

tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior

mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting

will come on when unlocking the vehicle us-

ing the sensor surface on the driver door han-

dle.

137

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

If there i

s no valid key inside the vehicle or

the system fails to detect one, a warning will

display on the dash panel screen. This could

happen if any other radio frequency signal in-

terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-

bile device accessory) or if the key is covered

by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

●

If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-

er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen-

sors on the door handles may be affected. In

this case, clean the vehicle.

●

If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic

gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear

stick is in position P.

Childproof lock

Fig. 145 Childproof lock on the left hand side

door

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors

om bein

g opened fr

om the inside. This sys-

tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-

cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle

electronic opening and locking systems. It

only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-

ted and deactivated manually, as described

below:

Activating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof

lock.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in

the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-

wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 145

and clockwise for the right-hand side

doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-

vate.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in

the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-

wise for the right-hand side doors, and

clockwise for the left-hand side doors

››› Fig. 145.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the

door can only be opened from the outside.

The childproof lock can be activated or deac-

tivated by inserting the key in the groove

when the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm*

Description of anti-theft alarm sys-

tem*

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to

break

into the vehicle or steal it. The system

will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-

nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically

switched on when locking the vehicle. The

system is immediately activated and the turn

signal light located on the driver door will

flash along with the turn signals, indicating

that the alarm and the locking security sys-

tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,

they will not be included in the protection

zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-

nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

quently closed, they will be automatically in-

cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle

and the turn signals will flash accordingly

when the doors close.

●

The turn signal light will flash twice on

opening and deactiv

ating the alarm.

138

Opening and closing

●

The t

urn s

ign

al light will flash once on clos-

ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm, if the following

unauthorised actions are carried out when

the vehicle is locked:

●

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the

vehicle key without switching on the ignition

in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets,

such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa-

ted immediately).

●

A door is opened.

●

Opening the bonnet.

●

The rear lid is opened.

●

Ignition switched on with a non-validated

key.

●

Movements in the driving compartment

(vehicles with a volume sensor).

●

Towing of the vehicle

●

Vehicle tilt angle

●

Undue manipulation of the alarm.

●

Battery handling.

In this case, the acoustic signals will go off

and the turn signal will flash for approximate-

ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up

to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening all the doors in manual mode

In vehicles without an alarm, when opening

the driver door manually, all doors are

opened.

How to switch the alarm off

To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the

key in the opening direction, open the door

and switch the ignition on, or press the un-

lock button  on the remote control.

In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm

system, you have 15 seconds to insert the

key in the ignition lock and activate the igni-

tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver

door key.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.

and the ignition will be blocked.

Note

●

After 28 d

ays, the indicator light will be

switched off to prevent the battery from

draining if the vehicle has been left parked

for a long period of time. The alarm system

remains activated.

●

The alarm will trigger again if attempts are

made to open another protection zone.

●

The alarm system can be activated or deac-

tivated using the radio frequency remote con-

trol ››› page 130.

●

The anti-theft a

larm is not activated when

the vehicle is locked from within using the

central locking button .

●

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat

then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-

rectly.

●

Vehicle monitoring remains active even if

the battery is disconnected or not working for

any reason.

●

The alarm is triggered immediately if one of

the battery cables is disconnected while the

alarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-

w sy

stem*

Monitoring or control function incorporated

in the anti-thef

arm* which detects unau-

thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-

sound.

Activation

–

It is automatically switched on when the

anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

–

Open the vehicle with the key, either me-

chanically or by pressing the  button on

the remote control. If the vehicle is opened

With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection

139

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

mechanically, the time period from when

the door i

opened u

ntil the key is inserted

into the contact should not exceed 15 sec-

onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

–

Press the button  on the remote control

twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-

sors will be deactivated. The alarm system

remains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system are automatically switched on

again next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow

sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-

ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched

on. In order to activate it, all the doors and

the rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior

monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

be done each time that the vehicle is locked;

if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-

tow system should be switched off if animals

are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,

their movements will trigger the alarm) or

when, for example, the vehicle is transported

or has to be towed with only one axle on the

ground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly

if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-

serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm:

●

Open windows (partially or fully),

●

Sliding sunroof open (partially or complete-

ly),

●

Movement of objects inside the vehicle,

such as loose papers, items hanging from

the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

●

If the v

ehicle is relocked and the alarm is

activated without the volumetric sensor func-

tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all

its functions, except the volumetric sensor.

This function is reactivated when the alarm is

switched on again, unless it is deliberately

switched off.

●

If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-

metric sensor, this will be indicated by a

flashing of the warning lamp on the driver

door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is

different to the flash indicating the alarm is

activated.

●

The vibration of a mobile phone left inside

the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior

monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors

react to movements and shakes inside the ve-

hicle.

●

If on activatin

g the alarm, any door or the

rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-

ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the

anti-tow system will only be activated once

all the doors are closed (including the rear

lid).

Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-

toring and anti-t

ow system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be

trigger

ed if movements are detected in the

interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-

clination is changed (e.g. during transport).

You can prevent the alarm from being trig-

gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-

cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-

tection.

–

To switch off the interior monitoring and

tow-

away protection, switch off the ignition

and, using the Infotainment system, select:



button >

TINGS

function button >

Openin

g and c

sing > Central locking >

Switch off alarm.

–

When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle

interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-

tection are switched off until the next time

the door is opened.

140

Opening and closing

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*

›

page 133 is switched off, the vehicle interi-

or monitoring and the tow-away protection

are automatically switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Descrip-

tion on page 132

Rear lid

Opening and clo

sing

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 16

WARNING

●

Alwa

ys close the rear lid properly. Risk of

accident or injury.

●

The rear lid must not be opened when the

reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may

damage the tail lights.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down

with your hand on the rear window. The glass

could smash. Risk of injury!

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.

If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-

ing.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected

to extremely high and low temperatures, de-

pending on the time of year, thus causing se-

rious injurie

s/illness. It could even have fatal

consequences. Close and lock both the rear

lid and all the other doors when you are not

using the vehicle.

●

Closing the rear lid without observing and

ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury

to you and to third parties. Make sure that no

one is in the path of the rear lid.

●

Never drive with the rear lid open or half-

closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in-

terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

●

If you only open the rear lid, do not leave

the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened

if the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Openin

g and c

sing of the electric

windows*

Fig. 146 Detail of the driver door: controls for

the fr

ont

and r

ear windows (vehicles with

front and rear electric windows).

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 18

The front and rear electric windows can be

operated by using the controls on the driver

door. The other doors each have a switch for

their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park

the vehicle or leave it unattended ›››

ou c

an u

se the electric windows for approx.

10 minutes after switching off the ignition if

141

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

neither the driver door nor the front passen-

er door h

s been opened and the key has

not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *

The safety switch ››› Fig. 146

on the driver

door c

an be u

sed t

o disable the electric win-

dow buttons on the rear doors.

●

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear

doors are activated.

●

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear

doors are deactivated. The safety control

symbol  lights up in yellow if the buttons

on the rear doors are switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Set of

keys on p

age 130.

●

Incorrect use of the electric windows can

result in injury.

●

Never close the rear lid without observing

and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could

cause serious injury to you and third parties.

Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-

dow.

●

If the ignition is switched on, the electric

equipment could be activated with risk of in-

jury, for example, in the electric windows.

●

The doors can be locked using the remote

control key. This could become an obstacle

for assistance in an emergency situation.

●

Therefor

e always take the key with you

when you leave the vehicle.

●

The electric windows will work until the ig-

nition has been switched off and one of the

front doors has been opened.

●

If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-

ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that

they have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because it

s s

tiff or because of an obstruction, the win-

dow will automatically open again

››› page 142. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before attempt-

ing to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-

jur

when the el

ectric windows close.

●

If a window is obstructed when closing au-

tomatically, the window stops at this point

and lowers immediately ›››

●

Next, check why the window does not close

bef

e att

empting it again.

●

If you try within the following 10 seconds

and the window closes again with difficulty

or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-

ing will stop working for 10 seconds.

●

If the window is still obstructed, the win-

dow will stop at this point.

●

If there is no obvious reason why the win-

dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by

pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-

dow closes with maximum force. The roll-

back function is now deactivated.

If more than 10 seconds pass, the window

will open fully when you operate one of the

buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

●

Alwa

ys take the ignition key with you when

leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to

be gone for a short time. Please ensure that

children are never left alone inside the vehi-

cle.

●

The electric windows will work until the ig-

nition has been switched off and one of the

front doors has been opened.

●

Closing the windows without observing and

ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury

to you and third parties. Make sure that no

one is in the path of a window.

●

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle

when you close the vehicle from the outside.

The windows cannot be opened even in an

emergency.

●

The roll-back function does not prevent fin-

gers or other parts of the body getting

pinched against the window frame. Risk of

accident.

142

Opening and closing

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-

tion to ea

sily open/close all the windows and

the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside.

Convenience open function

–

Press and hold the  button on the remote

control key until all the windows and the

sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the

desired position, or

–

First unlock the vehicle using the  button

on the r

emote control key and then keep

the key in the driver door lock until all the

windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*

have reached the required position.

Convenience close function

–

Press and hold button  on the remote

control key until all the windows and the

sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed

›››

, or

–

Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"

ition u

ntil all the windows and the slid-

ing/tilting sunroof* are closed.

Programming convenience opening in the

Easy Connect*

–

Select:



button > SETTINGS f

nction

utton > Opening and closing > Elec-

tric windows > Convenience open-

ing, to choose between all the windows

(All), only the driver’s window (Driver)

or none (Deactivated).

WARNING

●

Take c

are when closing the sliding/tilting

sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf-

fering injury.

●

For safety reasons, you should only use the

remote control open and close functions with-

in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-

juries, always keep an eye on the windows

and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press-

ing the button to close them. The windows

stop moving as soon as the button is re-

leased.

One-touch opening and closing*

One-touch opening and closing means you

do not

e to hold down the button.

Buttons

›››

Fig. 146

and

have

o po

itions for opening windows and two

for closing them. This makes it easier to open

and close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

–

Pull up the window button briefly up to the

second position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

–

Push down the window button briefly up to

the second position. The window opens

fully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

–

The automatic open and close function will

not work if the battery has been temporari-

ly disconnected. The function can be re-

stored as follows:

–

Close the window as far as it will go by lift-

ing and holding the electric window switch.

–

Release the switch and then lift it again for

1 second. This will re-enable the automatic

function.

If you push (or pull) a button to the first

stage, the window will open (or close) until

you release the button. If you push or lift the

button briefly to the second stage, the win-

dow will open (one-touch opening) or close

(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-

erate the button while the window is opening

or closing, it stops at this position.

143

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Sunroof*

Intr

oduction

WARNING

If the sunroof is used negligently or without

pay

ing due attention, it can cause serious in-

jury.

●

Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind

only when no one is in their path of move-

ment.

●

Never leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting.

●

Never leave a child or any other person who

may need help in the vehicle, especially if

they have access to the vehicle key. If using

they key unattended, they could lock the ve-

hicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition

and activate the sunroof.

●

After switching off, it is still possible to

open or close the sunroof during a short

space of time provided that neither the driver

nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION

●

To prev

ent damage, during winter tempera-

tures remove any ice or snow that might be

on the car roof before opening the sunroof or

adjusting the tilt position.

●

Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rain-

fall, always close the sunroof. With the sun-

roof open or in a tilted position, water can en-

ter the interior and can cause considerable

damag

e to the electrical system. As a result,

other damage can occur in the vehicle.

Note

●

eav

es and other loose objects that accu-

mulate on the sunroof rails should be regular-

ly cleaned away either by hand or with a vac-

uum.

●

If the sunroof does not work correctly, the

anti-trap function will not work either. Con-

tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 147 On the interior roof lining: sunroof

utt

on.

The sunroof only works when the ignition is

hed on. Once the ignition has been

switched off, you can still open or close the

sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver

door and the front passenger door are not

opened.

The  button ››› Fig. 147 has two levels. The

first level switches the sunroof to the tilted

position, opening or closing it fully or partial-

ly.

On the second level, the sunroof automatical-

ly moves to the corresponding final position

after briefly pressing the button. Activating

the button again stops the automatic func-

tion.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof

●

Press the rear part of the button

to the

fir

level.

●

Automatic operation: briefly press the rear

part of button

to the second level.

ing the sunroof from a tilted position

●

Press the front part of the button

to the

fir

level.

●

Automatic operation: briefly press the front

part of the button

to the second level.

g the automatic operation by adjust-

ing the tilted position of the sunroof or by

closing the sunroof

●

Press button

again.

144

Opening and closing

Opening the sunroof

●

Press button

backwards to the first lev-

●

Aut

atic operation to comfort position:

briefly press button

backwards to the sec-

ond l

Closing the sunroof

●

Press button

forwards to the first level.

●

Automatic operation: briefly press button

forwards to the second level.

g the automatic operation during the

opening or closing

●

Press button

again.

n b

lind

The sun blind is opened and closed manually

(independently of the sliding sunroof).

Convenience function to open or close the

sunroof*

The sunroof can be opened and closed with

the convenience function, just like the win-

dows:

Using the door lock*

●

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver

door in either the unlocking or locking posi-

tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-

sition.

●

Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control

●

Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed

to open/close the roof; if you stop pressing

the button, the opening/closing function is

stopped.

Once all the windows and the sunroof have

closed, all the turn signals flash. During con-

venience closing, the windows and the sun-

roof close at the same time.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic

sliding sunroof

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of

injur

when c

losing the sunroof ›››

. If the

oof encounters resistance or an obstacle

when closing, it reopens immediately.

●

Check why the sunroof did not close.

●

Try to close the sunroof again.

●

If the sunroof cannot be closed due to an

obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the

corresponding position and then reopens.

For automatic closing, a new closing attempt

might take place.

●

If the sunroof is still unable to close, close

it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap

function

●

Before approx. 5 seconds of having activa-

ted the roll-back function, press the  but-

ton ››› Fig. 147 to the second level in the di-

rection of arrow ››› Fig. 147

until the sun-

oof

loses completely.

●

The sunroof closes without the anti-trap

function intervening!

●

If the sunroof will still not close, visit a spe-

cialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap

function c

an cause serious injuries.

●

Always be careful when closing the sun-

roof.

●

No person should ever remain in the way of

the sunroof, especially when closing without

the anti-trap function.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-

gers or other parts of the body from becom-

ing trapped against the roof frame and inju-

ries occurring.

145

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Lights and visibility

Light

ontr

ol lamps



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 147.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal

is faulty.



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 147.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

ew sec

onds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

Switching lights on and off

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 31

The driver is personally responsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations.

Note

●

The leg

al requirements regarding the use of

vehicle lights in each country must be ob-

served.

●

The dipped beam headlights will only work

with the ignition on. The side lights come on

automatically when the ignition is turned off.

●

If the lights are left on after the key has

been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-

ble warning sounds while the driver door re-

mains open. This is a reminder to switch the

lights off.

●

The use of the lighting described here is

subject to the relevant statutory require-

ments.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

–

Rotate the switch to the 

 po

ition, this

indication will light up.

Deactivation

–

Turn the light switch to .

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control is switched on,

dipped beam headlights are automatically

switched on by a photosensor if you drive in-

to a tunnel, for example.

WARNING

●

Even if

the automatic headlight control is

switched on, the dipped beam headlights will

not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the

dipped beam must be switched on manually.

Note

●

For v

ehicles with the automatic headlight

system, when the key is removed from the ig-

nition, the audible warning will only sound if

the light knob is in position .

●

The use of the lighting described here is

subject to the relevant statutory require-

ments.

●

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in

front of the sensor. This may cause disrup-

tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys-

tem.

●

The rain sensor switches on the dipped

beam headlights when the windscreen wipers

have been operating continuously for a few

seconds and it switches the lights off when

the continuous or interval wipe is switched

off for some minutes.

146

Lights and visibility

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individ-

ual lights, inte

grated in the front headlights.

By connecting the daytime running lights,

these lights are switched on

›››

The daytime ru

nning lights switch on every

time the ignition is switched on, if the switch

is in positions  or , according to the level

of exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a

light sensor automatically switches dipped

beam on and off (including the control and

instrument lighting) or the daytime running

lights depending on the level of exterior

lighting.

WARNING

●

Never drive w

ith daytime lights if the road

is not well lit due to weather or lighting con-

ditions. Daytime lights do not provide

enough light to illuminate the road properly

or be seen by other road users.

●

On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,

when activating the daytime running light

the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle

which does not have the rear lights on may

not be visible to other drivers in the dark-

ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi-

tions of poor visibility.

Fog lights

Fig. 148 Dash panel: light control.

Switching on the front fog lights*

●

Pull the light switch to the first point

›

Fig. 148

, from positions ,  or 

.

The symbo

 in the light switch lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with

front fog lights)

●

Completely pull the light switch

from

ition

,  or . The  lamp on the in-

strument panel lights up.

Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with

no front fog lights)

●

Completely pull the light switch

from

ition

,  or . This type of switch

only has one position. The  lamp on the in-

strument panel lights up.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 32

Parking lights

●

Switch the ignition off and remove the key

from the lock.

●

Move the turn signal lever up or down to

turn the right or l

eft-hand parking lights on,

respectively.

Convenience turn signals

For the one-touch signalling, when the igni-

tion is switched on, move the lever as far as

possible upwards or downwards and release

the lever. The turn signal will flash three

times.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system via the



button and the function button SETTINGS >

Lights > One-touch signalling

›



page 34.

On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear

side light i

s switched on as well.

147

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-

g menu, thi

function can be deactivated in

a specialised workshop.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk

of acc

ident! Never use the main beam head-

lights or the headlight flasher if they could

dazzle other drivers.

Note

●

If the con

venience turn signals are operat-

ing (three flashes) and the other convenience

turn signals are switched on, the active part

stops flashing and only flashes once in the

new part selected.

●

The turn signals only work when the igni-

tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-

ing lamp   flashes in the instrument pan-

el. The control lamp  flashes when the turn

signals are operated, provided a trailer is cor-

rectly attached and connected to the vehicle.

If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control

lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer

turn signal bulbs are defective, the control

lamp  does not light up. Change the bulb.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on. The warning lamp  then

comes on in the instrument panel.

●

The headlight flasher comes on for as long

as you pull the lever – even if no other lights

are switched on. The warning lamp  then

comes on in the instrument panel.

●

When the parking ligh

ts are switched on,

the headlight and the tail light on the corre-

sponding side of the vehicle light up. The

parking lights will only work with the ignition

off. If said light is on, an audible warning will

be emitted while the driver door is open.

●

If the turn signal lever is left on after the

key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

an acoustic signal sounds when the driver

door is opened. This is intended as a remind-

er to switch off the turn signal, unless you

wish to leave the parking light on.

Coming Home/Leaving Home Func-

tion*

Fig. 149 Related video

The Leaving Home function is controlled with

a phot

sen

sor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-

tion is connected, the front side and dipped

lights, the tail lights and the number plate

light will light up to provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by

switching off the ignition. When the driver

door is opened, the Coming Home lighting

comes on.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the

following cases:

●

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any

doors or the rear lid remain open.

●

If the light switch is turned to position .

●

If the ignition is switched on.

Automatic Leaving Home function

The Leaving Home function is activated when

the vehicle is unlocked if:

●

the light control is in position  and

●

the photosensor detects “darkness”.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the

following cases:

●

If the time period for the delay in switching

off the headlights has ended

●

If the vehicle is locked again.

●

If the light switch is turned to position .

●

If the ignition is switched on.

148

Lights and visibility

Note

●

To activat

e the Coming/Leaving home func-

tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi-

tion  and the light sensor must detect

darkness.

Fog lights with cornering function*

This is an additional light source to dipped

beam hea

dlights to light up the road as a

bend is taken.

The cornering light operates with the lights

switched on and when driving at less than

40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning

the steering or connecting the turn signal.

Forward gear

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the right,

or the right-hand t

urn signal operated, the

right-hand fog light turns on.

●

If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or

the left-hand turn signal operated, the left-

hand fog light turns on.

In reverse, both fog lights turn on.

Note

When the fog lamps are on, the cornering

function i

s activated and both headlights are

continuously on.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehicles

equipped with f

ull-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected via

the corresponding Easy Connect system

menu.

●

Activation: when going above 110 km/h

(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-

ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-

er's visibility distance.

●

Deactivation: when reducin

g the speed of

the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip-

ped beam returns to its normal position.

Headlight range control

Fig. 150 Dash panel: headlight range control.

The lights range control adapts according to

the

alue of

the headlight beam and the ve-

hicle load status. This offers the driver opti-

mum visibility and the headlights do not daz-

zle oncoming drivers ›››

The he

dlights

can only be adjusted when

the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 150:

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compartment

empty



All seats occupied, luggage compartment

full. With trailer and minimum drawbar

load.



Driver only, luggage compartment full With

trailer and maximum drawbar load.

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the

table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control is not mounted in vehicles with

dynamic headlight range control. The head-

light range is automatically adjusted accord-

ing to the vehicle load status when they are

switched on.

149

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that

the headlight

s dazzle and distract other driv-

ers. This could result in a serious accident.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other drivers.

Hazard warning lights 

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 32

The hazard warning lights are used to draw

the attention of other road users to your vehi-

cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from

movin

g traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard

warning lights

›››

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;

or an aut

atic gearbox, move the gear

lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-

tion of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when

you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when

the hazard warning lights are switched on.

The two turn signal turn signal lamps  

and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will

flash at the same time. The simultaneous

hazard warning lights also work when the ig-

nition is switched off.

WARNING

●

The risk of

an accident increases if your ve-

hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard

warning lights and a warning triangle to draw

the attention of other road users to your sta-

tionary vehicle.

●

Due to the high temperatures that the cata-

lytic converter can reach, never park in an

area where the catalytic converter could come

into contact with highly inflammable materi-

als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This

could start a fire.

Note

●

The batter

y will run down if the hazard

warning lights are left on for a long time,

even if the ignition is switched off.

●

The use of the hazard warning lights de-

scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-

tory requirements.

Interior lights

ed video

Fig. 151 Convenience

Lighting of instruments and controls

The lighting level of instruments, controls

and di

lays can be adjusted through the

Easy Connect system using the



button

and the

TINGS

function button

›



page 34.

The instrument lighting (some dials and nee-

dles), the centre console lighting and the

lighting of the displays are regulated by a

photodiode incorporated in the instrument

panel.

The instrument lighting (needles) is switched

on when the ignition is on and the light is

off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-

matically as the daylight starts to fade. It

goes out completely when ambient light is

very low. This function is intended to remind

the driver to switch on the dipped beam

150

Lights and visibility

headlights in good time when light condi-

tion

bec

ome poor.

Interior and reading lights

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 33

Luggage compartment lighting

The light is activated when the rear lid is

open, even when the ignition and lights are

turned off. For this reason, ensure that the

rear lid is always closed.

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of the

centre console and the footwell area and, de-

pending on the version, the front door panels

as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness when

the doors are opened and the lights will be

dimmed during driving, when the light selec-

tor is in the ,  or  position.

The brightness of the ambient light* can be

adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as

can colour, in versions with lighting on the

front door panel (the



button and the func-

tion b

utt

SETTINGS > background

lighting

›››



page 34).

Note

If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-

terior lights

will be switched off after approx.

10 minutes, providing the ignition key has

been removed and the courtesy light position

selected. This prevents the battery from dis-

charging.

Visibility

Heated r

ear window 

Fig. 152 With the air conditioning controls:

ed r

ear window switch.

The heated rear window only works when the

gine i

running. When it is switched on, a

lamp lights up on the switch.

After approximately 8 minutes, the heating

device of the rear window switches off auto-

matically.

For the sake of the environment

The heated rear window should be switched

off as

soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-

ing electrical power you can also save fuel.

Note

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an

automatic

temporary disconnection of this

function is possible, coming back on when

normal operating conditions are re-establish-

ed.

Sun visors

Fig. 153 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

sen

er s

un visors:

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

151

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

The s

visor can be pulled out of its

mounting and turned towards the door

››› Fig. 153

●

Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-

git

udin

ly backwards.

Vanity mirror

There is a vanity mirror, with a cover

, on

the r

ar of

the sun blind.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

●

Always store sun blinds and visors in their

housin

g when not in use.

Windscreen wiper and rear win-

w w

iper sy

stems

Windscreen wiper and window wiper

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 33

WARNING

●

Worn and dirty

wiper blades reduce visibili-

ty and safety levels while driving.

●

In cold conditions you should not use the

wash/wipe system unless you have warmed

the windscreen with the heating and ventila-

tion system. The windscreen washer fluid

could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and

obs

cure your view of the road.

●

Always note the corresponding warnings

›››



page 73.

WARNING

The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain

o swit

ch on the wipers.

●

If necessary, switch on the wipers manually

when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-

bility.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the wind-

scr

een wipers and the window wiper are not

frozen. If you switch on the windscreen wip-

ers when the wiper blades are frozen to the

windscreen, you could damage both the wip-

er blades and the wiper motor.

Note

●

The wipers

and washers will work only

when the ignition is switched on.

●

The heat output of the heated jets* is con-

trolled automatically when the ignition is

switched on, depending upon the outside

temperature.

●

In certain versions of vehicles with alarms,

the windscreen wiper will only work in inter-

val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on

and the bonnet closed.

●

When the interv

al wipe function is on, the

intervals are directly proportional to the

speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed

the shorter the intervals.

●

If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen

wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically

change to a lower position speed. The set

speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls

away.

●

The windscreen will be wiped again after

approximately five seconds once the “auto-

matic wash/wipe system” has been activa-

ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func-

tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3

seconds after the drip function, a new wash

sequence will begin without performing the

last wipe. For the “drip” function to work

again, you have to turn the ignition off and

then on again.

●

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in

front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen-

sor disruption or faults.

●

Depending on the version of the model,

when you engage reverse gear and with the

headlight wiper activated, this can start a

wipe.

Rear view mirrors

Int

erior mirr

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see

arly through the rear window.

152

Lights and visibility

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle

nction*

The anti-d

azzle function is activated every

time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the

interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-

matically according to the amount of light it

receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-

led if reverse gear is engaged.

Note

●

The automatic

anti-dazzle function will only

work properly if the sun blind* for the rear

window is retracted and there are no other

objects preventing light from reaching the in-

terior rear vision mirror.

●

If you have to stick any type of sticker on

the windscreen, do not do so in front of the

sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-

zle function from working well or even from

working at all.

Folding in the exterior mirrors man-

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-

ded in. F

or thi

s, pr

ess the mirror housing to-

wards the vehicle.

Note

Before washing the vehicle with an automatic

car wa

sh, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid

damage.

Electric exterior mirrors*

Fig. 154 Exterior mirror controls.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 20

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using

the rotary knob in the driver door.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob

›››

Fig. 154 to position L (left ex-

terior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-

or mirror so that you have a good view to

the rear of the vehicle.

3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior

mirror).

4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex-

terior mirror so that you have a good view

to the rear of the vehicle ›››

ed e

xterior mirrors*

–

Press the demisting button  ››› Fig. 152

–

The mirrors demist for some minutes to

prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.

–

If necessary, press the button again to re-

peat the function.

–

The exterior mirror heating is not activated

in temperatures above approximately

+20°C (+68°F).

Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically*

–

Turn the control ››› Fig. 154 to position  to

fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-

ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

driving through an automatic car wash.

This will help prevent damage.

Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex-

tended position*

–

Turn the knob to position L or R to return

the exterior mirrors to their original posi-

tion ›››

153

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking

enience function)*

The Easy Connect system, the



button and

the f

nction b

uttons

SETTINGS

and

Mirr

and windscreen wipers

can be used to

e the e

xterior mirrors fold in when the ve-

hicle is parked ››› page 123.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote

control, by pressing for more than approxi-

mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-

ded in automatically. When the vehicle is

opened with the remote control, the exterior

mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING

●

Conv

ex or aspheric mirrors increase the

field of vision however the objects appear

smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you

use these mirrors to estimate the distance to

vehicles behind you when changing lane, you

could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

●

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-

timate distances to vehicles behind you.

●

Make sure that you do not get your finger

trapped between the mirror and the mirror

base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of

injury!

For the sake of the environment

The exterior mirror heating should be switch-

ed off when it i

s no longer needed. Other-

wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note

●

If the electric

al adjustment ever fails to op-

erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by

lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

●

In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,

the following points should be observed: if,

due to an external force (e.g. being knocked

while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the

mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have

to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust

the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster

function.

●

The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors

will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h

(25 mph).

Seats and head restraints

Adju

tin

g the seat and head re-

straints

Adjusting the front seats

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 19

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains important

information, tip

s, suggestions and warnings

that you should read and observe for your

own safety and the safety of your passengers

››› page 75.

WARNING

●

Never adju

st the driver or front passenger

seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad-

justing your seat, you will assume an incor-

rect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust

the driver or front passenger seat only when

the vehicle is stationary.

●

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and

front passenger in case of a sudden braking

or an accident, never drive with the backrest

tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec-

tion of the seat belt can be achieved only

when the backrests are in an upright position

and the driver and front passenger have prop-

erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the

154

Seats and head restraints

backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater

the risk of

injury due to improper positioning

of the belt web!

●

Exercise caution when securing the seat

height into forwards/backwards position. In-

juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-

justed without due care and attention.

●

To move the seat forwards and backwards,

pull upwards and not sideways on the lever,

as the force exerted on it in that direction

could damage it.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 19

Adjust the head restraint ›››



page 19 so

that as far as possible the top of the head re-

straint is level with the top of your head.

When this is not possible, try to get as close

as possible to this position.

WARNING

●

Never drive if

the head restraints have been

removed. Risk of injury.

●

After refitting the head restraint, you must

always adjust it properly for height to achieve

optimal protection.

●

Please observe the safety warnings ›››

Correct

adjustment of front head restraints on

page 79.

Note

●

When fitting the hea

d restraints again, in-

sert the tubes as far as possible into the

guides without pressing the button.

Adjustment of the rear head restraints

Fig. 155 Rear centre head restraint: release

point

When transporting people in the back seat,

e the head restraints of the occupied

seats at a minimum of the next socket up

›››

Adju

tin

g the head restraints

–

To set the head restraint higher, grasp the

sides with both hands and move it up-

wards, until you see it engage.

–

To set the head restraint lower down, press

the ››› Fig. 155

button and move it

ards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the correspond-

ing backrest must be partially folded forward.

–

Unlock the backrest ››› page 157.

–

Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-

rives to the top.

–

Press button

, while simultaneously

sing on the security hole

with a flat

ewdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and

remove the head restraint.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

Fittin

g the he

d restraint

To mount the external head restraints, the

corresponding backrest must be partially fol-

ded forward.

–

Unlock the backrest ››› page 157.

–

Insert the head restraint bars into the

guides until they perceptibly engage. It

should not be possible to remove the head

restraint from the backrest.

–

Move the backrest until it engages properly

›››

155

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

●

Plea

se observe the general notes

››› page 79.

●

Remove the rear head restraints only when

it is necessary for the placement of a child

seat ››› page 92. After removing a child seat,

remount the head restraint immediately.

Travelling with the head restraints removed

or improperly adjusted increases the risk of

severe injuries.

Seat functions

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can

cause sev

ere injuries.

●

Assume the proper sitting position before

your trip and remain in it throughout. This al-

so applies to the other occupants.

●

Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other

parts of the body away from the operating ra-

dius and the adjustment of seats.

Heated seats* 

Fig. 156 In the centre console: front seats

atin

g sw

itch : version with Climatronic.

: version with manual air conditioning.

The seat cushions can be heated electrically

when the ignition i

itched on. The back-

rest is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged in

any of the following conditions:

●

The seat is unoccupied.

●

The seat has a covering.

●

There is a child seat installed in the seat.

●

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

●

The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-

er than 25°C (77°F).

Activate

Press the button  or . Seat heating is

switched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Press the button  or  repeatedly until the

desired temperature is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button  or  until all the warning

lamps switch off.

WARNING

Children and people who cannot perceive

pain or temper

ature because of medications,

paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes)

or have a limited perception of these, may

suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs

when using seat heating, an occurrence that

may entail a very lengthy recovery period or

from which it may not be possible to recover

fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts

regarding your health.

●

People with limited pain and temperature

thresholds must never use seat heating.

●

If an abnormality in the device's tempera-

ture control is detected, have it checked by a

specialist workshop.

156

Seats and head restraints

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-

versely

affect the operation of the seat heat-

ing, increasing the risk of burns.

●

Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to

using the seat heater.

●

Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is

wet or damp.

●

Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp

on the seat.

●

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

●

To avoid d

amaging the heating elements of

the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the

seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point

on the seat cushion or backrest.

●

Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-

terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage

the seat heating.

●

In the event of smells, switch off the seat

heating immediately and have it inspected by

a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should remain on only when

needed. Otherwi

se, it is an unnecessary fuel

waste.

Folding down the back seat

Fig. 157 Folding up the rear seat cushion.

Fig. 158 On the rear seat backrest: unlock

utt

; red mark

Folding seat down

–

Remove the head restraint ›

›

page 155.

–

Pull the front edge of the seat cushion

››› Fig. 157

upwards in the direction of

the arr

–

Lift the cushion

forwards in the direc-

tion of

the arr

–

Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 158

for-

s and at the same time fold the back-

rest down. The rear seat backrest is not en-

gaged when the red marking of the button

is visible.

–

Insert the head restraints in the spaces on

the r

ar of

the seat cushion which are visi-

ble when the seat cushion is lowered.

Folding seat forward

–

Remove the head restraints from the

spaces in the seat cushion.

–

Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re-

place the head restraints in the seat cush-

ion, and then click the seat correctly onto

the locking rails. The red marking on the

tab

should no longer be visible when

the b

rest is properly secured.

–

Lower the cushion and push it backwards

below the seat belt buckles.

–

Press the front part of the cushion down-

wards.

On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush-

ion can be lowered and raised respectively in

two sections.

157

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

●

Plea

se be careful when folding back the

backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat

height is adjusted without due care and at-

tention.

●

Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-

ing the backrest.

●

After raising the backrest, check it has en-

gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling

on the central seat belt or directly on the

backrest and check that the position lever is

in the neutral position.

●

The three point automatic seat belt only

works correctly when the backrest of the cen-

tral seat is correctly engaged.

Transport and practical

equipment

actic

l equipment

Glove compartment

Fig. 159 Passenger side: glove compartment.

The compartment can be opened by pulling

the l

er ›

›› Fig. 159.

This compartment can hold documents in A4

format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD

player is located in the glove compartment.

Separate operating instructions are enclosed

for this equipment in the corresponding In-

struction Manual.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment cover

closed whi

le the vehicle is in motion in order

to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-

den braking or by an accident.

Storage compartment under the front

seats*

Fig. 160 Storage compartment under the

right

ont

passenger seat.

To open

–

The compartment is opened by pulling on

the l

er and guidin

g it with your hand.

To close

–

Press the cover inwards until the closed

drawer “clicks” into position.

158

Transport and practical equipment

Note

The storage drawer will hold a maximum

weight of

1.5 kg.

Storage pocket in the seat*

Fig. 161 Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of the

ont

ats.

Storage compartment in front door

panel*

In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-

e, et

. can be stored.

Front drink holder*

Fig. 162 Front drink holders in the centre con-

In the central console, next to the hand

e, ther

e are two drinks holders

››› Fig. 162.

WARNING

●

Do not put

hot drinks in the drink holders.

During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres,

when braking suddenly or in case of an acci-

dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald-

ing.

●

Never use rigid materials (for example,

glass or ceramic), since they could cause in-

jury in the case of an accident.

●

When travelling, the drinks holder should

always be closed to prevent risk in the event

of sudden breaking or accident.

Front ashtray*

Fig. 163 Ashtray in the centre console.

Opening and closing the ashtray

●

To open the ashtray, lift the cover

›

Fig. 163.

●

To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

●

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could

ignite the paper in the a

shtray and cause a

fire.

159

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Electrical power socket

Fig. 164 Front power socket.

The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can

so be u

sed f

or other electrical components

with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When

the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-

cle battery will discharge. For further informa-

tion see ››› page 247.

WARNING

The power sockets and the connected acces-

sories w

ill only operate when the ignition is

on or when the engine is running. Improper

use of the sockets or electrical accessories

can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To

avoid the risk of injury, never leave children

alone inside the vehicle.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid

damagin

g the sockets.

Note

●

The use of el

ectrical appliances with the

engine switched off will cause a battery dis-

charge.

●

Before using any electrical accessories, see

the instructions in ››› page 247.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 165 Lighter.

–

Press on the cigarette lighter

›

Fig. 165 to

activate it

›››

–

Wait for the lighter to spring out.

–

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the

ette on the glowing coil.

WARNING

●

Improper use of

the cigarette lighter can

lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

●

Usin

g the lighter carefully. Carelessness or

negligence when using the cigarette lighter

can cause burns and serious injuries.

●

The lighter only works when the ignition is

turned on or the engine is running. To avoid

the risk of fire, never leave children alone in-

side the vehicle.

Luggage compartment

Loa

ding the luggage compartment

Fig. 166 Position heavy items as far forward

ssible.

All luggage and other loose objects must be

ely

secured in the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth

could affect safety or driving characteristics

of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

160

Transport and practical equipment

–

trib

ute the load evenly in the luggage

compartment.

–

Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-

ble in the luggage compartment

››› Fig. 166.

–

Place the heavy objects first.

–

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening

rings* ››› page 162.

–

Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or

with non-elastic straps secured to the fas-

tening* rings.

WARNING

●

Loose lug

gage and other objects in the lug-

gage compartment could cause serious inju-

ries.

●

Always stow objects in the luggage com-

partment and secure them with the fastening

rings*.

●

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,

loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring

vehicle occupants or even third parties. This

increased risk of injury will be further in-

creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat-

ing airbag. If this happens, objects may

shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-

jury.

●

Always keep all objects in the luggage com-

partment and use appropriate grips to secure

them, particularly in the case of heavy ob-

jects.

●

Never ex

ceed the allowed axle weights or

allowed maximum weight. If said weights are

exceeded, the driving characteristics of the

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-

juries and damage to the vehicle.

●

Please note that the centre of gravity may

shift when transporting heavy objects; this

may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-

cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust

your speed and driving style accordingly, to

avoid accidents.

●

Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-

cially when the rear lid is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

closing the door behind them; they will be

trapped and run the risk of death.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and

the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Be-

fore you lock the vehicle, make sure that

there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

●

Please observe the notes on the ››› page 75.

CAUTION

Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe

agains

t the wires of the heating element in

the heated rear window and cause damage.

Note

●

The tyre pr

essure must be adjusted accord-

ing to the load. When necessary, check the

tyre pressures on the adhesive label stuck to

the back of the front left door frame

›››

page 275.

●

Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce

fogging of the windows. Used air escapes

through ventilation slits in the side trim of

the luggage compartment. Ensure that the

ventilation slots are never covered.

●

Straps for securing the load to the fasten-

ing rings* are commercially available from ac-

cessory shops.

161

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Rear shelf

Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: remov-

g and in

talling the rear shelf.

Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: remov-

g and in

talling the rear shelf.

Removing

●

Detach the cord loops ›

›

Fig. 167

from

their hook

●

emo

e the rear shelf from the side sup-

ports ››› Fig. 168 by pulling it upwards and

then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-

der the luggage compartment double floor

››› page 163.

Fitting

●

Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-

cess” fits onto the axis of the supports

››› Fig. 168 and press down until it engages.

●

Hook the loops ››› Fig. 167

to the rear

lid.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the

rear shelf

, because they will endanger the ve-

hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.

CAUTION

●

Befor

e closing the rear lid, ensure that the

rear shelf is correctly fitted.

●

An overloaded luggage compartment could

mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-

ed and it may be bent or damaged.

●

If the luggage compartment is overloaded,

remove the tray.

Note

●

Ensur

e that, when placing items of clothing

on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-

bility is not reduced.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 169 Location of fastening rings in lug-

e c

ompartment.

There may be some fastening rings included

in the lug

e compartment for fastening

luggage and other objects

›››

Fig. 169 (ar-

rows).

–

Always use suitable and undamaged straps

to secure luggage and other objects to the

fastening rings

›››

in Loading the lug-

e c

ompartment on page 161.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying

unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-

lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this

162

Transport and practical equipment

object generates a force corresponding to 20

time

its

weight. That means that the effec-

tive weight of the object increases to approxi-

mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of

the injuries which might be sustained if this

“object” strikes an occupant as it flies

through the interior of the vehicle. This in-

creased risk of injury will be further increased

if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-

bag.

WARNING

●

If piece

s of baggage or other objects are se-

cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-

ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries

could result in the event of braking manoeu-

vres or accidents.

●

Never secure a child seat on the fastening

rings.

Luggage compartment variable floor

Fig. 170 Luggage compartment variable

floor:  r

sed po

sition;  lowered position.

Fig. 171 Luggage compartment variable

floor: sloped pos

ition.

Variable floor in the high position

●

Lift the floor using handle ›

›

Fig. 170

and pull it back until the front of the floor has

ly passed the supports

●

Move the floor forward over the supports as

ar a

the rear seat backrest and then lower

the floor with the handle

ari

le floor in the low position

●

Lift the floor using handle

and pull it

until the supports

have fully passed

the fr

ont

art of the floor.

●

Now match the front part with the lower

grooves of the supports and slide the floor

forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and

lower the floor at the same time with the han-

dle

163

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the

ari

able floor is tilted you can ac-

cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

●

Lift the variable floor in the high position

using handle

, pull it up and push it to-

s the backrest of the rear seats until the

floor folds along the hinge line and the mov-

able part of the floor is resting on itself.

●

Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 171

(arrows).

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-

vre, or in the event

of an accident, objects

could be flung though the interior and cause

serious or fatal injuries.

●

Always secure objects, even when the lug-

gage compartment floor is properly lifted.

●

Only objects that do not protrude more

than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raised lug-

gage compartment floor.

●

Only objects that do not weigh than ap-

proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between

the rear seat and the raised luggage compart-

ment floor.

CAUTION

●

The maximum w

eight that can be loaded on

the luggage compartment variable floor in

the top position is 150 kg.

●

Do not let

the luggage compartment floor

fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it

downwards in a controlled manner. Other-

wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage

compartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure

ects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Intr

oduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

se aer

ody

namics. For this reason, cross

bars or conventional roof carrier systems can-

not be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the

roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-

proved cross bars and roof carrier systems

can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri-

er system should be disassembled.

●

When they are not used.

●

When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

●

When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-

mum height, for ex

ample, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transported

on the roof c

arrier system, car driving per-

formance is affected, as the centre of gravity

shifts and there is greater wind resistance.

●

Always secure the load properly using belts

or retaining straps that are suitable and in a

good condition.

●

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-

ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of

gravity and driving performance.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-

fic conditions.

CAUTION

●

Remov

e the cross bars and the roof carrier

system before entering a car wash.

●

Vehicle height is increased by the installa-

tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and

the load secured on them. For this purpose,

check that your vehicle's height does not sur-

pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-

derpasses or for entering garage doors.

●

Cross bars, a roof carrier system and the

load secured on them should not interfere

with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the

panoramic sun roof ››› page 144 and the rear

lid.

●

On opening the rear lid make sure that it

does not knock into the roof load.

164

Transport and practical equipment

For the sake of the environment

When cross bars and a roof carrier system are

inst

alled, the increased air resistance means

that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof car-

rier syst

Fig. 172 Attachment points for the roof rail-

for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-

roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,

special fixtures must be used to safely trans-

port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or

boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can

be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-

rier system properly. Always take the assem-

bly instructions that come with the crossbars

and the roof carrier system in question into

account.

The front and rear attachment points

and

are only visible when the doors are open

›

Fig. 172.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-

bars

and the roof carrier system may cause

the whole system to detach from the roof and

cause an accident and injuries.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly in-

structions into account.

●

Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-

tem when they are in perfect condition and

are properly secured.

●

Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier

system properly.

●

Check threaded joints and attachments

travelling and if necessary tighten them after

you have travelled a short distance. When

making long trips, check the threaded joints

whenever you stop for a rest.

●

Always fit the special roof carrier systems

correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.

●

Do not modify or repair the crossbars or

roof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions that

come with the c

rossbars and the roof carrier

system carefully and keep them in the vehi-

cle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars

and the roof c

arrier system are properly in-

stalled ›››

Maximum authori

sed roof load

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.

This figure comes from the combined weight

of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load

itself on the roof ›››

Alwa

ys check the weight of the roof carrier

system, the cross bars and the weight of the

load to be transported and weigh them if

necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-

thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier

with a lower weight rating, you will not be

able to carry the maximum authorised roof

load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-

mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is

listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure them

correctly

›››

165

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Check attachments

Onc

e the c

oss bars and roof carrier system

have been installed, check the bolted con-

nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain

frequency.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load

can re

sult in accidents and considerable vehi-

cle damage.

●

Never exceed the maximum authorised

load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-

cle's maximum authorised weight.

●

Never exceed the load capacity of the cross

bars and the roof carrier system, even if the

maximum authorised roof load has not been

reached.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-

ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall

from the roof

carrier system or cause acci-

dents and injuries.

●

Always use belts or retaining straps that

are suitable and in a good condition.

●

Secure the load properly.

Air conditioning

atin

ventilation and cool-

ing

General notes

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 51

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combined particulate

filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-

rier against impurities in the outside air, in-

cluding dust and pollen.

For the climate control system to work with

maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must

be replaced at the specified intervals in the

Maintenance Programme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due

to use in areas reaching very high pollution

levels, the pollen filter must be changed

more frequently than stated in the Service

Schedule.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-

cre

ases the risk of serious accidents.

●

Always ensure that all windows are free of

ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,

so as to maintain good visibility of everything

outside.

●

The m

aximum heat output required to de-

frost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached its

normal running temperature. Only drive when

you have good visibility.

●

Always ensure that you use the heating

system, fresh air system, air conditioner and

the heated rear window to maintain good visi-

bility to the outside.

●

Never leave the air recirculation on for a

long period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation mode

switched on, the windows can mist over very

quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

●

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is

not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-

duce driver c

oncentration possibly resulting

in a serious accident.

●

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or

use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be

refreshed.

CAUTION

●

If y

ou suspect that the air conditioner is

damaged, switch it off with the

A/C

button to

166

Air conditioning

prevent further damage and have it checked

by a s

pecialised workshop.

●

Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-

cialist knowledge and special tools. There-

fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle

to a specialised workshop.

Note

●

the humidity and t

emperature outside the

vehicle are high, condensation can drip off

the evaporator in the cooling system and

form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is

normal and does not indicate a leak.

●

Keep the air intake slots in front of the

windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-

sure heating and cooling are not impaired,

and to prevent the windows from misting

over.

●

The air from the vents flows through the ve-

hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the

luggage compartment designed for this pur-

pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct-

ing these s

lots with any kind of object.

●

The air conditioner operates most effective-

ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting

sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature

inside the vehicle is excessive because of the

sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by

opening the windows for a short time.

●

Do not smoke while air recirculation mode

is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition-

ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,

producing a permanent unpleasant odour.

●

At low outside temperatures, the compres-

sor switches off automatically and cannot be

switched on even with the

AUTO

button.

●

It is advisable to turn on the air condition-

ing at l

east once a month, to lubricate the

system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-

crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a

Technical Service should be consulted to

check the system.

●

To ens

ure correct operation, the grilles on

both sides of the screen must not be obstruc-

ted.

●

When the engine is under extreme strain,

switch off the compressor for a moment.

Economic use of the air conditioning

When the air conditioning is switched on, the

compre

ssor consumes engine power and has

influence on fuel consumption. Consider the

following points in order to have the system

operating in the minimum possible time.

●

If the vehicle interior has overheated due to

an exc

essive solar radiation, it is best to

open the windows or doors to allow the hot

air to escape.

●

While in motion, the air conditioning

should not be switched on if the windows or

the sunroof* are open.

167

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Air outlets

Fig. 173 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-

ation in the

ehicle interior, air vents

››› Fig. 173

should remain open.

●

The outlets can be closed or opened sepa-

ely

using the slats and the air flow direc-

ted according to need.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air

vents in the dash panel

, in the footwell

and in the r

ar ar

ea of the interior.

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi-

tive ob

jects should never be placed in front of

the air outlets as they may be damaged or

made unsuitable for use by the air coming

from the air vents.

Air recirculation 

Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,

e.g. when pa

ssing through a tunnel or in

queuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the air distribution is in the thaw position,

the recirculation flap will always be open (in-

dicator light off).

If the air distribution is switched from any po-

sition to the thaw position, recirculation will

be automatically deactivated.

Connecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

●

Pres

s the  button, the button’s lamp will

light up, indicating that air recirculation in-

side the vehicle has been activated.

Disconnecting the recirculation

In any air distribution position except thaw:

●

Press the  button again and the button's

lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from

the outside has been activated.

In the thaw position  the entry of air into

the vehicle interior is always from the out-

side.

168

Air conditioning

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the

outside ent

ers the vehicle interior. If the air

conditioner is switched off, the windows can

quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the

air recirculation mode switched on for a long

time (risk of

accident).

Note

●

ctivatin

g air recirculation automatically

activates the  button (to prevent the win-

dows from misting up). If the temperature

regulator is turned to the coldest setting

(blue point), the air recirculation function and

the  button are automatically activated.

●

If the fu

nction is not deactivated by press-

ing the button, it will deactivate after approx-

imately 20 minutes.

Heating and fresh air

Contro

Fig. 174 Heating controls on the dash panel.

Temperature regulator ›

›

page 170.

Blower control. There are four speed set-

tin

for the blower. The blower should

always be set at the lowest speed when

driv

g s

lowly.

169

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Air distribution regulator.

ed r

ear window.

Air distribution

Control

for setting the flow of air in the re-

quir

ed dir

ection.



– Air distribution towards the windscreen

in order to demist.

 – Air distribution to upper body.

 – Air distribution to footwell

 – Air distribution to the windscreen and

the footwell.

WARNING

●

For y

our safety, the windows should never

be fogged up or covered with snow or ice.

This is essential to ensure good visibility.

Please familiarise yourself with the correct

operation of the heating and ventilation sys-

tem, including the demist/defrost functions

for the windows.

Note

●

Plea

se consider the general notes

››› page 166.



Functions

Ventilating the vehicle interior

The desir

ed temperature inside the vehicle

cannot be lower than the ambient tempera-

ture.

●

Turn the temperature selector

››› Fig. 174

anti-clockwise.

●

Turn blower switch

to any of the levels

1-4.

●

Set the airflow to the desired direction us-

ing air dis

tribution control

●

Open the relevant air outlets.

Int

erior he

atin

Maximum heat output, which is needed to

defrost the windows quickly, is only available

when the engine has reached its operating

temperature.

●

Turn the temperature selector

›››

Fig. 174

clockwise to select the re-

quir

ed t

emper

ature.

●

Turn blower switch

to any of the levels

1-4.

●

Set the airflow to the desired direction us-

g air di

tribution control

●

Open the relevant air outlets.

Defrosting the windscreen

●

Turn the temperature regulator

›

Fig. 174

clockwise to reach the maxi-

mum t

emper

ure.

●

Turn the blower switch

to level 4.

●

Turn air distribution control to .

●

Close the central outlets.

●

Open and turn the side outlets towards the

indo

Keeping the windscreen and the side win-

dows demisted

●

Turn the temperature regulator

››› Fig. 174

to the heating zone.

●

Turn blower switch

to any of the levels

2-3.

●

Turn air distribution control to .

●

Close the central outlets.

●

Open and turn the side outlets towards the

indo

Once the windows are demisted and as a pre-

ventive measure, the control

can be set in

ition

 greater comfort while preventing

the windows from misting again.

Note

Remember that the temperature of the engine

cool

ant should be optimum to ensure that the

heating system functions correctly (except in

vehicles fitted with additional heating*).

170

Air conditioning

Manual air conditioning*

ontr

Fig. 175 Air conditioning controls on the dash

panel.

Temperature selector ›

›

page 171

Blower control. There are four speed set-

tings for the blower. At low speed, it is

recommended to set the blower to a mini-

mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh

air.

Air distribution regulator.

Air recirculation button ››› page 168.

When the function is activated, a warning

light on the button is turned on.

Heated rear window.

Button to switch on air conditioning

››› page 171. The air conditioning system







only works when the engine is running

and the f

an i

switched on.

WARNING

For your safety, the windows should never be

fogg

ed up or covered with snow or ice. This is

essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa-

miliarise yourself with the correct operation

of the heating and ventilation system, includ-

ing the demist/defrost functions for the win-

dows.

Note

Please consider the general notes.

Functions

Interior heating

Maximum he

at output, which is needed to

defrost the windows quickly, is only available

when the engine has reached its operating

temperature.

●

Turn off the cooling system using the 

button ››› Fig. 175 (the button light turns off).

●

Turn the temperature regulator

››› Fig. 175

to set the desired temperature

inside the

vehicle.

●

Turn the blower switch to any of the set-

tings

1-4.

171

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

Set

the air di

tribution regulator

››› Fig. 175

to the air flow configuration

ed:  (towards the windscreen),  (to-

wards the chest),  (towards the footwell)

and  (towards the windscreen and foot-

well).

Interior cooling

When the air conditioning is switched on, the

temperature and the air humidity go down.

This way, if the outside humidity is extreme,

the air conditioning prevents the misting of

the windows and therefore, comfort is im-

proved.

●

Turn on the cooling system using the 

button (the button light turns on).

●

Turn the temperature control switch until

the desired interior temperature is reached.

●

Turn the blower switch to any of the set-

tings 1-4.

●

Set the air distribution control to the air

flow configuration desired:  (towards the

windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to-

wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind-

screen and footwell).

Demisting the windscreen

●

Turn air distribution to .

●

Turn the fan control to one of the two levels

depending on the speed required.

●

Rotate the temperature control to the de-

sired level of comfort.

●

Close the central outlets.

●

Open and turn the side outlets towards the

windows.

If the air conditioning does not work, this

may be due to the following reasons:

●

The engine is stationary.

●

The fan blower is switched off.

●

The outside temperature is lower than +3°C

(+37°F).

●

The air conditioning system compressor

has been temporarily switched off because of

an increased engine coolant temperature.

●

The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioning checked by a specialised work-

shop.

172

Air conditioning

Climatronic*

Gener

notes

Fig. 176 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 52

Climatronic automatically maintains a com-

fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-

cally regulates the supplied air temperature

and the blower and air distribution levels.

The system also allows for the effect of sun-

light, so there is no need for manual adjust-

ment.

Automatic operation guarantees maximum

comfort any time of year ››› page 174.

Climatronic description

Cooling only works if the following conditions

are met:

●

The engine is running

●

the outside temperature is above +2°C

(+36°F);

●

 turned on.

Starting the Climatronic

When a button is pressed, the corresponding

function will be activated (except for the recir-

culation button), switching on the air condi-

tioning if it was switched off.

Switching off the Climatronic

●

Adjust fan power to zero ››› Fig. 176

s the  button.

In order to ensure engines subject to heavy

loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-

pressor is switched off in the event of high

coolant temperatures.

Recommended setting for all seasons of the

year

●

Set the required temperature. We recom-

mend +22°C (+72°F).

●

Press the button  ››› Fig. 176.

173

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

Adju

the vents so that the air flow is di-

rected slightly upwards.

Change between degrees Centigrade and de-

grees Fahrenheit

The units of degrees can be changed via the

Easy Connect system using the



button

and the f

nction b

utton SETTINGS >

Units > Temperature.

Automatic mode

Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-

stant temperature and demist the windows

inside the vehicle.

●

Set a interior temperature between +16°C

(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).

●

Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di-

rected slightly upwards.

●

Press the  button, AUTO is displayed on

the screen.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing

the air distribution buttons or increasing or

decreasing the blower speed. However, the

temperature remains regulated.

Adjusting the temperature

●

When you switch on the ignition, control

››› Fig. 176 can be used t

o set the required in-

terior temperature.

It is possible to select interior temperatures

from +16°C (+64°F) t

o +29°C (+84°F). In this

range the temperature is regulated automati-

cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is

selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a

temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected,

“HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex-

tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool-

ing or heating power, respectively. The tem-

perature is not regulated.

In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-

tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-

larly the footwells) and significant differen-

ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi-

cle, sensitive people may catch cold.

Fan regulation

Climatronic automatically regulates blower

speed according to the interior temperature.

It is possible, however, to set the blower

speed to suit requirements.

●

Press the

buttons to increase or reduce

an s

peed.

limatronic will switch off when the blower

switches off.

Turn on windscreen defrost

●

Press the button 

›››

Fig. 176.

Switching off windscreen defrosting

●

Press the  button several times or

press the  button.

The temperature is regulated automatically.

The air output from the vents ››› Fig. 173

is increased.

WARNING

Read and observe the safety warnings ›››

General

notes on page 166.

Note

●

A vi

sit to the specialised service once a

year is recommended to clean the Climatronic

system.

●

The interior temperature sensor is at the

bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the

like, as this could have a negative effect on

Climatronic operations.

174

Driving

tin

g and stopping the en-

gine

Ignition key positions

Fig. 177 Ignition key positions.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 31

Ignition switched off, steering lock

In this position ››› Fig. 177

the ignition

and the en

gine ar

e off

and the steering may

be locked.

For the Steering lock to operate without the

ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it

locks with an audible sound. You should al-

ways lock the steering wheel when you leave

your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

theft ›››

Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys-

em on

urn the ignition k

ey to this position and re-

lease it

. If the key cannot be turned or it is

diffic

to turn from position

to position

, move the steering wheel from one side to

the other; thi

ill release it.

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this

position

. Electrical devices with high pow-

er c

umption are switched off temporarily

at the same time.

Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-

nition key must be turned to position

. The

epetitiv

e s

tart prevention lock of the igni-

tion prevents possible damage to the starter

motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

●

The ignition key mu

st NOT be removed from

the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand-

still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme-

diately blocked- Risk of accident!

●

Always remove the key from the ignition

when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a

short period. This is especially important if

children or disabled people are left alone in

the vehicle. They could accidentally start the

engine or work electrical equipment such as

the electric windows, resulting in an acci-

dent.

●

Unsuper

vised use of the key could start the

engine or any electrical system, such as the

electric windows. This could result in serious

injury.

CAUTION

The starter motor will only work when the en-

gine i

s s

topped (ignition key position

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine

T key with its correct code.

–

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-

tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-

oughly and hold it in this position for the

starter to turn the engine on.

–

Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-

tion ››› Fig. 177

–

Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-

gine s

ts; the starter motor must not run

on with the engine.

After starting a very hot engine, you may

need to slightly press down the accelerator.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little

noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-

sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-

pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause

for concern.

175

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

If the engine does not start immediately,

h the starter off after 10 seconds and try

again after half a minute. If the engine still

does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be

checked ››› page 104, Fuses.

WARNING

●

Never st

art or run the engine in unventila-

ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-

tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-

ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-

dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of

consciousness and result in death.

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the

engine is running.

●

Never use “cold start sprays”, they could

explode or cause the engine to run at high

revs. Risk of injury.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is

cold, you should avoid

high engine speeds, driving at full throttle

and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine

damage.

●

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed

more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-

burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter

and damage it.

●

Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-

hicle in order to start it, you should first try to

start it using the battery of another vehicle.

Please observe and follow the notes on the

›››



page 71, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the

engine with the

vehicle stationary. Start off

immediately, driving gently. This helps the

engine reach operating temperature faster

and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEA

T key with its correct code.

–

Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-

tion and depres

s the clutch pedal thor-

oughly and hold it in this position for the

starter to turn the engine on.

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›››

Fig. 177

. The warning lamp  w

l light for en-

gine pre-heating.

–

When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition

key to position

to start the engine. Do

not

ss the accelerator.

–

Release the ignition key as soon as the en-

gine starts. The starter motor should not

turn at the same time.

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little

noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-

sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-

pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause

for concern.

If there are problems starting the engine, see

the ›››



page 71.

Glow plug system for diesel engines

To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-

tery, do not use any other major electrical

equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-

ing.

Start the engine as soon as the glow plug

warning lamp goes out.

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank

has run dry

If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,

it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-

nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.

This is because the fuel system must elimi-

nate air first.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Starting

petrol

engines on page 176.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is

cold, you should avoid

high engine speeds, driving at full throttle

and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine

damage.

●

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed

more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-

burnt fuel could enter the particulate filter

and damage it.

176

Driving

●

Befor

e attempting to push-start or tow a ve-

hicle in order to start it, you should first try to

start it using the battery of another vehicle.

Please observe and follow the notes on the

›››



page 71, How to jump start.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm-up the engine by running the

gine with the

vehicle stationary. You

should drive off as soon as you start the en-

gine. This helps the engine reach operating

temperature faster and reduces emissions.

“SAFE” electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-

thori

sed per

son

s from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates

the electronic immobiliser automatically

when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated

again automatically as soon as you pull the

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started using a genu-

ine SEAT key with its correct code.

If the following message* is shown on the in-

strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle

cannot be started.

The engine can, however, be started if the

appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.

Note

A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured

if genuine

SEAT keys are used.

Switching off the engine

–

Stop the vehicle.

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›

Fig. 177

er sw

itching the engine off, the radiator

fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also

possible that the fan turns itself on once

more if the coolant temperature increases

due to the heat accumulated in the engine

compartment or due to its prolonged expo-

sure to solar radiation.

WARNING

●

Never swit

ch the engine off until the vehi-

cle is completely stationary.

●

The brake servo works only when the en-

gine is running. With the engine switched off,

more strength is needed to brake. As normal

brake operation cannot be performed, risk of

accidents and serious injury may exist.

●

The steerin

g lock can be immediately

blocked once the key is removed from the ig-

nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of

accident.

●

Power-assisted steering does not work

when the engine is off, and more strength is

needed to turn the wheel.

●

If the key is removed from the ignition lock

the steering lock could be engaged and vehi-

cle steering would not work.

CAUTION

●

When the en

gine ha

s been running under a

heavy load for a long period, heat can accu-

mulate in the engine compartment and cause

engine damage. For this reason, idle the en-

gine for approximately 2 minutes before

switching it off.

●

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop

system* switches off the engine, the ignition

remains switched on. Make sure that the igni-

tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-

cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.

Available depending on the market

177

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Starter button*

Fig. 178 In the lower part of the centre con-

e: s

tarter button.

Fig. 179 On the right of the steering column:

emer

ency

start.

The vehicle engine can be started with a

ter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there

must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the

area of the front or rear seats.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the

vehicle activates the electronic lock on the

steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch-

ing the brake or clutch pedal ›››

ehicles with both manual and automatic

transmission, the starter button text

START ENGINE STOP

flashes like a heartbeat

when the sy

em is preset for switching the

ignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-

hicle key with them but leaving the ignition

on, the ignition is not switched off automati-

cally. The ignition is switched off automati-

cally by pressing the lock button on the re-

mote control  or manually by pressing the

sensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 144

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,

an emergency start-up will be required. The

relevant message will appear in the dash

panel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ample, the battery of the vehicle key button

is very low or flat:

●

Immediately after pushing the starter but-

ton, keep the

vehicle key next to the right

trim of the steering column ›››

Fig. 179, as

close as possible to the Kessy logo.

●

The ignition connects and the engine starts

automatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly

pressing the starter button, an emergency

disconnect will be required:

●

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-

onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-

ond ›››

●

The engine turns off automatically.

gine r

start feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle

after the engine stops, you will only have 5

seconds to restart it. A warning will display

on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to

start the engine without a valid key inside

the vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-

hicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically

when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-

matic engine shutdown is active, if:

●

The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

●

the driver does not step on any pedal,

178

Driving

●

the driv

er door i

opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if

the dipped beam  is on, the side light re-

mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-

tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks

the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the

side light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could

res

ult in serious injury.

●

When switching on the ignition, do not

press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise

the engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-

out due car

e, this may cause accidents and

serious injury.

●

Never leave any key inside the vehicle

when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-

ised person could lock the vehicle, start the

engine or connect the ignition and, in this

way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the

windows).

Note

●

Befor

e leaving the vehicle, always discon-

nect the ignition manually and, if appropri-

ate, take into account the instructions on the

screen of the dash panel.

●

If the v

ehicle is stationary for a long time

with the ignition on, the vehicle battery

might be discharged and it might not be pos-

sible to start the engine.

●

In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in

the engine starting if it requires preheating.

●

If during the STOP phase you press the

START ENGINE STOP

button, the ignition is

switc

hed off and the button flashes.

●

If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti-

vated: Start the engine manually” is dis-

played on the dash panel display, the

START ENGINE STOP

button will blink.

Starting the engine

3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button

Step

Starting the engine with the starter

button ››› page 178.

Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5

is performed.

1a.

In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press

and hold the clutch down until the engine

starts.

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec-

tor lever in position P or N.

Step

Starting the engine with the starter

button ››› page 178.

Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 178

without pressing the accelerator. For the en-

gine to start there must be a valid key in the

vehicle.

After starting the engine, the light of the

START ENGINE STOP

button changes to a fixed

light indicating that the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, stop and wait for

approx. 1 minute before trying again. If nec-

essary, perform an emergency start

››› page 178.

Disconnect the hand brake when you are

about to start driving ››› page 182.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-

ning, es

pecially if a gear or gear range is en-

gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move

or something strange could happen that

would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a

sudden inc

rease in the engine speed.

●

Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION

●

The star

ter motor or the engine may be

damaged if you try to start the engine while

179

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

driving or if you restart it immediately after

switc

hing it off.

●

If the engine is cold, avoid high engine

speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap-

id acceleration.

●

Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-

hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter

the catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

●

Do not

wait

until the engine warms up with

the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi-

bility through the windows, start driving im-

mediately. This helps the engine reach oper-

ating temperature faster and reduces emis-

sions.

●

Electrical components with a high power

consumption are switched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When starting with a cold engine, noise

levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-

mal, and no cause for concern.

●

When the outside temperature is below

+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some

smoke may appear under the vehicle when

the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine

3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button

Step

Switch off the engine with the starter

button ››› page 178.

1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .

Press and hold the brake pedal until the step

4 is performed.

If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place

the selector lever in position P.

4. Apply the handbrake ››› page 182.

Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 178.

The

START ENGINE STOP

button blinks again. If

the engine fails to switch off, perform an

emergency disconnect ››› page 178.

If the vehicle is equipped with a manual

gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle

is mo

ving. This could cause loss of control of

the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the en-

gine off. Therefore, you need to press the

break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

●

Power steering does not work when the en-

gine is not running. You need more strength

to steer when the engine is switched off.

●

If the ignition is

switched off, the steering

column could be locked, making it impossible

to control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a long

time, it

y overheat after being switched

off. To prevent damage to the engine before

switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-

nutes in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling fan

may

continue to operate in the engine com-

partment for a few more minutes, even with

the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-

cally switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is

the “M

eat” function. This feature provides

an additional indication of the vehicle igni-

tion system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening

the doors with the remote control, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes, calling at-

ention t

o the r

elevant starter system button.

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light

of the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes. With

the en

gine sw

ched off, after a few seconds,

180

Driving

the

OP ENGINE

START

button stops flashing

and g

out.

With the engine running, the

START ENGINE STOP

button light stays on, indi-

atin

g th

at the engine is running. The time

that lapses between the moment the user

starts the engine with the

START ENGINE STOP

button and the lighting changes from flash-

g t

o fi

xed will depend on specific engine

size characteristics. Upon switching the igni-

tion off with the

START ENGINE STOP

button, it

ts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the

“My Beat” function also offers additional in-

formation:

●

When the engine stops during the Stop

phase, the light of the

START ENGINE STOP

but-

on s

ays on, since, even though the engine

is off, the Start-Stop system is active.

●

When the engine cannot be stated again

with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 204, and

needs to be started manually, the

START ENGINE STOP

button flashes to indicate

thi

act.

Braking and parking

Braking capacity and braking distance

The efficiency of the brakes depends directly

on the br

e p

ad wear. This wear depends to

a great extent on the conditions under which

the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-

cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive

short distances or have a sporty driving style,

we recommend that you have the thickness

of your brake pads checked by technical serv-

ices more frequently than recommended in

the Maintenance Programme.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-

ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy

rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef-

fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake

discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in

this case, the brakes should be “dried” by

pressing the brake pedal several times.

WARNING

Longer braking distances and faults in the

brake sy

stem increase the risk of accidents.

●

New brake pads must be run in and do not

have the correct friction during the first

200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking ca-

pacity may be compensated for by pressing

on the brake pedal a little harder, which also

applies when the brake pads have to be

changed further on.

●

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are

driving on roads which have been salted,

braking power may be lower than normal.

●

On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively

used, they will overheat. Before driving down

a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce

speed and change down into a lower gear or

range (depending on the type of transmis-

sion). Thu

s, make use of engine braking and

relieve the brakes.

●

Never let the brakes “drag” by applying

light pressure. Continuous braking will cause

the brakes to overheat and the braking dis-

tance will increase. Apply and then release

the brakes alternately.

●

Never let the vehicle run with the engine

switched off. The braking distance is in-

creased considerably when the brake servo is

not active.

●

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is

subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can

form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-

ficiency of the brakes.

●

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers

could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

cause them to overheat. Before purchasing

accessories please observe the relevant in-

structions ››› page 247, Technical modifica-

tions.

●

If a brake system circuit fails, the braking

distance will be increased considerably. Con-

tact a specialised workshop immediately and

avoid unnecessary journeys.

Control lamp

Situations in which the warning lamp lights

up *

●

the brake fluid level is too low

›

page 271.

181

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

ther

e i

a fault in the brake system.

This warning lamp can light up together with

the ABS system warning lamp.

WARNING

●

If the brak

e warning lamp does not go out

or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid

level in the reservoir is too low so there is a

risk of an accident ››› page 271, Brake fluid.

Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain

technical assistance.

●

If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-

gether with the ABS lamp  this could be

due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear

wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This

could cause the rear to break away. Risk of

skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

assistance.

Handbrake

Fig. 180 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly to

ent

the vehicle from accidentally rolling

away. Always apply the handbrake when you

leave your vehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake

–

Pull the handbrake lever up firmly

››› Fig. 180.

Releasing the handbrake

–

Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow

››› Fig. 180 and guide the handbrake lever

down fully ›››

ys pull the handbrake all the way up, so

there is less risk of driving off with it still en-

gaged ›››

The h

andbr

e warning lamp  lights up

when the handbrake is applied and the igni-

tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off

when the handbrake is released.

WARNING

●

Never use the h

andbrake to stop the vehi-

cle when it is in motion. The braking distance

is considerably longer, because braking is

only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-

dent!

●

If the handbrake is only partially released,

this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,

which can impair the function of the brake

system and could lead to an accident. This al-

so causes premature wear on the rear brake

pad

CAUTION

Always apply the handbrake before you leave

the

vehic

le. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehi-

cles with an automatic gearbox, place the

gear lever in position P.

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly ap-

lied when the

ehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-

ing the vehicle:

–

Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

Put it in 1st gear.

–

Switch the engine off and remove the key

from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel

slightly to engage the steering lock.

–

Always take you keys with you when you

leave the vehicle ›››

dition

l notes on parking the vehicle on

gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle

rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

182

Driving

●

the

ehicle is parked facing downhill,

turn the front wheels so that they point to-

wards the kerb.

●

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn

the front wheels so that they point away from

the kerb.

●

Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the

handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

WARNING

●

Take me

asures to reduce the risk of injury

when you leave your vehicle unattended.

●

Never park where the hot exhaust system

could ignite inflammable materials, such as

dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

●

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in

the vehicle when it is locked. They would be

unable to open the vehicle from the inside,

and could become trapped in the vehicle in

an emergency. In the event of an emergency,

locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle

occupants.

●

Never leave children alone in the vehicle.

They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-

ample, by releasing the handbrake or the

gearbox lever.

●

Depending on weather conditions, it may

become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-

cle. This can be fatal.

Braking and stability systems

ectr

onic

Stability Control (ESC)*

This Electronic Stability System reduces the

risk of

skidding and improves the vehicle's

stability and ability to hold the road.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains

the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the

traction control system (ASR). The ESC works

together with the ABS. Both control lamps

will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are

faulty.

The ESC system is started automatically

when the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannot

be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys-

tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR

or else select Sport mode.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin

is desirable

›››

page 184.

For example:

●

When driving with snow chains.

●

When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-

face

●

When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back-

wards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back on

when you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-

ing the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle

and road speed to calculate the changes of

direction desired by the driver, and constant-

ly compares them with the actual behaviour

of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for

example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the

ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-

cally.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring

the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the

vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end

slides out), the system will act on the front

wheel on the outside of the turn.

Control lamp

There are two control lamps for the electronic

stability control. The lamp  provides infor-

mation concerning function and  disconnec-

tion status.

Both control lamps light up together when

the ignition is switched on and should turn

off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the

time taken for the function check.

This programme includes the ABS, EDL and

ASR. It also includes emergency braking as-

sistance (BAS).

183

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

The control lamp  h

the following func-

tions:

●

It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC

is activated.

●

It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.

●

As the ESC operates in conjunction with the

ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault

should occur in the ABS.

If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays

on after the engine is started, this may mean

that the control system has temporarily

switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can

be reactivated by switching the ignition off

and then on again. If the control lamp goes

out, this means the system is fully functional.

The  lamp provides information about the

disconnection status of the system:

●

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected or

if you select ESC Sport mode, only by means

of Easy Connect.

WARNING

●

Do not for

get that the electronic stability

control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics.

Bear this in mind, particularly on slippery

and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit the

condition of the roads and the traffic situa-

tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC

should not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION

●

To ens

ure that the ESC works correctly, all

four wheels must be fitted with the same

tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of

the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-

gine power when this is not desired.

●

Any modifications made to the vehicle (for

example, to the engine, brake system, run-

ning gear or to the combination of wheels

and tyres) may affect the operation of the

ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driv-

en wheel

om spinning when the vehicle is

accelerating.

Description and operation of the traction

control system during acceleration (ASR)

The ASR system intervenes by reducing en-

gine power and preventing the driven wheels

from slipping during acceleration.

TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate

and climb a gradient in slippery conditions

where this may otherwise be difficult or even

impossible.

The ASR automatically switches on when the

engine is started. If necessary, it could be

switched on or off using the Easy Connect

system*.

When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights

up . The ASR should normally be left on.

Only in exceptional cases can it be discon-

nected, i.e. when you want the wheels to

slide; this done through the Easy Connect

system, by means of the



button and the

nction b

utton SETTINGS> ESC system,

for example:

●

With compact temporary spare wheel.

●

When using the snow chains.

●

When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-

rain.

●

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it

by “rocking it”.

The ASR should be switched on again as

soon as possible.

Control lamp

There are three control lamps for the traction

control system:  (for vehicles equipped

with M-ABS),  (for vehicles equipped with

ESC) and . Both control lamps light up to-

gether when the ignition is switched on and

should turn off after approximately 2 sec-

onds, which is the time taken for the function

check.

The  or  lamp has the following function:

●

It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-

hicle i

s moving.

184

Driving

If the system is deactivated or if it has any

lt, the w

arning lamp will remain lit. The

warning lamp will also light up if a fault

should occur in the ABS because the ASR op-

erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur-

ther information, see ››› page 185.

The  lamp provides information about the

disconnection status of the system:*

●

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected

via Easy Connect.

By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function

is reactivated and the warning lamp switched

off.

WARNING

●

Remember that

not even the ASR can defy

the laws of physics. Bear this in mind, partic-

ularly on slippery and wet roads and when

towing a trailer.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit the

condition of the roads and the traffic situa-

tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR

should not encourage you to run any risks.

CAUTION

●

To ens

ure that the ASR works correctly,

identical tyres should be fitted on all four

wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius

of the tyres can cause the system to reduce

engine power when this is not desired.

●

Any modific

ations made to the vehicle (for

example, to the engine, brake system, run-

ning gear or to the combination of wheels

and tyres) may affect the operation of the

ABS and ASR.

Connecting/disconnecting ESC and

ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically when

the engine is

started, and only works when

the engine is running and includes the ABS,

EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR and ESC function should only be

switched off in situations in which traction is

insufficient, among others:

●

When driving in deep snow or on surfaces

that ar

e not very firm.

●

To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR and ESC function back

on.

Depending on finishes and versions, it is

possible either to disconnect only the ASR or

else activate ESC Sport mode.

ESC in “Sport” mode

Sport mode can be connected via the Easy

Connect ››› page 123 system menu. The ESC

and the traction control system (ASR) have

only a limited ability to stabilise the vehicle.

The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles

with a driver information system*, the driver

will be shown the electronic stability

control (ESC) option: sport.

Warning! Limited stability.

Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu

››› page 123. The warning lamp  will switch

off. For vehicles with a driver information sys-

tem*, the driver will be shown the elec-

tronic stability control (ESC)

option: on.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used to

switch off the ASR ››› page 123. The traction

control system will be disabled.

The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles

with a driver information system* the driver

will be informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 123

is used to switch on the ASR. The traction

control system will be enabled.

The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles

with a driver information system* the driver

will be informed that ASR is enabled.

●

Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-

tion in the Easy

Connect system by means of

185

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

the





button and the

TINGS

and

System

function buttons.

WARNING

You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-

ly if the tr

affic conditions and your driving

ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid-

ding!

●

With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising

function will be limited to allow for a sportier

drive. The driving wheels could spin and the

vehicle could skid.

Note

If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport

mode is sel

ected, cruise control* will be

switched off.

Electronic differential lock (EDS)*

The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-

s equipped with Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC)*.

EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-

erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-

tions where this may otherwise be difficult or

even impossible.

It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed

of the driven wheels.

At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h

(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences

in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-

mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially

slippery road surface. It does this by braking

the wheel which has lost traction and distrib-

uting more driving force to the other driven

wheel via the differential.

To prevent the disc brake of the braking

wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-

tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.

The vehicle will continue to function normally

without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not

informed that the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically

when the brake has cooled down.

Control lamp

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the

ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

●

When accel

erating on a slippery surface,

for example on ice and snow, press the accel-

erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven

wheels may start to spin. This could impair

the vehicle's stability.

●

Always adapt your driving style to suit road

conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let

the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-

to taking any risks when driving, this can

cause accidents.

CAUTION

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-

gine, the brake sy

stem, running gear or any

components affecting the wheels and tyres)

could affect the efficiency of the EDL

››› page 247.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*

The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is

only inc

luded in vehicles with ESC.

In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,

but not with maximum force. This results in

unnecessarily long braking distances.

This is when the brake assist system comes

into action. When pressing the brake pedal

rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-

gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake

pressure so that the ABS can be activated

more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing

braking distance.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-

al, since the brake assist system switches off

automatically as soon as you release the

brake.

Automatic hazard warning lights activation

The brake lights flash automatically to indi-

cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in

an emergency situation. If the emergency

braking continues until the vehicle comes to

186

Driving

a standstill, the hazard warning lights will

then c

ome on and the br

e lights will re-

main on permanently from that moment. The

warning lights will automatically switch off

when the vehicle begins to move again or

when the "warning" light button is pressed.

WARNING

●

The risk of

accident is higher if you drive

too fast, if you do not keep your distance from

the vehicle in front, and when the road sur-

face is slippery or wet. The increased acci-

dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as-

sist system.

●

The brake assist system cannot defy the

laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are

dangerous even with the brake assist system!

Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your

speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.

Do not let the extra safety features tempt you

into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake System (ABS)

The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents

the wheel

om locking during braking and

is an important part of the vehicle's active

safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela-

tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to

locking, the system will reduce the braking

pressure to this wheel. The driver is made

aware of this control process by a pulsating

of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is

a deliberate warning to the driver that one or

more of the wheels is tending to lock and the

ABS control function has intervened. In this

situation it is important to keep the brake

pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-

late the brake application. Do not “pump”.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,

the best possible control is retained as the

wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee

shorter braking distances in all conditions.

Braking distance could even be further if you

brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip-

pery surface.

Control lamp

The control lamp  lights up for a few sec-

onds when the ignition is switched on. It

goes out again after the system has run

through an automatic test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

●

The control lamp  does not light up when

the ignition is switched on.

●

The control lamp does not go out again af-

ter a few seconds.

●

The control lamp lights up when the vehicle

is moving.

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal

way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop as soon as

possible.

If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the

tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together

with the brake warning lamp , there is a

fault in the ABS function and in the brake

system ›››

WARNING

●

The anti-lock br

ake system cannot defy the

laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are

dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that

the ABS is working (to counteract locked

wheels under braking), you should reduce

speed immediately to suit the road and traffic

conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-

tures tempt you into taking any risks when

driving.

●

The effectiveness of ABS is also determined

by the tyres fitted ››› page 274.

●

If the running gear or brake system is modi-

fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-

verely limited.

187

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

●

Befor

e opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings ››› page 263, Working in

the engine compartment.

●

If the brake system warning lamp  should

light up together with the ABS warning lamp

, stop the vehicle immediately and check

the brake fluid level in the reservoir

››› page 271, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid

level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you

must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain

technical assistance.

●

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in

the brake system may have been caused by a

failure of the ABS system. This could cause

the rear wheels to lock quickly when you

brake. This could cause the rear to break

away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and

seek technical assistance.

Electronic differential lock (XDS)*

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-

mec

hanism allows the outer wheel to turn

at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In

this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-

er wheel) receives less drive torque than the

inner wheel. This may mean that in certain

situations the torque delivered to the inner

wheel is too high, causing the wheels to

spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is

receiving a lower drive torque than it could

transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral

grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer

or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct this

effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside

wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the driver's

desired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination with

the ESC and is always active, even when ASR

traction control is disconnected or the ESC is

in Sport mode.

Multi-collision Brake

In an accident, the multi-collision brake can

help the driv

er b

braking to avoid the risk of

skidding during the accident, which could

lead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, side

or rear accidents, when the airbag control

unit records its activation level and the acci-

dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h

(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the

vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-

aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-

board network

The following actions control automatic brak-

ing during the accident:

●

When the driver presses the accelerator,

the automatic braking does not take place.

●

When the braking pressure through press-

ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-

tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake

automatically.

●

Multi-collision braking will not be available

if ESC is malfunctioning.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you

to the brake pedal. It works only when

the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due

to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being

towed, you will have to press the brake pedal

considerably harder to make up for the lack

of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by

extern

al factors.

●

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine

switched off. Failure to follow this instruction

could result in an accident. The braking dis-

tance is increased considerably when the

brake servo is not active.

●

If the brake servo is not working, for exam-

ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will

have to press the brake pedal considerably

harder than normal.

188

Driving

Hill driving assistant*

Fig. 181 Related video

This function is only included in vehicles with

ESC.

The hil

l driving assistant helps the driver to

move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-

cle is stationary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-

proximately two seconds after the driver

takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent

the vehicle from lurching backward when it is

started. During these 2 seconds, the driver

has enough time to release the clutch pedal

and accelerate without the vehicle moving

and without having to use the handbrake,

making start-up easier, more comfortable

and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

●

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

●

driver door closed,

●

vehicle completely stationary,

●

engine running and foot on the brake,

●

beside

s having a gear engaged or being in

neutral for manual gear change and with the

selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-

tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up-

hill.

WARNING

●

If y

ou do not start the vehicle immediately

after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the

vehicle may start to roll back under certain

conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use

the hand brake immediately.

●

If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-

al or use the hand brake immediately.

●

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you

want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back

accidentally when starting off, hold the brake

pedal down for a few seconds before starting

off.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist workshop

can tel

l you if your vehicle is equipped with

this system.

Manual gearbox

Driv

g w

ith a manual gearbox

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 50

Certain versions of the model may include a

6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is

shown on the gearbox lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when

the car is stationary. When the engine is run-

ning and before engaging this gear, wait

about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed

down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-

box.

The reverse lights switch on when the reverse

gear is selected and the ignition is on.

WARNING

●

When the engine is

running, the vehicle

will start to move as soon as a gear is engag-

ed and the clutch released.

●

Never select the reverse gear when the ve-

hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note

●

Do not re

st your hand on the gear lever

while driving. The pressure of your hand

could cause premature wear on the selector

forks in the gearbox.

189

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

When chan

ging gear, you should always

depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary

wear and damage.

●

Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle

on a hill. This causes premature wear and

damage to the clutch.

●

Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal;

although the pressure may seem insignifi-

cant, it can cause the premature wear of the

clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do

not need to change gear.

Automatic gearbox/DSG auto-

atic

earbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-

ontr

olled manual gearbox. Torque be-

tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-

mitted via two independent clutches. They re-

place the torque converter found on conven-

tional automatic gearboxes and allow for

smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-

hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver to

change gears manually if desired

››› page 192, Engaging gears with the trip-

tonic mode*.

Selector lever positions

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 50

The selector lever position engaged is high-

lighted on the display in the instrument clus-

ter. With the selector lever in the manual

gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged

gear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position,

the driven wheels are locked mechanically.

The parking lock must be engaged only when

the vehicle is stationary

›››

The int

erloc

button (the button on the selec-

tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-

multaneously the brake pedal must be de-

pressed before moving the selector lever ei-

ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when the

vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling

›››

o mo

e the selector lever to position R, the

interlock button must be pressed in and at

the same time the brake pedal must be de-

pressed. The reverse lights come on when

the selector lever is in the R position with the

ignition on.

N – Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, the

gear is in neutral.

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position

The selector lever in the D/S position enables

the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)

or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move

the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev-

er again will select normal mode (D). The se-

lected driving mode is shown on the instru-

ment panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-

ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends

on the engine load, the road speed and the

dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty

driving style. This setting makes use of the

engine's maximum power output. When ac-

celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selector

lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-

tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)

›››

Under c

ain circumstances (e.g. when driv-

ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to

switch temporarily to tiptronic mode

›››

page 192, in order to manually select gear

ratios to suit the driving conditions.

190

Driving

WARNING

●

Take c

are not to accidentally press the ac-

celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-

mediately (in some cases even if the parking

brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an

accident.

●

Never move the selector lever to R or P

when driving. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident.

●

With selector lever in any position (except

P) the vehicle must always be held with the

foot brake when the engine is running. This is

because an automatic gearbox still transmits

power even at idling speed, and the vehicle

tends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal must

on no account be pressed inadvertently when

a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary.

The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-

mediately (in some cases even if the parking

brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an

accident.

●

While you are selecting a gear and the vehi-

cle is stopped with the engine running, do

not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion could result in an accident.

●

As a driver you should never leave your ve-

hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-

gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while

the engine is running, you must apply the

handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).

●

To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake

and put the selector lever in position P before

opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-

cle with the engine running. Please always

obser

ve the important safety warnings

››› page 263, Working in the engine compart-

ment.

Note

●

the select

or lever is moved accidentally

to N when driving, release the accelerator and

let the engine speed drop to idling before se-

lecting gear range D or S again.

●

Should the power supply to the selector

lever be interrupted in position P, the selector

lever will be locked. If this should happen the

manual release can be used ›››



page 50.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 182 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears from

bein

g en

aged inadvertently, so that the ve-

hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

–

Switch the ignition on.

–

Press the brake pedal and, at the same

time, hold the lock button in the direction

of the arrow ››› Fig. 182.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selector

lever is locked in the positions P and N. The

brake pedal must be pressed to release the

lever while pressing the release button if the

selector lever is in the position P. As a re-

minder for the driver, with the lever in posi-

tions P or N the following message will be

shown on the display:

When stationary, apply footbrake

while selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-

tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h

(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph)

the lever lock is automatically deactivated in

position N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the

selector lever is moved quickly through posi-

tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This

makes it possible, for instance, to rock the

vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is

stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto-

matically if the brake pedal is not depressed

and the lever is in position N for more than

about two seconds.

191

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Interlock button

The int

erloc

button on the selector lever

handle prevents the driver from inadvertently

engaging certain gears. Press the button in

to disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, the

key may be removed only if the gear selector

is in position P. While the key is not in the ig-

nition, the selector lever is locked in position

Note

●

If the select

or lever lock does not engage,

there is a fault. The transmission is interrup-

ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally

moving. Follow the procedure below in order

for the selector lever lock to engage again:

–

With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake

pedal and release it again.

–

With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake

pedal. Move the selector lever to posi-

tion P or N and subsequently engage a

gear.

●

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle

does not move forwards or back. Proceed to

the next mode:

–

When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not

have the gear range correctly engaged.

Press the brake pedal and engage the

gear range again.

–

If the v

ehicle still does not move in the

required direction, there is a system mal-

function. Seek specialist assistance and

have the system checked.

Engaging gears with the triptonic

mode*

Fig. 183 Centre console: changing gear with

tiptr

onic

Fig. 184 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox

lever

The tiptronic gives the driver the option to

ge gears manually.

Changing gear manually with the selector

lever

It is possible to change to tiptronic mode,

both when the vehicle is stopped and while

driving.

–

To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-

lector lever from position D/S to the right.

As soon as the change is made the selector

level will be shown in the position M on the

instrument panel display (for example M4

means that the fourth gear is engaged).

–

Move the selector lever forwards

to se-

ect

a higher g

ear ››› Fig. 183.

–

Move the selector lever backwards

–

sel

ect

a lo

wer gear.

192

Driving

Changing gear manually with the gearshift

dles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when the

selector lever is in the position D/S or M.

–

Press the gearshift paddle

to select a

higher g

ar ›

›› Fig. 184.

–

Press the gearshift paddle

–

to select a

er g

ear.

–

With the selector lever in position D/S, if no

paddle is operated during a short period of

time, the gearbox control system switches

back to automatic mode. To switch to per-

manent manual gear change using the

gearshift paddles, move the selector lever

from position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-

ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before

the maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear-

box will not shift down until there is no risk of

over-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, the

gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-

ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-

the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector

lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,

below -10°C (14°F), the engine can only start

with the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle

–

Press and hold the brake pedal.

–

Press and hold the interlock button (the

button on the selector lever handle), move

the selector lever to the desired position,

for instance D ››› page 190, and release the

interlock button.

–

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a

slight movement can be felt).

–

Release the brake and press the accelerator

›››

g briefly

–

Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle

briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-

fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selector

lever is not in position P, the vehicle could

move. The driver message will be:  Gear

change: selector lever in the

drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer

will sound.

–

Press and hold the brake pedal ›››

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

e the sel

ector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill

–

Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle “from moving backwards”;

if necessary, apply the handbrake ›››

. Do

not tr

o stop the vehicle “rolling back” by

increasing the engine speed (pressing the

accelerator) when a gear is engaged ›››

tin

g off uphill

–

Apply the handbrake.

–

Once you have engaged a gear press the

accelerator carefully and disengage the

handbrake.

Driving down hills: in some situations (on

mountain roads or when towing a trailer or

caravan) it can be advantageous to switch

temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-

gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-

ted manually to suit the driving conditions

›››

On l

ground it is sufficient to move the

selector lever to position P. On slopes, first

engage the parking brake and then put the

selection lever into the P position. This

avoids overloading the locking mechanism

and it will be easier to move the selector lev-

er from position P.

193

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Selector

lever po

sitions on page 191.

●

Never allow the brake to rub and do not use

the brake pedal too often or for long periods.

Constant braking causes overheating in the

brakes. This could significantly reduce brak-

ing power, increase braking distance or even

result in the total failure of the brake system.

●

To avoid rolling back on gradients always

hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand-

brake if you have to stop.

CAUTION

●

If y

ou stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not

attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing

the accelerator when a gear has been selec-

ted. This could cause overheating and dam-

age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand-

brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order

to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

●

If you allow the car to roll with the selector

lever in position N with the engine switched

off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged

as it will not be lubricated.

●

In certain driving situations or traffic condi-

tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged

“creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with

continuous stoppages, the gearbox could

overheat causing damage! If the warning

lamp 

lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as

possible and wait for the gearbox to cool

››› page 196.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

celer

ation to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

down past the point of resistance at full throt-

tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower

gear, depending on road speed and engine

speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is

delayed until the engine reaches maximum

rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or w

et, the kick-down feature could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which could

result in skidding.

Launch control program

3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed

DSG w

ith diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-

rol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables maxi-

mum acceleration.

Important: the engine must have reached op-

erating temperature and the steering wheel

must not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-

ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the

launch-control you must disconnect the anti-

slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-

nect system menu

›››

page 123. The warning

lamp  will stay switched on or will flash

slowly depending on whether or not the vehi-

cle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-

tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and

the corresponding text message Stability

control deactivated (temporary) ap-

pears on the instrument panel to indicate the

deactivation status.

–

When the engine is running, switch off the

traction contr

ol (ASR)

Vehicles without driver information system: the

warning l

amp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-

formation system: the warning lamp stays on.

194

Driving

–

urn the sel

ect

or lever to the position “S”

or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv-

ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*

››› page 225.

–

Press the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and hold it down for at least one sec-

ond.

–

With your right foot, press the accelerator

down to the full throttle or kick-down posi-

tion. The engine speed will stabilise at

about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about

2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

–

Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

●

Alwa

ys adapt your driving style to the traf-

fic conditions.

●

Only use the launch control programme

when road and traffic conditions permit, and

make sure your manner of driving and accel-

erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or

endanger other road users.

●

Make sure that the ESC remains switched

on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC

are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin,

causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci-

dent!

●

After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode

should be deactivated by briefly pressing the

  button.

Note

●

After u

sing the Launch control programme,

the temperature in the gearbox may have in-

creased considerably. In this case, the pro-

gramme could be disabled for several mi-

nutes. The programme can be used again af-

ter the cooling phase.

●

Accelerating with the Launch control pro-

gramme places a heavy load on all parts of

the vehicle. This can result in increased wear

and tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helps

the driv

er when driv

g down steep gradi-

ents.

Downhill speed control is activated when the

selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies

the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-

matically engages a lower gear that is suita-

ble for the slope. The downhill speed control

function attempts to maintain the speed at

which the vehicle was travelling when the

foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of

physics and technical drive limitations). It

may be necessary to adjust the speed again

using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-

en that the downhill speed control can only

change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-

scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In

this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to

2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and

reduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as

soon as the road levels out again or you

press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*

››› page 207, downhill speed control is acti-

vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy the

law

s of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be

maintained constant in all situations. Always

be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy

the

ehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-

tain stretches to be driven without using the

accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.

Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”

before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Important: selector lever must be in position

D, gradients below 12 %.

–

Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode

›››

page 225.

–

Take your foot off the accelerator.

195

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

The driver message Inertia w

l be dis-

played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12

mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-

gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without

the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-

cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

–

Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switch

off the engine again, simply press the brake

pedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged

section with less energy) and the switching

off using inertia (= shorter section without

the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel

consumption and emission balance.

WARNING

●

If the inerti

a mode has been switched on,

take into account, when approaching an ob-

stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal,

that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu-

al manner: risk of accident!

●

When using inertia mode while travelling

down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:

risk of accident!

●

If other users drive your vehicle, warn them

about inertia mode.

Note

●

Inertia mode i

s only available in eco (SEAT

Drive Profile*) driving mode.

●

The driver message Inertia is only dis-

played with the current consumption. In iner-

tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed

(for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).

●

On downhill sections with gradients above

15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be

switched off temporarily.

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a fault

shou

d oc

cur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever are

shown over a light background on the instru-

ment panel display, there is a system fault

and the automatic gearbox will operate in

with the backup programme. When the back-

up programme is activated, it is possible to

drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and

within a selected range of gears. In some ca-

ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-

ble.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-

gramme, tak

e the vehicle to a specialised

workshop and have the fault repaired without

delay.

Clutch



Clutch overheating! Please

stop!

The c

lut

ch has overheated and could be dam-

aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-

box to cool with the engine at idling speed

and the selector lever in position P. When the

warning lamp and the driver message switch

off, have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay. If the warning lamp

and the driver message do not switch off, do

not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

Gearbox malfunctions

 Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-

hicle and place the lever in the

position P.

There is

a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-

ing. Seek specialist assistance.

 Gearbox: System fault! You

may continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You

can continue driving with re-

strictions. Reverse gear disa‐

bled

196

Driving

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

and h

e the f

ault repaired without delay.

 Gearbox: System fault! You

can continue driving in D until

switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away

from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-

tance.

 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your

driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When

the warning lamp switches off, you can con-

tinue driving in a normal manner.

 Gearbox: press the brake and

engage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a

high temperature, this driver message will be

displayed when the gearbox has cooled

again.

Gear-change indicator

Selecting the optimal gear

While driving, and depending on vehicle

equipment, the in

trument

panel display may

show a recommendation with the gear num-

ber that would be advisable to save fuel.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the

selector lever must be in the tiptronic posi-

tion ››› page 192.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-

mal gear is already engaged. The current

gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning



The optimal gear is selected.

  

Changing to a higher gear is recom-

mended.

  

Changing to a lower gear is recom-

mended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of

the die

sel

articulate filter

The exhaust system manager detects that the

diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated

and contributes to self-cleaning by recom-

mending the optimal gear. For this reason, it

might be necessary to drive for a short time

at a high rpm.

WARNING

The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary

function and in no c

ase should be a substi-

tute for careful driving.

●

The responsibility of choosing the correct

gear depending on the situation (e.g. over-

taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a

trailer) lies with the driver.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the correct gear can help to save

fuel.

Note

The recommended gear indication turns off

when the clutc

h pedal is pressed in vehicles

with manual gearbox or when the selector

lever is removed from the tiptronic position in

vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

Steering

Intr

oduction

The power steering is not hydraulic but elec-

omec

anical. The advantage of this steer-

ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic

pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other

parts. The electromechanical system saves

fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con-

tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical

steering only needs power when it is used.

In vehicles with electromechanical steering,

the assisted steering function automatically

adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering

wheel torque and wheel orientation. The

power steering only works when the engine

is running.

197

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

If the power steering does not work, you will

need much more s

trength to turn the wheel.

This has a considerable effect on vehicle

safety.

●

The power steering only works when the

engine is running.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move when the

engine is switched off.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition

while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock

could be engaged and vehicle steering would

not work.

Note

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must

be switc

hed on to prevent the steering wheel

from locking and also to allow the use of the

turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and

washers.

Control lamp

The control lamp should light up for a few

sec

ond

when the ignition is switched on. It

should go out once the engine is started.



It lights up red

The electromechani-

cal steering is dam-

aged.

Have the steering checked im-

mediately by a specialised work-

shop.



It lights up yellow

Electromechanical

steering operation

is limited.

See a specialised workshop im-

mediately and have the steering

checked.

If the yellow warning lamp does

not light up again after the en-

gine is restarted and the vehicle

has travelled a short distance,

you do not need to take it to a

specialised workshop.

The 12-volt battery

was disconnected

and has been recon-

nected.

Take the vehicle for a short run

at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).



It flashes yellow

The steering column

is tight.

Turn the wheel a little to both

sides.

The steering column

does not unlock or

lock.

Remove the key from the ignition

and switch the ignition back on.

If necessary, check the messag-

es displayed on the instrument

panel display.

Do not drive on if the steering

column remains locked after the

ignition has been switched on.

Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the corresponding

mess

ages are ignored when they light up, the

vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the w

arning lamps or messag-

es.

●

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity

and in a safe place.

Note

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-

ponding t

ext messages when they light up

may result in damage to the vehicle.

Information relating to different vehi-

e pr

ocesses.

In order to make the vehicle more difficult to

al, you should always lock the steering be-

fore leaving the vehicle.

Mechanical steering lock

The steering column is locked when the key

is removed from the ignition lock and the ve-

hicle is stationary.

Activating the steering lock

●

Park the vehicle ››› page 181.

●

Remove the ignition key.

●

Turn the steering wheel slightly until the

steering lock has engaged.

198

Driving

Deactivating the steering lock

●

Turn the steering wheel slightly to release

the loc

●

ser

t the key in the ignition lock.

●

Hold the steering wheel in this position

and switch on the ignition.

Electromechanical steering

In vehicles with electromechanical steering,

the assisted steering function automatically

adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering

wheel torque and wheel orientation. The

power steering only works when the engine

is running.

You should take into account that you will

need considerably more power than normal

to steer the vehicle if the power steering is

not working correctly or at all.

Power-assisted steering

Power-assisted steering helps the driver in

critical situations. In counter-steering, it as-

sists by applying additional torque ›››

WARNING

Power-assisted steering, together with the

ESC, helps

the driver to control vehicle steer-

ing in critical situations. However, the driver

is ultimately responsible for steering the ve-

hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering

does not remove this responsibility.

Run-in and economical driving

nnin

g in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first

1500 km (900 mile

s).

For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles)

–

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3

the maximum speed.

–

Do not accelerate hard.

–

Avoid high engine revolutions.

–

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1,000 ki

lometres (600 miles) to 1,500

kilometres (900 miles)

–

Speeds can be gradually increased to the

maximum road speed or maximum permis-

sible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the in-

ternal friction in the engine is greater than

later on, when all the moving parts have bed-

ded in.

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in-

cre

ased and its oil consumption reduced.

Running in tyres and brake pads

New tyres should be run in carefully for the

first

500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads

should be run in carefully for the first 200 km

(125 miles).

During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have

to compensate for the reduced braking effect

by applying more pressure to the brake ped-

al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking

distance will be longer with new brake pads

than with brake pads which have been run-

in.

WARNING

●

At firs

t, new tyres do not give maximum

grip, and require running-in. This may cause

an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the

first 500 km (300 miles).

●

New brake pads must be “run in” and do

not have the correct friction properties during

the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the re-

duced braking capacity may be compensated

by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the de

ign, c

hoice of materials and manufac-

ture of your new SEAT.

199

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Constructive measures to encourage recy-

lin

●

Joints

and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

●

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, includ-

ing odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-

valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during ve-

hicle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally-

friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution

and w

ar t

o the engine, brakes and tyres de-

pends in large part on your driving style. By

adopting an economical driving style and an-

ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can

easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-

tion while saving money are listed below.

Active cylinder management (ACT

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active

cylinder management (ACT

) may automati-

cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders

if the driving situation does not require too

much power. When it is switched off, no fuel

is injected into these cylinders, hence total

fuel consumption may be reduced. The num-

ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-

strument panel display. ›››



page 38.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.

When you anticipate situations, you have to

brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If

it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear

engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ahead. The braking effect achieved in this

way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and

tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are

reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-

tia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to change

up quickly through the gears. Running the

engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses

an unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second

gear as soon as possible. We recommend

that, whenever possible, you change to a

higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow

the “recommended gear” indication that ap-

pears on the instrument panel ››› page 197.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed

permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,

200

Driving

exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-

ase very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving

at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine

when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-

ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.

The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is

greater than the amount of fuel needed to re-

start the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-

tant emissions are also especially high dur-

ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore

best to drive off immediately after starting

the engine. Avoid running the engine at high

speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,

before beginning a journey, you will not con-

sume more than the required amount of fuel.

A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit

of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-

mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-

ue.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to

10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of

polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the

exhaust gas filtration systems should reach

the optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is

proportionally higher. The engine does not

warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-

malise until having driven approximately four

kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-

mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-

ble.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-

equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-

sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too

low, fuel consumption can increase by as

much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-

ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear

wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked

when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they

increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-

crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable

to always check the luggage compartment to

make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-

ing transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake

of convenience, even when it is no longer

needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)

and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use

about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra

wind resistance caused by the roof rack even

when it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, which

produces electricity. With the need for elec-

tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-

cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-

ces when you do not need them. Examples of

devices that use a lot of electricity are: the

blower at high speeds, the rear window heat-

ing or the seat heaters*.

Note

●

If y

our vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-

ommended that you switch this function off.

●

It is recommended that you close the win-

dows when driving at more than 60 km/h

(37 mph).

●

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the

plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can

burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious

fault.

●

Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch,

use the foot brake or hand brake, using the

latter to start. The fuel consumption will be

201

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

lower and you will prevent the clutch plate

from being d

amaged.

●

On descents, use the engine brake, chang-

ing to the gear that is more suitable for the

slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and

the brakes will not suffer.

Engine management and emis-

sion contr

ol system

Introduction

WARNING

●

Becau

se of the high temperatures which

can occur in the exhaust purification system

(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-

ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-

haust can come into contact with flammable

materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at

the forest edge). Fire hazard!

●

Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle

around the area of the exhaust system: Fire

hazard!

Note

While the control lamps , ,  or  or

remain lit, ther

e may be engine problems,

fuel consumption may increase and the en-

gine may lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic

conv

erter

–

Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-

gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-

verter.

–

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

–

For engine oil changes, do not replenish

with too much engine oil ››› page 268, Top-

ping up engine oil.

–

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump

lea

ds if necessary

›››



page 71.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or

loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re-

duce speed immediately and have the vehi-

cle inspected at the nearest specialised

workshop. In general, the exhaust warning

lamp will light up when any of the described

symptoms occur

›››

page 122. If this hap-

pens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust sys-

tem and escape into the environment. The

catalytic converter can also be damaged by

overheating.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-

cause the irr

egularity of the fuel supply may

cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt

fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could

cause overheating and damage the catalytic

converter.

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

workin

g perfectly, there may be a smell of

sulphur from the exhaust gas under some

conditions. This depends on the sulphur con-

tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem

can be solved by changing to another brand

of fuel.

Diesel particulate filter

3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine

The die

sel engine particulate filter eliminates

most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-

tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-

ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is

cleaned automatically without need for indi-

cation by the warning lamp . This may be

noticed because the engine idle speed in-

creases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-

ried out (because only short trips are taken,

for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-

ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning

lamp will  switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-

ess by driving in the following manner: drive

for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum

speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear

(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-

gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The

rise in temperature causes the soot on the

202

Driving

filter to burn. On completion of the cleaning

the w

arnin

g l

amp will switch off. If the warn-

ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately

to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob-

lem.

Engine management* 

This warning lamp monitors the engine man-

agement sy

stem for petrol engines.

The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con-

trol) lights up when the ignition is switched

on while system operation is being verified. It

should go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic engine

management system while you are driving,

this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop as soon as

possible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system* 

Control lamp  fl

she

When there is misfiring that can damage the

catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive

carefully to the nearest specialised workshop

to have the engine checked.

The control lamp  lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving which

has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas

(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and

drive carefully to the nearest specialised

workshop to have the engine checked.

Engine pre-heating/fault system* 

The warning lamp lights up to show that the

glow plug

s are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp  lights up

If the control lamp  lights up when the en-

gine is started it means that the glow plugs

are preheating. The engine can be started

straight away when the lamp switches off.

Control lamp  flashes

If a fault develops in the engine management

system while you are driving, the glow plug

system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to

a specialised workshop as soon as possible

and have the engine checked.

Driving tips

Driving abr

oad

To drive abroad, the following must be taken

into con

sideration:

●

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter

ensure that unleaded petrol is available for

the journey. See chapter ››› page 258, Fuel.

Automobile organisations will have informa-

tion about service station networks selling

unleaded fuel.

●

In some countries, it is possible that your

car model i

s not sold, and therefore some

spare parts are not available or the technical

services may only be able to carry out limited

repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly

provide information about the technical prep-

aration that your vehicle requires and also

about necessary maintenance and repair

possibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights

In countries where vehicles drive on the other

side of the road to your home country, the

asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers

of oncoming vehicles.

203

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers

o c

tain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-

ther information is available at any Technical

Service.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-

ing through w

ater, for example, along a floo-

ded road, please observe the following:

●

The water should never come above the

lower edg

e of the bodywork.

●

Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge,

etc., the br

aking effect can be delayed slight-

ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and

brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully

several times will remove the moisture and

restore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

●

Driving thr

ough flooded areas may severely

damage vehicle components such as the en-

gine, transmission, running gear or electrical

system.

●

Whenever driving through water, the Start-

Stop system* must be switched off

››› page 204.

Note

●

Check the depth of

the water before enter-

ing the flooded zone.

●

Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or

stop the engine in any situation.

●

Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite

direction may splash water that could exceed

the maximum permitted water height for your

vehicle.

●

Avoid driving through salt water (corro-

sion).

Driver assistance systems

-Stop System*

Related video

Fig. 185 Convenience

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-

duc

e C

emi

ssions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-

cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is

stopping; for example when stopping at traf-

fic lights. The ignition remains switched on

during the stopping phase. The engine auto-

matically switches back on when required. In

204

Driver assistance systems

this situation, the light of the

T ENGINE STOP

button stays on

soon a

the ignition is switched on, the

Start-Stop function is automatically activa-

ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-

tem can be found in the Easy Connect

system: by pressing the



button in the

Vehicle status menu.

ic requirements for the Start-Stop mode

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The driver must have their seat belt fas-

tened.

●

The bonnet must be closed.

●

The engine must have reached a minimum

service temperature.

●

The reverse gear must not be engaged.

●

The vehicle must not be on a very steep

slope.

WARNING

●

Never swit

ch the engine off until the vehi-

cle is stationary. The brake servo and power

steering functions will not be completely cov-

ered under warranty. More force may also be

needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake.

As you cannot steer and brake in the normal

manner, there is a greater risk of accidents

and serious injur

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-

ing could lock making it impossible to steer

the vehicle.

●

To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-

Stop system is switched off when working in

the engine compartment ››› page 207.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always be

itc

hed off when driving through flooded

areas ››› page 207.

Stopping/Starting the engine

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

–

Before stopping the vehicle or when it is

ped, put it into neutral and release the

clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The

warning lamp  will appear on the instru-

ment panel display. The engine may stop

before the vehicle comes to a halt in the

deceleration phase (at 7 km/h).

–

When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-

gine will start up again. The warning lamp

will switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

–

Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a

stop and keep the brake pedal pressed

down with your foot. The engine will switch

off. The warning lamp  will appear in the

display. The engine may stop before the ve-

hicle comes to a halt in the deceleration

phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on

the vehicle’s gearbox).

–

When you take your foot off the brake pedal

the engine will start up again. The warning

lamp will switch off.

Additional information related to the auto-

matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in

the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to

when in manual mode. With the selector lev-

er in position P, the engine will also remain

switched off when you take your foot off the

brake pedal. In order to start the engine up

again the accelerator must be pressed, or an-

other gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position R

during the stopping phase, the engine will

start up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent the

engine from accidentally starting when

changing and passing by position R.

Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

205

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Additional information about vehicles with

aptiv

e C

ruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will

start up again in certain operating conditions

if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle

ahead drives off again.

Note

●

In vehic

les with an automatic gearbox, you

can control whether the engine should switch

off or not by reducing or increasing the brake

force applied. While the vehicle remains stop-

ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped-

al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre-

quent stopping and starting for example. As

soon as strong pressure is applied to the

brake pedal, the engine will stop.

●

In vehicles with manual gearbox, during

the stopping phases the brake pedal must re-

main depressed to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

●

If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man-

ual gearbox, it can be directly started up

again by immediately pressing the clutch

pedal.

General notes

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode

equently

or different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system veri-

fies whether certain conditions are met. The

engine does not switch off, in the following

situations for example:

●

The engine has not yet reached the mini-

mum required temperature for the Start-Stop

mode.

●

The interior temperature selected for the air

conditioner has not yet been reached.

●

The interior temperature is very high/low.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 51.

●

The parking aid* is switched on.

●

The battery is very low.

●

The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-

ing turned.

●

If there is a danger of misting.

●

After engaging reverse gear.

●

In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication  is shown on the instrument

panel display, and in addition, the driver in-

formation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start-

Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-

ing situations: The engine restarts by itself

without involvement from the driver.

●

The interior temperature differs from the

value selected on the air conditioner.

●

Defrost function button activated

›››



page 51.

●

The brake has been pressed several times

consecutively.

●

The battery is too low.

●

High power consumption.

Note

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the

selector l

ever is placed in position D, N or S

after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must

be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6

mph) for the system to return to conditions in

which the engine can be stopped.

206

Driver assistance systems

Manually switching on/off the Start-

op sy

tem

Fig. 186 Centre console: Start-Stop system

utt

on.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can

h it off manually.

●

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop

system, press the  button ››› Fig. 186.

The symbol on the  button remains lit up

yellow when the system is switched off, and

the following message is displayed on the

dash panel:

Start-Stop system deactivated

Note

The system is automatically switched on each

time the engine is

deliberately stopped dur-

ing a stopping phase. The engine will start

automatically.

Driver messages on the instrument

anel

splay

Start-Stop system deactivated.

Start the engine manually

This driv

er message is displayed when cer-

tain conditions are not met during the stop-

ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot

restart the engine. The engine must be star-

ted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-

tion not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take

the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault

repaired.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

How it w

orks

Fig. 187 Instrument panel display: CCS status

indic

ation

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 45

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to

maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15

mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-

ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the

vehicle ›››

207

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Control lamp



Lights up

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and ac-

tive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switch-

ed on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a few sec

onds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

Displayed on the CCS screen

Status Fig. 187:

CCS temporarily switched off. The set

speed is displayed in small or darkened

figures.

System error. Contact a specialised work-

shop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is

empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is

displayed in large figures.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-

dents and sev

ere injuries if it is not possible

to drive at a constant speed maintaining the

safety

distance.

●

Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-

fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is

insufficient, on steep roads, with several

bends or in slippery circumstances (snow,

ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road or

on unpaved roads.

●

Always adapt your speed and the distance

to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,

weather conditions, the condition of the road

and the traffic situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise

control system, turn it off every time you fin-

ish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for the prevailing road, traffic or

weather conditions.

●

When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends

to accelerate under its own weight. Select a

lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the

vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

Operating the cruise control system*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 45

The value indicated in the table in brackets

(in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-

ment panels with indications in miles.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch

pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-

cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle

down using the brake pedal and reduce

gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched

off automatically or temporarily:

●

If the system detects a fault that could af-

fect the w

orking order of the CCS.

●

If you press and maintain the accelerator

pedal for a certain time, driving faster than

the stored speed.

●

If the dynamic driving control systems in-

tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

●

If the brake pedal is pressed.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

208

Driver assistance systems

●

the g

ar lever of the DSG

dual clutch

gearbox is removed from the D/S position.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limiter

to prev

ent the speed being regulated against

your wishes.

●

The speed limiter does not relieve the driv-

er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-

priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not

necessary.

●

Using the speed limiter with adverse

weather conditions is dangerous and can

cause serious accidents, e.g. because of

aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You

should use the speed limiter function only

when traffic, road and weather conditions al-

low it to be used safely.

●

When driving downhill, the speed limiter

cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will

increase due to its own weight. In this case,

select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

Speed limiter

lay messages and warning and

control lamp

Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display:

ages on the status of the speed limiter.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a

peed indiv

idual

ly programmed upwards of

approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in

forwards gears ›››

Display messages on the speed limiter

s ››› Fig. 188:

The speed limiter is active. The last

speed set is displayed in large figures.

The speed limiter is not active. The last

speed set is displayed in small or dark-

ened figures.

The speed limiter is switched off. The to-

tal mileage is displayed.

Warning and control lamp



Lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.



Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded.



Lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter

are active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly

when the ignition i

switched on to

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limiter

to prev

ent the speed being regulated against

your wishes.

●

The speed limiter does not relieve the driv-

er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-

priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not

necessary.

●

Using the speed limiter with adverse

weather conditions is dangerous and can

cause serious accidents, e.g. because of

aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You

should use the speed limiter function only

when traffic, road and weather conditions al-

low it to be used safely.

209

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

When driving do

wnhill, the speed limiter

cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will

increase due to its own weight. In this case,

select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›

››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

Note

●

Different

versions of the instrument panel

are available and therefore the versions and

instructions on the display may vary.

●

If when switching the ignition off, the

cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive

cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter were

switched on, then the cruise control system

or the adaptive cruise control will automati-

cal

ly switch themselves on when the ignition

is back on. However, no speed will be stored.

The last set speed of the speed limiter will be

stored.

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 189 On the left of the steering column:

contro

l and buttons to operate the speed lim-

iter.

Fig. 190 On the left of the steering column:

third lev

er for operating the speed limiter.

Function

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 189

or the third lever ››› Fig. 190

Effect

Switching on the speed limiter

Move controller

to position



and press button

of the turn signal

lever or move the third lever forward and press button

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim-

iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

210

Driver assistance systems

Function

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 189

or the third lever ››› Fig. 190

Effect

Switching between the speed limiter and

cruise control (CCS) or the adaptive cruise

control (ACC) (with the speed limiter

switched on)

Press button

on the turn signal lever or button

on the third lever

It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the

adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press button

on the turn signal lever or button



on the third lever.

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and the

limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed limit-

er limitation

Place control

of the turn signal lever in position



or move the third

lever into position



The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter

limitation pressing down the accelerator

(kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over-

take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be

stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return-

ing to less than the set speed.

Switching the speed limiter on again

Press button

on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi-

tion



The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed

you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or move

the third lever into position



to increase the speed in small incre-

ments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value

Press



on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button

on the turn signal lever in the area



or hold

down



to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)

and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or press



on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h

(1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set value

Press



on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of

10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button

on the turn signal lever in the



area or hold

down



to reduce the speed continuously in increments of 10 km/h

(5 mph) and set it.

211

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Function

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 189

or the third lever ››› Fig. 190

Effect

Switching off the speed limiter

Move control

of the turn signal lever into position



or the third lever

into position



The system switches off

The values shown in the table in brackets, in

mph, are dis

played only in instrument panels

with indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiter

If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-

ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

the warning and control lamps 

››› page 209 flash and an acoustic warning

may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-

er gear.

Switching off temporarily

If you wish to temporarily switch off the

speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control

››› Fig. 189

of the turn signal lever into po-

sition 

or the third lever into pressure

point  or press button

on any lever.

After o

vertaking, the speed limiter can be

switched on with the previously set speed by

pressing button

on the turn signal lever in

the area

 or by moving the third lever in-

to pressure point.

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by

pressing down the accelerator (kick-down)

If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-

down) and the set speed is exceeded be-

cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is

temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic

signal sound once. While the limiter is off,

the warning and control lamp  flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer pressed

down and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con-

trol lamp  will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off

The speed limiter is automatically switched

off:

●

If the system detects a fault that could neg-

atively affect the working order of the limiter.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION

For automatic switching off due to system

failur

es, for security reasons, the limiter is

only completely switched off when the driver

stops pressing the accelerator at some point

or c

ciously switches off the system.

Emergency brake assist system

(Fr

ont

sist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 191 On the instrument panel display:

pre-warnin

g messages.

The objective of the emergency brake assist

syst

em is to prevent head-on collisions

against objects that may be in the vehicle’s

path or minimise the consequences of such

impacts.

212

Driver assistance systems

Within the limitations imposed by the envi-

onment

conditions and by the system it-

self, the function acts in staggered fashion,

depending on how critical the situation is. In-

itially it warns the driver, and if the driver’s

reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it

activates an independent emergency brak-

ing.

The function is intended to prevent collisions

with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same

lane travelling in the same direction, or with

pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It

may fail to activate in other danger situa-

tions.

The Front Assist function is active within a

range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)

and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on

speed, traffic conditions and driver behav-

iour, some of the sub-functions described be-

low are omitted in order to optimise the sys-

tem’s general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance func-

tion that can never replace the driver’s atten-

tion.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects a situation of danger

because the vehicle is too close to the vehi-

cle ahead, it will warn the driver by means of

an indication on the instrument panel display

.

The timing of the warning varies depending

on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with

the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by

means of an audible warning and an indica-

tion on the instrument panel display

››› Fig. 191.

The warning moment varies depending on

the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At

the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a

possible emergency braking ›››

ritic

l warning

If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning

(advance warning), the system may actively

intervene in the brakes and generate a brief

jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger

of a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical

warning, the system may initiate independ-

ent emergency braking by progressively in-

creasing the braking effect in accordance

with how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assist system

Faced with an imminent collision, the system

may detect that the driver is not braking hard

enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it

will automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and the

limitations of its operation, there are some

cases in which the system cannot prevent a

collision, although it can significantly mini-

mise the consequences by reducing the

speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

WARNING

The Front Assist system cannot change the

law

s of physics or replace the driver in terms

of keeping control of the vehicle and reacting

to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warning,

pay

immediate attention to the situation and

try to avoid the collision by braking or by

dodging the obstacle, as applicable.

●

If the Front Assist does not work as descri-

bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter-

venes unnecessarily), switch it off.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the

vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-

bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

●

The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-

dents and serious injuries.

213

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

In compl

ex driving situations, occasionally

the Front Assist may issue warnings and in-

tervene in braking unnecessarily, for example

at traffic islands.

●

If the operation of the Front Assist is im-

paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-

dar sensor has lost its settings, the system

may issue unnecessary warnings and inter-

vene inopportunely in the braking.

●

The Front Assist does not react to animals

or vehicles crossing your path or approaching

head-on down the same lane.

●

The Front Assist does not react to pedes-

trians walking in the same direction or ap-

proaching head-on down the same lane.

●

The driver must always be ready to take

over the control of the vehicle.

●

When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic interventions by the Front Assist

on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing

the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

Note

●

When the Front As

sist is connected, the in-

dications on the instrument panel screen may

be concealed by warnings from other func-

tions, such as an incoming call.

●

When the Front Assist causes a braking,

the brake pedal is “harder”.

●

Automatic

interventions by the Front Assist

on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing

the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

●

The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until

it stops completely. However, the brake sys-

tem does not halt the vehicle permanently.

Use the foot brake!

●

If the Front Assist does not work as descri-

bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several

times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the

system checked by a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

Radar sensor

Fig. 192 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-

er t

o det

ermine the tr

affic situation

››› Fig. 192

The r

ar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the

Front Assist does not work. The instrument

panel displays the following message:

Front Assist: No sensor vision! If

necessary clean the radar sensor ›››

When the r

ar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the Front Assist will automati-

cally be available again. The message will

disappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by a

strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-

cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails

on the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-

sor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example if the suspension is low-

ered, Front Assist operation may be affected.

SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership

for this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-

sor is d

amaged or has lost its settings, dis-

connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-

sible dangerous situations caused by a sys-

tem malfunction. If this occurs have it adjus-

ted.

214

Driver assistance systems

●

The sensor ma

y become damaged or lose

its settings when knocked, for example, dur-

ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-

mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require special-

ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-

pose.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front that is larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause the radar to mal-

function.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and the

ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer

spray.

Operating the Emergency braking as-

tance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 193 On the instrument panel display:

ont

sist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-

tion i

itched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too

are the advance warning function (pre warn-

ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-

ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 216,

Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in

the following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front As-

sist can be switched on and off as follows:

●

Select the corresponding menu option us-

ing the button for the driver assistance sys-

tems ›››



page 37.

●

OR: switch the system on and off in Easy

Connect using the



button and the

TINGS

and

Driv

er a

sistance

function but-

›››



page 34.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-

ment panel will inform that it has been

switched off with the following indicator 

››› Fig. 193.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning

(advance warning)

The pre-warning function (advance warning)

can be switched on or off in the Easy Connect

system with the



button and the

TINGS

and

Driv

er a

sistance

function buttons

›



page 34.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning

function switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system in-

stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning

function may be adjusted as follows:

●

Advance

●

Medium

●

Delayed

●

Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function

in “Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle

in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

appear on the instrument panel display

. In this case, increase the safe dis-

tance.

The distance warning can be switched on and

off in the Easy Connect system using the



button and the

TINGS

and

Driv

er a

sistance

function buttons

›



page 34.

The system will store the setting for the next

time the ignition is switched on.

215

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

SEAT recommends keeping the distance

arnin

g sw

itched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tempo-

rarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist

should be de

activated due to the system's

limitations:

●

When the vehicle is to be towed.

●

If the vehicle is on a test bed.

●

When the radar sensor is damaged.

●

If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for

examp

le in a rear collision.

●

If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

●

If the radar sensor is covered temporarily

with some kind of accessory, such as an ad-

ditional headlight or the like.

●

When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,

ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-

tion

inher

ent to the system. Thus, in certain

circumstances, some of the system's reac-

tions may be inopportune from the driver's

standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-

vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front

Assist not to react or to do so too late:

●

In the first few instants of driving after

switching on the ignition, due to the system’s

initial auto-calibration.

●

On taking tight bends or complex paths.

●

Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

●

If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-

aged.

●

If the ASR has been disconnected or the

ESC activated in Sport mode manually

››› page 185.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

●

If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

If the vehicle over-accelerates.

●

In case of snow or heavy rain.

●

In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-

bikes.

●

Misaligned vehicles.

●

Vehicles crossing the other's path.

●

Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-

tion.

●

Special loads and accessories of other ve-

hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards

or over the top.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Related video

Fig. 194 Safety

Topic introduction

Fig. 195 Detection area.

216

Driver assistance systems

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) i

an e

xten-

sion of the normal cruise control system

(CCS) ›››

The A

function allows the driver to program

a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h

(18 and 150 mph) and to select the distance

required with regard to the vehicle in front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed

at all times, maintaining a safe distance with

the vehicle in front based on its speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, the

ACC function reduces speed until it is the

same as that of the vehicle ahead and main-

tains the set distance between the vehicles.

If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive

cruise control also accelerates, going no

higher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic

gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it

stops.

The distance programmed should be in-

creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certain

limitations inherent in the system. In other

words, in certain circumstances the driver will

have to adjust speed him or herself, as well

as the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen will

warn you to intervene by applying the brake

and a warning tone will be heard

››› page 218.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot

over

come the system's inherent limitations

or change the laws of physics. If used negli-

gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious

accidents and injuries. The system is not a re-

placement for driver awareness.

●

Adapt your speed and safe distance to the

vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-

bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

●

Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,

on steep roads, with several bends or in slip-

pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or

loose gravel, or on flooded roads.

●

Never use the ACC when driving off-road or

on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-

signed for use on paved roads only.

●

The ACC does not react on approaching a

fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic

jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped

at the traffic lights.

●

The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes-

trian monitoring system is available. In addi-

tion, the system does not react to animals or

vehicles crossing your path or approaching

head-on down the same lane.

●

If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient-

ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying

the pedal.

●

If y

ou are driving using the spare wheel,

the ACC function could automatically switch

off during your journey. Switch off the system

when starting off.

●

If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-

ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake

the vehicle by applying the pedal.

●

If the dash panel displays a driver interven-

tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

●

The driver should be ready to accelerate or

brake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-

sor is d

amaged, disconnect the ACC. This will

avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it

adjusted.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require special-

ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-

pose.

Note

●

If the AC

C system does not work as descri-

bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has

been checked by a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership

for this purpose.

●

Maximum speed with the ACC activated is

limited to 210 km/h (150 mph).

217

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

When the ACC

is switched on, strange

noises may be heard during automatic

braking cause by the braking system.

Indications on the display, warning

and contro

l lamps

Fig. 196 On the instrument panel display: (A)

inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Status display

Indic

ation

on the display

›››

Fig. 196:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not active

and is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is

not active and is not regulating your dis-

tance.

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and

is regulating your speed.

Distance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-

tance based on speed.

Symbols on the instrument panel display

and control lamps.

›››

in Warning symbols on page 122.



The speed reduction by the ACC to

maintain the distance from the vehi-

cle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.



The ACC is not currently available.

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and

start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually

››› Fig. 197 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavaila-

ble, refer to a specialised workshop to have the system

inspected.

The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in

colour.



The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed

remains constant.



If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-

tive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts

speed and distance from the vehicle in front.



If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive

(Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.



It lights up green:

The ACC is active.

Some warning and control lamps will light up

briefly

when the ignition i

switched on to

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Warning

symbols on p

age 122.

Note

When the ACC is connected, the indications

on the instrument

panel screen may be con-

cealed by warnings from other functions,

such as an incoming call.

218

Driver assistance systems

Radar sensor

Fig. 197 On the front bumper: radar sensor.

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-

er t

o det

ermine the tr

affic situation

›››

Fig. 197

The r

ar sensor's visibility may be impaired

by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-

fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the

adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.

The instrument panel displays the following

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If

necessary clean the radar sensor

›››

When the r

ar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the ACC will automatically be

available again. The message on the instru-

ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC

will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-

dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex-

ample, in a closed car park or due to the

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the

road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-

sor should not be covered with adhesives,

additional or similar headlights, as this may

negatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-

paired or structural modifications are made

to it, for example, if the suspension is low-

ered, ACC operation may be affected. In this

scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT

dealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-

sor is d

amaged or has lost its settings, dis-

connect the ACC. This will avoid possible

damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

●

The sensor may become damaged or lose

its settings when knocked, for example, dur-

ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-

mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

●

Repairs to the radar sensor require special-

ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-

mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-

pose.

●

Clean away the snow with a brush and the

ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer

spray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control

Fig. 198 On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

er for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

Fig. 199 On the left of the steering column:

thir

d l

er for operating the Adaptive Cruise

Control.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is

onnect

ed, the gr

een control lamp  will

light up on the instrument panel, and the

219

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

programmed speed and ACC status will be

layed ››› Fig. 196.

What ACC settings are possible?

●

Setting your speed ››› page 220.

●

Setting your distance ››› page 220.

●

Connecting and activating the ACC

››› page 220.

●

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

››› page 220.

●

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey ››› page 220.

●

Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 221.

●

Conditions in which the ACC does not react

››› page 221.

Setting speed

To set your speed, move the third lever loca-

ted in position

upwards or downwards un-

the de

sired speed is shown on the instru-

ment panel display. The speed adjustment is

made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set the

current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed

and activate the ACC, press the  button

››› Fig. 199. If you wish to increase or reduce

speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph),

move the lever to position

›

Fig. 198 or

press the  button, respectively.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-

hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.

Any modification to the programmed speed

will be shown on the bottom left part of the

instrument panel display ››› Fig. 196.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, press

the rocker switch towards the left/right

››› Fig. 199

The in

trument

panel display shows the mod-

ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis-

tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-

mends level 3. The set distance can be

changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur-

ing driving, as you like ›››

onnectin

g and activ

ating the ACC

To connect and activate the ACC, the position

of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle

speed and the position of the third level of

the ACC must all be taken into account.

●

With a manual gearbox, the gearbox selec-

tor lever must be in any gear except first, and

speed must be greater than approximately 30

km/h. With an automatic gearbox, the gear-

box selector lever must be in position D or S.

●

To activate the ACC, with the third lever in

position

press the  b

utt

on or mo

ve the

third lever of the ACC to position

›››

Fig. 198. At this

point, the image of the

ACC on the instrument panel display will

switch to Active mode ››› Fig. 196.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicle

travel

s at a set speed and distance from the

vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can

be changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the

position ›

›› Fig. 198

(en

gaged). An ACC

deactivated message appears and the

function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just

to switch it temporarily to inactive mode

(Standby), move the third lever to position

››› Fig. 198 or pres

s the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)

if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door

is opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the

start of your journey.

In wet road conditions, you should always set

a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in

front than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

●

Very short

●

Short

●

Media

●

Long

●

Very long

220

Driver assistance systems

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust

the di

ance level that will be applied when

the ACC is connected using the



button

and the

TINGS

and

Driv

er a

sistance

function

utt

s ›››



page 34.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving

profile selected can have an influence on the

ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour

››› page 225.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-

haviour of the ACC can also be affected by se-

lecting any of the following drive profiles in

the Easy Connect system:

●

Normal

●

Sport

●

Eco

●

Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-

tings using the



button and the

TINGS

Driv

er a

sistance

function buttons

›



page 34.

The following conditions may lead the ACC

not to react:

●

If the accelerator is pressed.

●

If there is no gear engaged.

●

If the ESC is controlling.

●

If the driver is not wearing his/her seat

belt.

●

If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-

trically connected trailer are damaged.

●

If the vehicle is reversing.

●

Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).

Driver messages

 ACC not available

The system can no longer continue to guar-

antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-

activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is

damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised

workshop and have the fault repaired.

 ACC and Front Assist: cur-

rently not available. No sensor

vision

This message will be displayed to the driver if

the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for

example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.

Clean the sensor ››› Fig. 197.

 ACC: currently not available.

Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-

ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

 ACC: only available in D, S

or M

Select the D/S or M position on the selector

lever.

 ACC: parking brake applied

The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is

applied. The ACC is available once again after

the parking brake is released.

 ACC: currently not available.

Intervention of stability con-

trol

The message for the driver is displayed when

the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-

venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically

switched off.

 ACC: Take action!

The message for the driver is displayed if,

when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a

mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-

though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake

to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding

with another vehicle.

 ACC: speed limit

The message for the driver is displayed if, in

vehicles with manual gearbox, the current

speed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least

30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter

switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h

(12 mph).

 ACC: available as of the 2nd

gear

221

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear

anual

earbox).

 ACC: engine speed

The message for the driver is displayed if,

when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv-

er does not shift up or down a gear in time,

which means exceeding or not reaching the

permissible engine speed. The ACC switches

itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

 ACC: clutch pressed

Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the

clutch pedal for longer abandons control

mode.

Door open

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC

cannot be activated with the vehicle station-

ary and the door open.

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when the

minimum dist

ance to the vehicle in front is

exceeded and the speed difference between

both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc-

tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case

the brake pedal should be applied immedi-

ately.

●

The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-

tions properly.

●

“Stepping” on the accelerator may cause

the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

braking will have priority over intervention by

the speed contr

ol or adaptive cruise control.

●

Always be ready to use the brakes!

●

Observe country-specific provisions gov-

erning obligatory minimum distances be-

tween vehicles.

●

It is dangerous to activate control and re-

sume the programmed speed if the road, traf-

fic or weather conditions do not permit this.

Risk of accident!

Note

●

The pr

ogrammed s

peed is erased once the

ignition or the ACC are switched off.

●

When the traction control system (ASR) is

deactivated during acceleration or else the

ESC is activated in Sport* Mode

(››› page 123), the ACC switches off automati-

cally.

●

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the

engine switches off automatically during the

ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical-

ly to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtaking in

an in

ide l

ane

Fig. 200 On the instrument panel display:

active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func-

tion th

help

s avoid overtaking while driving

in inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at a

slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed

on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 200.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside

lane the system will gently brake, and in ac-

cordance with the speed will prevent the car

from overtaking. The driver can override this

function at any time by pressing the accelera-

tor pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-

tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in

city traffic.

222

Driver assistance systems

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con-

ACC temporarily in certain situa-

tions

In the following situations the Adaptive

Cruise C

ontrol (ACC) should be deactivated

due to the system's limitations ›››

●

When changing lanes, on tight bends and

round

abouts, in acceleration and decelera-

tion lanes on motorways or in sections with

road works to prevent involuntary accelera-

tion to reach the programmed speed.

●

When going through a tunnel, as operation

coul

d be affected.

●

On roads with several lanes, when other ve-

hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-

ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be

overtaken on the right.

●

In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the

vehicle in front might not be detected proper-

ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be

detected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-

tions de

scribed, serious accidents and inju-

ries may occur.

●

Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-

tions.

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-

mentioned situation

s, you may commit a le-

gal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 201 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-

t ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 202 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One

ehic

e turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain

ical limitations inherent in the system.

For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in

certain circumstances, may be unexpected or

come late from the driver's point of view. So

pay attention in order to intervene if necessa-

ry.

For example, the following traffic situations

call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (only

vehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin

driving automatically when the vehicle in

front drives off ›››

223

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic

am), the in

trument panel display shows the

ACC ready to start message. If the ve-

hicle ahead drives off again, the ACC will also

do so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again,

the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the

ACC ready to start status by operating

the third lever repeatedly towards position

›

›› Fig. 198

or b

y pressing the brake pedal.

If the Press the brake message is shown

on the instrument panel, press the brake. If

you do not, an acoustic warning will be heard

and the ACC will switch to inactive mode

(Standby). At this point, the vehicle may be-

gin to move towards the stopped vehicle

ahead ›››

aking

When the turn signal lights up before the ve-

hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the

ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically

and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-

cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,

if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in

front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-

grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted at

any time by pressing the brake or moving the

third lever backwards ››› page 219.

Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-

sor may no longer determine the vehicle in

front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane

››› Fig. 201 A. In these situations the vehicle

may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-

act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the

driver has to intervene by accelerating or in-

terrupting the braking process by applying

the brake or pushing the third lever back-

wards ››› page 219.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-

sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-

nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow or

misaligned vehicles when they are within

range ››› Fig. 201 B. This applies particularly

to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In

these cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accessories

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-

cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or

over the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-

cles with special loads and accessories or

when overtaking them. In these cases, you

should brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distance

away from your own can only be detected

when they are within range of the sensors.

Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-

act ››› Fig. 202 C. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objects

while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged

vehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or

moves over and there is a stationary vehicle

in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

››› Fig. 202 D. In these cases, you should

brake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite direction

and vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles approach-

ing from the opposite direction or vehicles

crossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets

used in road works, can confuse the radar

sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

224

Driver assistance systems

Factors that may affect how the radar sensor

oper

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to

heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is

deactivated temporarily. The relevant text

message will appear in the dash panel dis-

play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor

››› Fig. 197.

When the radar sensor begins to operate

properly again, the ACC will automatically be

available again. The message on the instru-

ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC

will be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-

dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed

car park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controls

less dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example after

abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,

the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The

relevant text message will appear in the dash

panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise

control cannot be activated.

Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated

once brake temperature has cooled suffi-

ciently. The message will disappear from the

instrument panel display. If the message ACC

not available remains on for quite a long

time it means that there is a fault. Contact a

specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-

iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not heed the Press the brake

mess

age, the vehicle may initiate an involun-

tary movement and could crash into the vehi-

cle ahead. In any event, before driving off,

check that the road is clear. The radar sensor

may not detect obstacles on the road. This

could cause an accident and serious injuries.

If necessary, apply the brake.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Intr

oduction

SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to

hoo

se betw

een four profiles or modes, Nor-

mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that

modify the behaviour of various vehicle func-

tions, providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configured

according to personal preferences. The other

profiles are fixed.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-

hicle,

SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the

following functions:

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the en-

gine responds more spontaneously or more

in harmony with the movements of the accel-

erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec-

ted, the Start-stop function is automatically

activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the

gear change points are modified to position

them in lower or higher engine speed ranges.

Additionally, the Eco mode activates the In-

ertia function, enabling consumption to be

further reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau-

ses the gear change recommendation indica-

tions that appear on the instrument panel to

vary, facilitating more efficient driving.

“Dual Ride” suspension

The “Dual Ride” suspension features a com-

fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal

profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting

with this it features a sporty suspension in

225

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

the Sport pr

ofi

e, suitable for a sporty driv-

ing style. In the Individual profile the sus-

pension can be switched between Normal or

Sport, depending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus-

pension, the following message is displayed

on the instrument panel screen Fault:

damping setting.

Address

Power steering becomes more robust in

Sport mode to enable a sportier driving

style.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate

in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-

sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

According to the active driving profile, the ac-

celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise

control varies.

Setting driving mode

Fig. 203 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but-

on.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco

and Individual.

ou c

an sel

ect the required mode either by

repeatedly pressing the button MODE

››› Fig. 203, or on the touch screen, in the

menu that opens when the above button is

pressed.

An icon on the Easy Connect system display

informs about the active mode.

The MODE button light remains lit up yellow

when the active mode is different to Normal.

Driving

profile

Characteristics

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experience,

suitable for everyday use.

Driving

profile

Characteristics

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic perform-

ance in the vehicle, enabling the user a

more sporty driving style.

Eco

Places the vehicle in a particularly low

state of consumption, facilitating a

fuel-saving driving style that is respect-

ful to the environment.

Individual

Enables some configurations to be

modified by pressing the Profile

settings button. The functions that

can be adjusted depend on the equip-

ment fitted in the vehicle.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-

tion to al

l traffic: doing otherwise could cause

an accident.

Note

●

When the vehic

le is switched off it will al-

ways store the driving profile that was selec-

ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-

ertheless, when the engine is restarted, the

engine and the gear will not restart in the set-

ting selected. For engine and gear to revert to

the desired position, select the correspond-

ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con-

nect system button repeatedly.

226

Driver assistance systems

●

Your speed and driv

ing style must always

be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic

conditions.

●

The Eco profile is not recommended when

towing a vehicle.

Kick-down

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-

celer

ation to be reached.

If the eco* ››› page 226 mode has been se-

lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler-

ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-

gine power is automatically controlled to give

your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-

pery or w

et, the kick-down feature could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which could

result in skidding.

Fatigue detection (break rec-

ommend

ation)*

ated video

Fig. 204 Safety

Introduction

The Fatigue detection informs the driver

when their driv

g beh

aviour shows signs of

fatigue.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue

detection sys

tem tempt you into taking any

risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-

cient in length when making long journeys.

●

The driver always assumes the responsibil-

ity of driving to their full capacity.

●

Never drive if you are tired.

●

The system does not detect the tiredness of

the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-

formation in the section ››› page 228, System

limitations.

●

In some situation

s, the system may incor-

rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-

vre as driver tiredness.

●

No warning is given in the event of the ef-

fect called microsleep!

●

Please observe the indications on the in-

strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

●

atigue detection h

as been developed for

driving on motorways and well paved roads

only.

●

If there is a fault in the system, have it

checked by a specialised workshop.

Function and operation

Fig. 205 On the instrument panel display: fa-

tigue det

ection symbo

Fatigue detection determines the driving be-

iour of

the driver when starting a journey,

227

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

making a calculation of tiredness. This is

tantly compared with the current driving

behaviour. If the system detects that the driv-

er is tired, an audible warning is given with a

sound and an optic warning is shown with a

symbol and complementary message on the

instrument panel display ››› Fig. 205. The

message on the instrument panel display is

shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-

pending on the case, is repeated. The system

stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display

can be switched off by pressing the



button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

utt



on the multi function steering

wheel

›



page 37.

The message can be recalled to the instru-

ment panel display using the multifunction

display ›››



page 37.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated on

speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to

around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-

vated in the Easy Connect system with the



button and the

TINGS

function button

›



page 34. A mark indicates that the ad-

justment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitations

inherent to the system. The following condi-

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-

vent it from functioning.

●

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

●

At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

●

When cornering

●

On roads in poor condition

●

In unfavourable weather conditions

●

When a sporty driving style is employed

●

In the event of a serious distraction to the

driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the

vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,

when the ignition is switched off or when the

driver has unbuckled their seat belt and

opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-

riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the

system automatically re-establishes the tired-

ness calculation. When driving at a faster

speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-

ted.

Parking aid (Park Pilot)

General information

Assorted assistance systems – which vary

depending on the equipment fitt

ed in the car

– will help you when parking or manoeu-

vring.

The rear parking aid is an audible assistant

that warns about obstacles located behind

the vehicle ››› page 229.

During parking, Parking System Plus assists

the driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front and

behind the vehicle ››› page 230.

WARNING

●

Alwa

ys pay attention, also when looking

straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-

roundings. The assistance systems are not a

replacement for driver awareness. When in-

serting or removing the vehicle from a park-

ing space, or when performing similar ma-

noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-

sponsibility.

●

Adapt your speed and driving style at all

times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-

fic conditions.

●

The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in

which obstacles and people are not regis-

tered. Pay special attention to children and

animals.

228

Driver assistance systems

●

Alwa

ys keep visual control of the vehicle

surroundings: use the mirrors for additional

help.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-

ected b

y different factors that may lead to

damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-

rounds:

●

Under certain circumstances, the system

does not detect or display certain objects:

–

Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,

fences, posts and thin trees.

–

Objects that are located above the sen-

sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

–

Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-

der snow.

●

Certain surfaces of objects and garments

do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-

nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-

rectly, these objects or people wearing such

clothes.

●

Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected

by external sound sources. In certain circum-

stances this may prevent them from detect-

ing people or objects.

●

Please note that low obstacles detected by

the system may no longer be registered by

the sensors as the car moves closer, so the

system will not give any further warning. In

certain circumstances, objects such as high

kerbs that could damage the bottom of the

vehicl

e are not detected either.

●

If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-

nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable

damage.

●

The knocks or damage on the radiator

grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-

body can adjust the orientation of the sen-

sors. This can affect the parking aid function.

Have the function checked by a specialised

workshop.

Note

●

In cert

ain situations, the system can give a

warning even though there is no obstacle in

the detected area, e.g:

–

with rough or cobbled floors or ground

with long grass;

–

with external ultrasound sources, such as

cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;

–

In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-

haust gases;

–

or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

●

A registration plate or plate holder on the

front with larger than the space for the regis-

tration plate, or a registration plate that is

curved or warped can cause:

–

false detections,

–

loss of sensor visibility,

●

In order to guarantee good system opera-

tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free

of snow or ice, and do not cover them with

adhes

ives or other objects.

●

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-

ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply

it directly only very briefly and always from a

distance of more than 10 cm.

●

Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,

such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the

operation of the Parking Aid.

●

In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-

tem, it is advised that you practice parking in

an area or car park that is free from traffic.

There must be good weather and light condi-

tions.

●

The volume and tone of the warnings can

be modified, in addition to the indications

››› page 232.

●

In vehicles without a driver information

system, these parameters can be modified in

a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised

workshop.

●

Please observe information on towing a

trailer ››› page 233.

●

The display on the Easy Connect screen

shows a slight time delay.

Rear parking aid*

The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in

ark

g by means of audible warning

sounds.

229

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Description

Ther

e ar

e sen

sors integrated in the rear

bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-

cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues and the

like, as this could affect the system's opera-

tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 251.

The approximate measurement range of the

rear sensors is:

side area 0.60 m

central area 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

betw

een the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: Do not continue to

move forward (or backward)

›››

in General

inf

orm

ation on p

age 228,

›››

in General in-

orm

ation on p

age 229 !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,

the volume of the warning begins to reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

Activating/Deactivating

When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid

is automatically switched on. This is con-

firmed with a short warning.

On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid

system is disconnected immediately.

Parking Aid Plus*

Fig. 206 Represented area.

During parking, P

ark

g System Plus assists

the driver by visually and audibly warning

them about obstacles detected in front of

and behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated in

the front and rear bumpers. When they detect

an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warn-

ings and visually on the Easy Connect sys-

tem.

In the event of danger of a frontal collision,

the audible warnings come from the front of

the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of

a rear-end collision they come from the rear.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are

not covered by adhesives, residues and the

like, as this could affect the system's opera-

tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 251.

The approximate measurement range of the

sensors is:

1.20 m

1.60 m

0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-

val between the audible warnings will be re-

duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the

warning will be constant: do not continue to

move forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,

the volume of the warning begins to reduce

after four seconds (does not affect the tone

of the constant warning).

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-

hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-

tres forwards and backwards. Thus, the miss-

ing areas are screened and obstacles at the

sides of the vehicle are displayed

››› Fig. 206

230

Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 207 Centre console: parking aid button.

Manual connection of Parking Aid

●

Press the  b

utt

once. The symbol on

the button will light up yellow.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Press the  button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display

(the audible sounds remain active)

●

Press a button on the main menu of the fac-

tory-assembled infotainment system.

●

OR: press the  function button in the top

right corner.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle

that is in its forwards path at a speed below

10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 231, Automatic ac-

tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-

tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-

nection is activated in the infotainment sys-

tem. A reduced display is shown.

●

OR: the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

●

Move the selector lever to position P.

●

OR: accelerate to more than approx.

10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in Parking

Aid

●

Press the  function button on the info-

tainment system display.

Change from reduced view to full view

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image

(Rear View Camera “RVC”)

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

OR: Press the RVC function button

››› page 236.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and

the button symbol will light up yellow when

the system is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 208 Miniature indication of automatic ac-

tiv

ation.

When the Parking System Plus is switched on

aut

atic

ally, a miniature of the vehicle will

be displayed and the segments will be

shown on the left side of the screen

››› Fig. 208.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-

proaching an obstacle located in front of the

vehicle. It only operates every time the speed

is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6

mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the 

button, the following actions must be carried

out in order for it to automatically switch on:

231

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

h off the ignition and switch it on

again.

●

OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-

fore reducing speed below this number

again.

●

OR: place the selector lever in position P

and then move it from this position.

●

OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-

tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aid

miniature indication can be switched on and

off from the Easy Connect system menu

›››



page 34:

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

Select:



button > Settings > Parking

and manoeuvring.

●

Select the Automatic activation op-

tion.

When the f

nction button check box is

activated , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automatical-

ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-

en when obstacles in front are at a distance

of less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking Aid

only w

orks when you are driving slowly. If

driving style is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury or

damage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 209 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-

nect

tem screen.

The distance of separation from the obstacle

an be e

timated using the segments around

the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works

as follows:

a white segment is dis-

played when the obstacle is not within

the vehicle's trajectory or the direction

of travel is in the opposite direction to

its location, and it is more than 30 cm

from the vehicle.

obstacles located in the

vehicle's trajectory and which are more

than 30 cm away from the vehicle are

displayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

obstacles that are less than

30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-

played in red.

Moreover, with the SEAT Media System

Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-

cates the vehicle's expected journey based

on the steering wheel angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-

cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding

audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the

segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,

this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-

stacles are represented in red, including

those out of the path. Do not continue to

move forward (or backward) ›››

in General

inf

orm

ation on p

age 228, ›››

in General in-

orm

ation on p

age 229 !

Adjusting the display and audible

warnings

The settings for the display and audible

arnin

s are controlled via the Easy Con-

nect*.

Automatic activation

 on – activates the Automatic activa-

tion option ››› page 231.

Red segments:

232

Driver assistance systems

 off – de

activ

es the Automatic ac-

tivation option ››› page 231.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front

area.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear

area.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the active

audio/video source volume will be reduced

to the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when it

itched on, if a message reporting a Park-

ing aid error is displayed on the instrument

panel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-

necting the ignition, the next time that the

parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible

signal of the existence of a fault will be is-

sued.

Parking System Plus*

If there is a fault in the parking aid system a

message will appear on the instrument panel

indicating the error. In addition the  key

LED will blink.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is

displayed on the Easy Connect display in

front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is

faulty, only the obstacles in area

are dis-

yed ››› Fig. 206. If a front sensor is faulty,

only the obstacles in area

are displayed.

Hav

e the f

lt corrected by a specialised

workshop without delay.

Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket

dev

e fr

om the factory, when the trailer is

connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear

sensors will not be activated when reverse

gear is engaged, when the selector lever is

turned to position R or when the button  is

pressed.

Parking System Plus

The distance to possible obstacles at the rear

of the vehicle will not be displayed on the

screen and nor will it be indicated by means

of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-

play objects detected at the front, and the ve-

hicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring function*

3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emerg

ency braking function is used to

minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking

Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

function activates emergency braking when it

detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that

could cause a collision, driving forwards or in

reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid

is activated automatically. For the system to

operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-

tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and

10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while

manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once

the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s

position is changed, the function will be ac-

tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap-

ply.

233

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

The braking while manoeuvring function is

ontr

lled in the Easy Connect system with

the



menu and the

TINGS

and

ark

and m

anoeuvre

function buttons.

●

 on – permits the u

se of the braking

while manoeuvring function.

●

 off – does not permit the use of the

braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency brak-

ing

●

When the function is deactivated with the

Brakin

g while manoeuvring

button that appears

on the P

ark

g System screen of the Easy

Connect system.

●

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or

bonnet are opened.

Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-

era”*

Related video

Fig. 210 Safety

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING

●

The Rear As

sist does not make it possible

to precisely calculate the distance from ob-

stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it

overcome the system's own limits, hence us-

ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-

ries if used negligently or without due care.

The driver should be aware of his/her sur-

roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

●

The camera lens expands and distorts the

field of vision and displays the objects on the

screen in a different, vague manner. The per-

ception of distances is also distorted by this

effect.

●

Due to the screen resolution or insufficient

light conditions, some items may be dis-

played in an unsatisfactory manner or not at

all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,

railings or trees that might not be displayed

on screen and could damage the vehicle.

●

The rear assist has blind spots where it is

not possible to represent people or objects

(small children, animals and certain objects

cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-

itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all

times.

●

Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and

snow, and do not cover it.

●

The system is not a replacement for driver

awareness. Supervise the parking operation

at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-

ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style

at all times to suit visibility, weather, road

and traffic c

onditions.

●

Do not be distracted from the traffic by

looking at the screen.

●

The images on the rear assist screen are

only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial

depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,

for example, are more difficult to detect or

may not be seen at all.

●

Vehicle load modifies the representation of

the orientation lines displayed. The width

represented by the lines diminishes with ve-

hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-

cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-

hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying

a heavy load.

●

In the following situations, the objects or

other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-

tem display appear to be further away or

closer than they really are: Pay special atten-

tion:

–

On moving from a horizontal plane to a

slope.

–

On moving from a slope to a horizontal

plane.

–

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the

rear.

–

When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or are

jutting out from it. These objects may al-

so be outside the camera's angle of vi-

sion when reversing.

234

Driver assistance systems

Note

●

It is

important to take great care and pay

special attention if you are not yet familiar

with the system.

●

Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-

cle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 211 On the rear bumper: location of the

ar a

ssist camera.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver

durin

g r

erse parking or manoeuvring

››› Fig. 211. The camera image is viewed to-

gether with orientation lines projected by the

system on the Infotainment system screen.

The bottom of the screen displays part of the

bumper, which can be used by the driver as a

reference point.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility to

change the image's brightness, contrast and

colour settings.

To change these settings:

●

Park the vehicle in a safe place.

●

Apply the parking brake.

●

Switch the ignition on.

●

If necessary, switch on the Infotainment

system.

●

Engage reverse gear or turn the selector

lever to position R.

●

Press the  function button displayed on

the right of the image.

●

Make the desired adjustments on the menu

by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by

moving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-

noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-

ing cases:

●

If the image displayed is not very reliable or

is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty

lens.

●

If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-

played very clearly or is incomplete.

●

If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

●

If the position and installation angle of the

camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-

end collision. Have the system checked by a

specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the

orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-

ommends practising parking and manoeu-

vring with the rear assist in a place without

too much traffic or in a car park when there

are good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow

and ice:

●

Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-

based glass cleaning product and clean the

lens with a dry cloth.

●

Remove snow using a small brush.

●

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

●

Never use abr

asive cleaning products to

clean the camera lens.

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could

damage the camera.

235

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Parking and manoeuvring with the

ar a

ssist

Fig. 212 Display on the Infotainment system

een: orientation lines.

Switching the system on and off

●

The rear assist will switch on when the igni-

tion i

on or the en

gine running, on engaging

reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-

ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-

matic gearbox).

●

The system switches off 8 seconds after

disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)

or removing the selector lever from the R po-

sition (automatic gearbox). The system will

also disconnect immediately after the igni-

tion is switched off.

●

The camera will stop transmitting images

above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-

verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus

››› page 228, the camera image will cease to

be transmitted immediately when reverse

gear is disengaged or when the selector lever

is moved from the R position, and the optical

information provided by the Parking Aid sys-

tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rear

assist image can also be concealed:

●

By pressing one of the Infotainment system

buttons on the display.

●

OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that

appears on the left of the screen (which

switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-

ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist image

again:

●

Disengage reverse, or change the selector

lever's position, engage reverse again or

move the selector lever to position R.

●

OR: Press the RVC function button

Meaning of the orientation lines

››› Fig. 212

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the

approximate width of the vehicle plus the

rear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked in

green ends approximately 2 m behind

the vehicle on the road surface.

Intermediate line: indicates a distance of

approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on

the road surface.

Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-

tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear

of the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

●

Place the vehicle in front of the parking

space and engage reverse gear (manual

gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-

tion (automatic gearbox).

●

Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel

so that the side orientation lines lead to-

wards the parking space.

●

Guide the vehicle into the parking space so

that the side orientation lines run parallel to

it.

WARNING: the RVC (Rear

View Camera) function

button will only be activated and available when the

reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to

position R.

236

Towing bracket device

ing bracket device*

Introduction

The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi-

cle, be it

factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac-

cessory, meets all the national technical and

legal requirements for towing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector

for the electrical connection between the

trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-

ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the

corresponding adaptor, which is available as

a genuine SEAT accessory.

The maximum authorised towing load is 50

kg.

WARNING

●

Befor

e each journey, make sure that the de-

tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se-

cured in its housing.

●

If the detachable ball joint is not properly

fitted and secured, do not use it.

●

Do not use the towing bracket device for

towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.

●

Do not modify or adapt the towing device

connection.

●

Never unhook the detachable ball joint

when the trailer is hitched.

CAUTION

Handle the detachable ball joint with care in

order to av

oid damaging the bumper paint-

work.

Note

Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball

joint ›

›› page 102.

Description

Fig. 213 Towing bracket device support / de-

able ball joint / key.

Depending on the country or version, the

ing bracket device's detachable ball joint

is located:

●

underneath the floor panel of the luggage

compartment.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

The towing device bracket is supplied with a

key.

Key to ››› Fig. 213

13-pin connector

Safety lug

Hook housing

Hook housing cap

Ball protective cover

Detachable ball

Locking lever

Lock cover

Release bolt

Lock

Locking balls

Key

Note

Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you

lose y

our key.

237

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Placing in standby position

Fig. 214 Step 1.

Fig. 215 Step 2.

Before assembling it, place the detachable

in the standby position with the follow-

ing two steps.

Step 1.

●

Turn the key in the direction of arrow

un-

the p

art of the key with the holes reaches

the top position ››› Fig. 214 (arrow).

Step 2.

●

Grip the detachable ball below the protec-

tive cover.

●

Press the release bolt

in the direction of

arr

, and at the same time press lever

in the direction of arrow

as far as it will

o ›

›

› Fig. 215.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Standby position

Fig. 216 Standby position: Position of the lev-

er and the r

ase bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly

●

Key

›

› Fig. 216

is in the released posi-

tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-

ing upwards).

●

Lever

›

› Fig. 216

is in the bottom posi-

tion.

●

The release bolt

›

› Fig. 216

can be

moved.

238

Towing bracket device

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready

or in

tallation.

CAUTION

The key cannot be removed or turned in the

standb

y position.

Assembling the detachable ball - Step

Fig. 217 Fitting the detachable ball / Release

in the dep

loyed position.

Fitting the detachable ball

●

Remove the hook housing cap

››› Fig. 213 downw

ards.

●

Set the detachable ball to its standby posi-

tion ›››

page 238.

●

Grip the detachable ball from below

››› Fig. 217 and insert it into the hook hous-

ing following the direction of arrow

until it

es audibly ›››

turns aut

omatically in the direction

arr

upwards, and the release bolt

moves outwards (the red and green part will

sible) ›››

does not turn automatically or the

ase bolt

does not come out, the de-

able ball should be removed by turning

the lever as far as possible downwards from

the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's

support surfaces and the cavity should then

be cleaned.

WARNING

●

When attachin

g the detachable ball, keep

your hands well away from the reach of the

lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers

caught.

●

Never try to pull the lever upwards by force

to turn the key. The detachable ball would not

be secured properly!

Assembling the detachable ball - Step

Fig. 218 Locking the lock.

Fig. 219 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step ›

›

page 239, As-

sembling the detachable ball - Step 1 !

●

Turn key

in the direction of arrow

un-

the p

art of the key with the holes reaches

the bottom position ››› Fig. 218.

239

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

●

emo

e the key in the direction of arrow

●

Place cover

in the lock in the direction

arr

›

›› Fig. 219

›

››

●

Check that the detachable ball is securely

att

hed ›

›› page 240, Checking proper at-

tachment.

CAUTION

●

After r

emoving the key, always place the

cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-

comes soiled it will be impossible to insert

the key.

●

Keep the towing bracket device's housing

cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-

vent the detachable ball from being properly

secured!

●

If the detachable ball is removed, always

place the cap on the hook's housing.

Checking proper attachment

Fig. 220 Detachable ball properly attached.

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,

e s

ure that it is properly attached first.

Detachable ball properly attached.

●

The detachable ball will not fall out of the

housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.

●

Lever

›

› Fig. 220

is fully raised.

●

The release bolt

›

› Fig. 220

is sticking

fully out (the red and green part is visible).

●

The key has been removed.

●

Cover

›

› Fig. 220

is placed over the lock.

WARNING

●

When remov

ing the detachable ball, keep

your hands well away from the reach of the

lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers

caught.

●

The tow

ing bracket device should only be

used if the detachable ball has been properly

locked!

Removing the detachable ball - Step 1

Fig. 221 Removing the lock cover.

Fig. 222 Releasing the lock.

●

Remove cover

from the lock in the direc-

tion of

arr

›

› Fig. 221

240

Towing bracket device

●

ser

key

into the lock in the direction

arr

›

›› Fig. 222

●

urn the key in the direction of arrow

un-

the p

art of the key with the holes is facing

upwards.

WARNING

Never remove the detachable ball joint when

the trail

er is hitched.

Note

Before you remove the detachable ball, you

are adv

ised to place the protective cover on

the ball coupling.

Removing the detachable ball - Step 2

Fig. 223 Releasing the detachable ball.

Do not omit this first step

›

page 240, Re-

moving the detachable ball - Step 1 !

Releasing the detachable ball

●

Grip the detachable ball from below.

●

Press the release bolt

in the direction of

arr

as far as it will go, and at the same

time pr

s lever

in the direction of arrow

as far as it will go.

In thi

sition, the detachable ball is loose

and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this

does not occur when you release it, press it

with the other hand from above.

The detachable ball locks into the standby

position at the same time and is therefore

ready to be reinserted into the hook housing

›››

●

Fit the cap

›

› Fig. 213

onto its housing.

WARNING

Never leave the detachable ball loose in the

luggag

e compartment. It could cause damage

in the luggage compartment in the case of

abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen-

ger safety!

CAUTION

●

If y

ou hold the lever and do not press down

on it as far as you can, after you remove the

detachable ball, the latter will continue up-

wards and will not lock into the standby posi-

tion. The detachable ball should be placed in

this position before the next assembly.

●

Keep the detac

hable ball in the standby po-

sition, with the key inserted into the box

while you place it facing downwards with the

side opposite to the one where the key is in-

serted. The key could get damaged!

●

When operating the lever, do not apply too

much pressure (for example, do not stand on

it)!

Note

Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be-

ore

you put it away with the vehicle tools.

Operation and care

Put the cover on the housing cavity so that

dir

annot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check the

ball coupling and apply suitable grease if

necessary.

Use the protective cover when putting the de-

tachable ball away to keep the luggage com-

partment clean.

Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-

faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

CAUTION

The top part of the hook housing is greased.

Make s

ure that the grease has not been re-

moved.

241

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

Trailer towing

you need to bear in mind

when towing a trailer?

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer

when fitted with the c

orrect equipment.

If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-

sult ››› page 245.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector

for the electrical connection between the

trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to

use an adapter cable. It is available at any

Technical Service.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If

you do not load the trailer up to the maxi-

mum permitted trailer weight, you can then

climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only

applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above

sea level. With increasing altitude the engine

power and therefore the vehicle climbing

ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has

to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the

vehicle and trailer combination must be re-

duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or

part

thereof). The gross combination weight

is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus

the actual weight of the laden trailer. When

possible, operate the trailer with the maxi-

mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint

of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the

specified limit.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar

loads that are given on the data plate of the

towing bracket are for certification purposes

only. The correct towing bracket figures for

your specific model, which may be lower than

these figures, are given in the vehicle docu-

mentation or on ››› page 281, Technical

specifications.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy

objects are as near to the axle as possible.

Loads carried in the trailer must be secured

to prevent them moving.

Tyre pressure

The maximum permissible tyre pressure val-

ues are shown on the sticker on the rear part

of the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres-

sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the

trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the

road behind the trailer with the standard rear

vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you

should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.

Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on

hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors

to give sufficient vision to the rear.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle and

the trailer ››› page 243.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with

the statutory safety regulations ››› page 243.

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer. This could

res

ult in fatal accidents.

Note

●

Tow

ing a trailer places additional demands

on the vehicle. We recommend additional

services between the normal inspection inter-

vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-

ing a trailer.

●

Find out whether special regulations apply

to towing a trailer in your country.

242

Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 224 Schematic diagram: assignment of

the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 224:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 224:

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pin 9

Electrical socket for trailer

The vehic

le is fitted with a 13-pole power

socket for the electrical connection between

the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-

tects that a trailer has been connected elec-

trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer

will receive voltage through this connection.

Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for

example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10

is only powered when the engine is running.

The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam-

ple, a caravan battery.

Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to

each other to avoid discharging or damaging

the vehicle's battery.

The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13,

should never be connected to each other to

avoid overloading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you

will need to use an adapter cable. In this case

the function corresponding to pin 10 will not

be available.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

Side lights (total) 100 Watts

Rear lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

●

If the re

ar lights of the trailer are not cor-

rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may

be damaged.

●

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-

rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-

aged.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric system

directly to the electrical connections of the

tail lights or any other power sources. Only

use the connections intended for providing

electric current to the trailer.

Ball coupling of towing bracket de-

The ball coupling is provided with instruc-

tion

on fittin

g and removing the ball cou-

pling of the towing bracket.

243

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be

stor

ed securely in the luggage compartment

to prevent them being flung through the vehi-

cle and causing injury.

Note

●

By l

aw, the ball coupling must be removed

if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures

the number plate.

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 225 Turn the 13-pin connector.

Before driving

●

Grip the 13-pin connector at area

and

emo

e it in the direction of the arrow

››› Fig. 225.

●

Remove the protective cover

›

›› Fig. 213

ards.

After driving

●

Grip the 13-pin connector at area

and

ser

it in the opposite direction to the arrow

››› Fig. 225.

●

Fit the protective cover

›

› Fig. 213

the ball coupling.

Safety lug

The safety lug

›

› Fig. 225

is used to hook

up the trailer's retainer cable.

On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain-

er cable should have slack in all the trailer

positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp

bends, reverse gear, etc.).

Headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raised

when the trailer is connected and the light

may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the

headlight range rotary adjuster

WARNING

●

Never use the s

afety lug to tow!

●

Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-

fic conditions.

●

All work on the electrical system must be

carried out only by specialised workshops.

●

Never connect the trailer's electric system

to the electrical connections of the rear lights

or any other power sources.

●

After hooking up the trailer and connecting

the socket, check that all the trailer's rear

lights are working properly.

Note

●

If there i

s any fault in the trailer's lighting,

check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse

box ›››



page 62.

●

The contact between the retainer cable and

the safety lug may give rise to mechanical

wear in the lug's surface protection. This

wear will not prevent the safety lug from op-

erating properly or cause any fault and is ex-

cluded from the warranty.

●

When connecting and disconnecting the

trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake

should be applied.

This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon

headlights.

244

Towing bracket device

Anti-theft alarm

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-

gered when the el

ectrical connection be-

tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system

before connecting or disconnecting a trailer

››› page 138.

Conditions for the integration of a trailer in

the anti-theft alarm system.

●

The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an-

ti-theft al

arm system and a towing bracket

device.

●

The trailer is connected electrically to the

towing vehicle by the trailer connector.

●

The electrical system of the vehicle and the

trailer are prepared for operation.

●

The vehicle is locked with the ignition key

and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

CAUTION

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear

LED lights ar

e not integrated in the anti-theft

alarm system.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra

eight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer

with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.

However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-

tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight

distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-

duced with increasing speed. For this reason,

it is advisable not to drive at the maximum

permissible speed in an unfavourable road,

weather or wind conditions. This applies es-

pecially when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately

if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-

ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-

creasing speed.

Always brake in due course. If the trailer has

an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at

first and then, firmly. This will prevent the

jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-

er wheels. Select a low gear in due course

before going down a steep downhill. This en-

ables you to use the engine braking to slow

down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and during pro-

longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high

engine speed, always monitor the coolant

temperature gauge ››› page 120.

Electronic Stability Control*

The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer

in case of skidding or rocking.

Retrofitting a towing bracket*

Fig. 226 Attachment points for towing brack-

245

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Operation

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-

hic

e i

s purchased, this must be completed

according to the instructions of the towing

bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket

are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The di

ance between the centre of the ball

coupling and the ground should never be

lower than the indicated value, even with a

fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-

mum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing

bracket:

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

1,033 mm

322 mm

338 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

●

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort

or the

ehicle. Therefore, before fitting a

towing bracket, please contact a Technical

Service to check whether your cooling system

needs modification.

●

The legal requirements in your country

must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate control lamp).

●

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear

bumper, must be removed and reinstalled.

The towing bracket securing bolts must be

tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-

er socket must be connected to the vehicle

electrical system. This requires specialised

knowledge and tools.

●

Figures in the illustration show the eleva-

tion value and the attachment points which

must be considered if you are retrofitting a

towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-

cia

lised workshop.

●

If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-

led, there is a serious danger of accident.

●

For your own safety, please observe the tow

bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION

●

If the pow

er socket is incorrectly installed,

this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-

trical system.

Note

●

SEAT r

ecommends that the towing hooks

be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult

your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica-

tions to your vehicle are necessary.

●

Due to the specific design of the exhaust,

the fitting of a conventional towing hook is

not recommended for some sportier versions.

Plea

se consult your Technical Service.

246

Care and maintenance

Advice

e and m

aintenance

Accessories and modifications

to the vehicle

Accessories, replacement of parts and

modifications

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high

and

ard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts,

and before making technical changes to your

vehicle, we recommend that you consult your

Technical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide

you with the latest information about the

use, legal requirements and recommenda-

tions from the manufacturer regarding acces-

sories and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved

Accessories

and SEAT Approved Spare

Parts

. This way, SEAT can guarantee that

the product in question is suitable, reliable

and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the

necessary experience and facilities to ensure

that parts are correctly and professionally in-

stalled.

Despite a continuous observation of the mar-

ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,

safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has

not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot

assume responsibility for any non-genuine

parts used, even if these parts have been ap-

proved by an official testing agency or are

covered by an official approval certificate.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct

impact on the driver's control of the vehicle,

such as a cruise control system or electroni-

cally-controlled suspension, must be ap-

proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and

bear the e mark (the European Union's au-

thorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fitted

which do not serve to control the vehicle it-

self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or

ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark

(European Union manufacturer conformity

declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holders

or cup hol

ders, should never be fitted on the

covers, or within the working range, of the

airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in-

jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-

cordin

g to our specifications. Unauthorised

modifications to the electronic components

or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc-

tions. Due to the way the electronic compo-

nents are linked together in networks, other

indirect systems may be affected by the

faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead

to excessive wear of components, and also

invalidate your vehicle registration docu-

ments.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable

for any damage caused by modifications

and/or work incorrectly performed. For this

reason, we recommend having all work per-

formed by a SEAT Technical Service using

SEAT

Original Spare Parts.

WARNING

Any type of work or modification performed

incorrectly

on your vehicle can lead to mal-

functions and can cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office equip-

ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

etrofit installations of radio transmitters

in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT

generally authorises in-vehicle installations

247

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

of approved types of radio transmitters provi-

ded th

at:

●

The aeri

is installed correctly.

●

The aerial is installed on the exterior of the

vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-

er with non-reflective aerial trimming).

●

The effective transmitting power does not

exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-

shop will be able to inform you about options

for installing and operating radio transmitters

with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio

equipment might interfere with the electron-

ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.

This may be due to:

●

No external aerial.

●

External aerial incorrectly installed.

●

Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable

mobile telephones or radio equipment inside

the vehicle without a properly installed exter-

nal aerial ›››

se note also that the maximum range of

the equipment can only be achieved with an

external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private

equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-

ded the equipment cannot interfere with the

driver's immediate control of the vehicle and

that any such equipment carries the  mark.

Any retrofit equipment that could influence

the driver's control of the vehicle must have a

type approval for your vehicle and must carry

the e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment which

is oper

ated inside the vehicle without a prop-

erly installed external aerial can create exces-

sive magnetic fields that could cause a health

hazard.

Note

●

The post

erior fitting of electric and elec-

tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li-

cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the

vehicle registration document under certain

circumstances.

●

Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-

erating instructions.

Care and cleaningTaking care of

our

ehicle

General notes

Vehicle maintenance

Regu

lar care and washing help to maintain

the value of the vehicle. This may also be one

of the requirements for acknowledging war-

ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro-

sion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your vehicle against

the harmful effects of the environment is

through correct maintenance and frequent

washing. The longer substances such as in-

sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree

sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or

road salt and other aggressive materials re-

main on the vehicle, the more damage they

do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for

instance in strong sunlight, further intensify

the corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the

roads, it is important to have the underside

of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car-care products are available in your Tech-

nical Services. Keep the product instructions

until you have used them up.

248

Care and maintenance

WARNING

●

Car-c

are products can be toxic. Because of

this, they must always be kept closed in their

original container. Keep them out of the reach

of children. Failure to comply could result in

poisoning.

●

Always read and observe the instructions

and warnings on the package before using

car-care products. Improper use could cause

health problems or damage the vehicle. The

use of certain products may produce noxious

vapours; they should be used in well ventila-

ted areas.

●

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail

varnish remover or other volatile fluids.

These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of

fire and explosion.

●

Before washing your vehicle, or carrying

out any maintenance, switch the engine off,

apply the handbrake firmly and remove the

key from the ignition.

CAUTION

Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if

the surf

ace of the vehicle is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes.

This could damage the paintwork or the win-

dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust

with plenty of water.

For the sake of the environment

●

When purc

hasing car care products, try to

select ones that are not harmful to the envi-

ronment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste. Observe the disposal information on

the package.

Care of the vehicle exterior

Automatic

car wash tunnel

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the

ehic

e can normally be washed without

problems in an automatic car wash tunnel.

However, the paintwork wear depends to a

large extent on the kind of the car wash tun-

nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and

the type of cleaning and preservative prod-

ucts.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to

take the usual precautions (close the win-

dows, the roof and rear-view mirrors). There

is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as

spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,

etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash

tunnel operator first.

After washing, the brakes could take some

time to respond as the brake discs and pads

could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry”

the brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can

reduce br

aking effectiveness. Risk of acci-

dent.

Hand-washing

Vehicle washing

–

First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa-

–

lean your vehicle from top to bottom with

a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very

light pressure.

–

Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean

water.

–

Special car shampoo should only be used

for very stubborn dirt.

–

Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last,

using a different sponge or glove.

–

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.

–

Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha-

mois leather.

–

In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals

and their surfaces to prevent them from

249

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

ter washing the vehicle

–

After washing, avoid sudden and sharp

braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-

al times.

WARNING

●

Wash

your vehicle with the ignition switch-

ed off.

●

Protect your hands and arms from cuts on

sharp metal edges when cleaning the under-

body, the inside of the wheel housings etc.

Risk of injury.

●

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can

reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-

dent.

CAUTION

●

Never remo

ve dirt, mud or dust if the vehi-

cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or

sponge for cleaning purposes. This could

scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi-

cle.

●

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:

when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not

direct water into the lock cylinders or the

gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof.

Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment

To protect the environment, the vehicle

should be w

ashed only in specially provided

wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste

water from entering the sewer system. In

some places, washing vehicles outside wash

bays is prohibited.

Note

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the vehicle with a high pres-

e c

leaner

Be particularly careful when using a high

sure cleaner!

–

Always observe the instructions for the

high-pressure cleaner, particularly those

concerning the pressure and the spraying

distance.

–

Increase the spraying distance for soft ma-

terials and painted bumpers.

–

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-

move ice or snow from windows

›››

page 251.

–

Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat-

ing jets”)

›››

–

er w

ashing, avoid sudden and sharp

braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-

al times ››› page 181.

WARNING

●

Never wa

sh tyres with a concentrated jet

(“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying

distances and short cleaning times, damage

can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac-

cident.

●

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can

reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-

dent.

CAUTION

●

Do not use w

ater hotter than +60°C

(+140°F). This could damage the vehicle.

●

To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf-

ficient distance from sensitive materials such

as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma-

terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain-

ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer

the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the

wear on the material.

Factory-fitted adhesive sheets

The following indications should be taken in-

o ac

ount to avoid damaging adhesive

sheets:

●

Do not use high pressure cleaners.

250

Care and maintenance

●

Do not

se s

crapers to remove ice or snow

from the sheets.

●

Do not polish the adhesive sheets.

●

Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.

●

It is preferable to wash them with a soft

sponge and gentle neutral soap.

Camera sensors and lenses

●

Use a small brush to remove snow and a

de-icer spr

ay to remove ice.

●

Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-

uct and a soft, dr

y cloth.

●

Moisten the camera lens using a standard

alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and

clean the lens with a dry cloth.

CAUTION

●

When you c

lean the vehicle with a pressure

washer:

–

Stay a suitable distance from the sensors

on the front and rear bumpers.

–

Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-

rounding area with the pressure washer.

●

Never use warm or hot water to remove

snow and ice from the reverse camera lens,

as it could crack the lens.

●

Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the

lens.

Vehicle paint maintenance

Regular waxing protects the paintwork.

You need to ap

ply wax to your vehicle if water

does not form small drops and run off the

paintwork when it is clean.

Good quality hard wax products are available

at your Technical Service.

Regular wax applications help to protect the

paintwork from environmental contaminants

››› page 248. It is also effective in protecting

against minor scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the

vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-

tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least

twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has

its shine, and the gloss cannot be

brought back by applying wax. Polishing

products can be purchased in your Technical

Service.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if

the polish used does not contain wax com-

pounds to seal the paint

›››

page 251, Vehicle

paint maintenance.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the paintwork:

●

Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-

ted par

ts with a matt finish or on plastic

parts.

●

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or

dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts,

an them with approved solvent-free plas-

tic cleaning and care products.

CAUTION

●

The use of li

quid air freshener directly over

the air vents of the vehicle may damage the

plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spil-

led.

●

Cleaning products which contain solvents

will damage the material.

Cleaning of windows and mirrors

Cleaning windows

–

Moisten the windows with commercially

able, alcohol based glass cleaner.

–

Dry the windows with a clean chamois

leather or a lint-free cloth.

251

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Removing snow

–

Use a small brush to remove snow from the

indo

s and mirrors.

Removing ice

–

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry

the windows. The chamois leathers used on

painted surfaces are not suitable to clean

windows because they are soiled with wax

deposits which could smear the windows.

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove

ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one

direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to

clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos-

its off.

Wax deposits can only be removed with a

special cleaner available at your Technical

Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen

could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add-

ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to

the windscreen washer fluid reservoir pre-

vents wiper blades from juddering, but the

wax deposits are not removed.

CAUTION

●

Never use w

arm or hot water to remove

snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This

could cause the glass to crack!

●

The heating el

ement for the rear window is

located on the inner side of the window. To

prevent damage, do not put stickers over the

heating elements on the inside of the win-

dow.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades improve visibility.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt

from the wind

screen wiper blades.

2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind-

scr

een wiper blades. Use a sponge or a

cloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Care of rubber seals

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will

not

eez

e so quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt

from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub-

ber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.

will remain pliable and last longer if they are

treated with a suitable rubber care product

from time to time (for example silicone

spray).

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre-

mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be

easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked

after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinder

The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win-

ter.

o de-ice the lock cylinders you should only

use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive

properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.

2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.

thi

does not provide satisfying results, use

a specialist chrome cleaning product.

Chrome cleaning products will remove stains

from the surface.

CAUTION

To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

●

Never use an abrasive cleaning product on

chrome.

●

Do not

clean or polish chrome parts in a

sandy or dusty environment.

252

Care and maintenance

Steel wheel rims

–

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a

separat

e sponge.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake

dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel

rims should be repaired before starting to

rust.

WARNING

●

Never wa

sh tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even

at large spraying distances and short clean-

ing times, damage can occur to the tyres.

This may cause an accident.

●

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can

reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-

dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden

and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak-

ing several times ››› page 181, Braking ca-

pacity and braking distance.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

–

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy

wheel

–

se an ac

id free detergent to clean the

wheel rims.

Every 3 months

–

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre-

serve their appearance. If road salt and brake

dust are not often removed, the aluminium

finish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy

wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive agents should

not be used for maintaining the rims. If the

protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying

stones, the damaged area should be re-

paired immediately.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ›››

in Steel

wheel rims on p

age 253.

Vehicle underbody protection

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it

om c

hemic

al and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when

driving. We recommend that you check the

protective coating under the body and on the

running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be-

fore and after the winter season.

We recommend that you go to your Technical

Service to carry out repair work and addition-

al anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion

coatin

gs to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-

verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-

tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the

engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of

fire.

Cleaning engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine

compar

tment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of

the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat-

ment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly im-

portant in winter when the vehicle is fre-

quently driven on salted roads. To prevent

the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en-

gine compartment should be thoroughly

cleaned before and after winter.

Technical Services have the proper products

for cleaning and preservation as well as the

necessary workshop equipment. For this rea-

son, we recommend having this work per-

formed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually re-

moved if the engine compartment is cleaned

with grease removing solutions, or if you

253

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

have the engine cleaned. On commissioning

thi

ork, ensure that all surfaces, seams,

joints and components in the engine com-

partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

●

When workin

g in the engine compartment,

always observe the safety warnings

››› page 263.

●

Before opening the bonnet, switch the en-

gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al-

ways remove the key from the ignition.

●

Allow the engine to cool before you clean

the engine compartment.

●

Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un-

derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without

protecting your hands and arms. You may cut

yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure

to comply could result in injury.

●

Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system

may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-

dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden

and sharp braking.

●

Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-

ture-controlled and could start automatically,

even when the key is removed from the igni-

tion!

For the sake of the environment

Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed

when the engine is

washed. The polluted wa-

ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For

this reason, engine washing should be car-

ried out only by a specialised workshop or a

petrol

station.

Caring for the vehicle interior

Screen f

or the radio/Easy Connect*

and control panel*

The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth

and a profe

ssionally available “LCD cleaner”.

Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the

cleaning fluid.

The Easy Connect control panel* should first

be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes

into the device or between the keys and

housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the

Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth

dampened with water and washing-up liquid.

CAUTION

●

To avoid s

cratching the screen, do not wipe

the display with a dry cloth.

●

To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid

goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.

Cleaning plastic parts and the dash

anel

–

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic

and the dash panel.

–

If this does not provide satisfactory results,

use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning

product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag

module s

urface with cleaners containing sol-

vents. Solvents cause the surface to become

porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts

could become detached and cause injuries.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents will

damag

e the material.

Cleaning wooden trim*

–

Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois-

ened c

ean cloth.

–

If this does not provide satisfactory results,

use a gentle soap solution.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents will

damag

e the material.

Cleaning textile covers and trim parts

Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door

trim) shou

d be c

leaned regularly with a

254

Care and maintenance

vacuum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt

whic

h c

ld otherwise be rubbed into the

textile material during use. Do not use steam

cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt

deeper into the textile material.

Normal cleaning

We recommend that you use a soft sponge or

a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre

cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes

on floor coverings and mats, as other textile

surfaces could become damaged.

In the case of normal surface dirt you can use

a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the

foam on the textile surface and to work it into

the material lightly. However, make sure that

the textile material does not become soaking

wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-

sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and

vacuum off any residue once the surface is

completely dry.

Cleaning stains

Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit

juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-

cate fabrics. This solution should be applied

with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-

move, a washing paste can be applied direct-

ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.

The surface will then have to be wiped with

clear water to remove any residue left by the

paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge

and then dab the stain with an absorbent

cloth.

Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a

cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-

move the soap with water (wet sponge).

A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove

grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then

dab the dissolved grease or colour particles

off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You

may also have to treat the stain once more

using washing paste and water.

If the covers or textile trim panels are badly

soiled we recommend that you have them

cleaned by a professional cleaning company

with a shampoo and spray.

Note

Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage

the seat upho

lstery. Make sure they are

closed.

Cleaning leather*

Normal cleaning

–

Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-

er and w

ipe o

ver the leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

–

More stubborn dirt can be removed using a

mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two

tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

and a cloth.

–

Do not let the water soak through the leath-

er or soak into the seams.

–

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

Leather maintenance

–

The leather should be treated twice a year

with a special leather-care product, availa-

ble at Technical Services.

–

Apply these products very sparingly.

–

Then wipe off with a soft cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve

the genuine qualities of this natural product.

Due to the natural properties of the specially

selected hides employed, the finished leath-

er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,

etc. so a degree of care is required in every-

day use and when looking after the leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can

scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi-

cle is under solar radiation for long periods,

the leather should be protected to prevent it

from fading. However, slight colour variations

in high-quality natural leather are normal.

CAUTION

●

Do not use so

lvents, wax polish, shoe

cream, spot removers or similar products on

leather.

255

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

●

To avoid d

amage, stubborn stains should

be removed by a specialised workshop.

Cleaning Alcantara upholstery*

Removing dust and dirt

–

Moisten a cloth just a lit

tle and wipe down

the seat covers.

Removing stains

–

Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-

luted whit

e spirits.

–

Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and

work inwards.

–

Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.

Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-

cantara seat covers.

You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can

scratch and damage the surface. If the car is

left standing in the sun for long periods, Al-

cantara leather should be protected against

direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-

ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-

mal use.

CAUTION

●

Do not use so

lvents, wax polish, shoe

cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-

ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.

●

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should

be removed by a specialised workshop.

●

On no account use brushes, hard sponges

or similar utensils.

Cleaning seat belts

A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all

belts

regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

–

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll

it.

–

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap

solution.

–

Allow it to dry.

–

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

If large stains form on the belts, the automat-

ic belt retractor will not work correctly.

WARNING

●

Do not use c

hemical cleaning agents on the

seat belts, as this can impair the strength of

the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not

come into contact with corrosive fluids.

●

Check the c

ondition of the seat belts at reg-

ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web-

bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle

of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must

be replaced by a specialised workshop.

●

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat

belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-

moved or modified in any way.

CAUTION

After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-

let

ely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the

belt retractors could become damaged.

256

Checking and refilling levels

uel

ling

Refuelling

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 57

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-

rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the

tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond

this point, as this will fill the expansion

chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi-

tions are warm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-

en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank

flap.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-

brids

Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-

rol until the control lamp switches off  and

then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-

sary to ensure that the system works proper-

ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-

ing with petrol.

WARNING

●

Fuel i

s highly flammable and can cause se-

rious burns and other injuries.

–

Never smoke or c

ome into contact with

sparks when filling the fuel tank of the

vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel.

This is an explosion hazard.

–

Follow legal requirements for the use of

spare fuel canisters.

–

For safety reasons we do not recommend

carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-

cle. The canister could be damaged in an

accident and leak.

●

If, in exceptional circumstances, you have

to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe

the following:

–

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside

the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic

charge could build up during filling, caus-

ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could

cause an explosion. Always place the

canister on the ground to fill it.

–

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of

the canister as far as possible.

–

If the spare fuel canister is made of met-

al, the filling nozzle must be in contact

with the canister during filling. This

helps prevent an electrostatic charge

building up.

–

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are

explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION

●

Fuel s

pills should be removed from the

paintwork immediately.

●

Never run the t

ank completely dry. Irregular

fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result,

unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert-

er and cause damage.

●

When filling the fuel tank after having run it

completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-

gine the ignition must be switched on for at

least 30 seconds before starting the engine.

Subsequently, when you start the engine it

may take longer than normal to start firing

(up to one minute). This is due to the fact that

the fuel system has to purge itself of air be-

fore starting.

For the sake of the environment

Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-

matic fi

ller nozzle has switched off, this may

cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for the

manual

release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-

sary, request assistance from specialised per-

sonnel.

257

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 227 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth

er mouth retainer

Before r

efuelling, the engine and the igni-

tion, mo

ile telephone and heating must be

switched off separately ›››

d the instructions on how to use the natu-

ral gas pump carefully.

The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with

liquefied natural gas (LNG) ›››

. Before refu-

lin

g w

ith natural gas, make sure you add

the appropriate type of fuel ››› page 258.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel

tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

●

Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the

central locking button  situated on the driv-

er door ››› page 134.

●

Press on the rear area of the flap and open

it.

Refuelling

Special feature: if the ambient temperature is

very high, the natural gas pump protection

against overheating disconnects this auto-

matically.

●

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth

››› Fig. 227

●

Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas

er mouth.

●

The fuel tank will be full when the pump

compressor automatically cuts the supply.

●

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,

press the button on the pump to stop the

flow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Check that the gas filler mouth retainer

is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces-

, place it in the filler mouth again.

●

Insert the plug in the filler mouth.

●

Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it

click into place.

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flam-

mabl

e substance. Incorrect handling of the

natural gas can cause accidents serious

burns and other injuries.

●

Befor

e refuelling with natural gas, engage

the filling mouth correctly. If you can smell

gas, stop refuelling immediately.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied

atur

al gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be

added under any circumstances. Liquefied

natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to

explode, resulting in serious injury.

Note

●

The fillin

g nozzles of natural gas pumps

can differ in the way they are operated. If you

do not know, ask a qualified employee at the

petrol station to do the refuelling.

●

Noises heard when refuelling are normal

and do not indicate the presence of a fault in

the system.

●

The vehicle natural gas system is prepared

both for refuelling with a small compressor

(slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast re-

fuel) in natural gas service stations.

Fuel

s of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the

uel

ank flap.

258

Checking and refilling levels

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

er and must only be run on unleaded pet-

rol. The petrol must comply with European

Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN

51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-

fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of

10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-

ated by their octane rating (RON).

The following titles appear on the corre-

sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-

tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-

rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane

petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95

octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimum

of 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency you

may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In

this case only use moderate engine speeds

and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon

as possible.

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-

tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octane

petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-

tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency you

may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In

this case only use moderate engine speeds

and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon

as possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-

iour, power and service life of the engine.

This is why the petrol you use should carry

suitable additives already included by the

petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-

tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

fuel system clean and prevent deposits from

building up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-

tives is not available or engine problems

arise, the necessary additives must be added

when refuelling ›››

Not

petrol additives have been shown to

be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-

ditives may cause significant damage to the

engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-

ditives should never be used. Metal additives

may also be contained in petrol additives for

improving anti-detonation ratings or octane

ratings ›››

T r

ecommends “genuine Volkswagen

Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.

These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-

ers, where information on how to use them

can also be obtained.

CAUTION

●

Do not ref

uel if the filler indicates that the

fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Using them may damage the

engine!

●

Never refuel with fuels containing a large

proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).

This could damage the fuel system.

●

Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or

fuel containing other metal additives would

seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic

converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been ap-

proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-

knock additives may contain metal additives

that could seriously damage the engine or

the catalytic converter. These additives must

not be used.

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with an

octane rating lower than the correct grade for

the engine.

Note

●

You ma

y use petrol with a high octane num-

ber than the one recommended for your en-

gine.

●

In those countries where unleaded petrol is

not available, you may refuel with a fuel with

a low lead content.

259

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside of

the fuel t

ank flap.

We recommend the use of diesel fuel which

complies to European standard EN 590. If

diesel fuel which meets European standard

EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number

(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine

is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-

phur content of the fuel must be below 50

parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it

is more difficult to start the engine. For this

reason, petrol stations in some countries al-

so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity

when cold (winter-grade diesel).

CAUTION

●

The vehic

le is not designed for the use of

FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would

be damaged if you used biodiesel.

●

Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called

“thinners”, petrol or similar additives with

diesel fuel.

●

If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be

necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-

quently than is specified in the Maintenance

Programme. We recommend having this done

by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed

to collect in the filter, this can cause engine

perform

ance problems.

Natural gas

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid

form, ad

dition to others.

Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result of

heavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore its

volume is considerably reduced compared

with compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehi-

cles with a natural gas engine, liquefied nat-

ural gas cannot be directly refilled, as the gas

would expand excessively in the vehicle gas

tank.

Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine

must only be refuelled using compressed

natural gas ›››

Nat

l gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H and

L depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and

inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content

than type L. The higher the heating power of

the natural gas, the lower the consumption

will be.

However, the heating power and the propor-

tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-

tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-

hicle consumption can also vary when using

a single type of gas only.

The engine management automatically

adapts to the natural gas used according to

its quality. Therefore, different quality gases

can be mixed in the tank, without the need

for comprehensive draining before applying a

different quality gas.

Updated information relating to natural gas

quality is displayed on the instrument panel

›››



page 37.

Natural gas and safety

If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a

leak ›››

●

Stop the vehicle immediately.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the doors to appropriately ventilate

the

ehic

le.

●

Extinguish cigarettes immediately.

●

Move away from the vehicle or switch off

objects that may cause sparks or a fire.

●

If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-

ue driving!

●

Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault

repaired.

Regular checks of the natural gas system

The natural gas tanks may be damaged or

corroded by external factors. The walls of the

260

Checking and refilling levels

gas tanks are weakened by deformations,

e or corrosion. As a result, the tanks

could burst and result in serious injuries or

even death. For this reason, the vehicle own-

er must have a specialised workshop check

(visual check) the gas system every 4 years

at least. The vehicle owner must have a spe-

cialised workshop replace the natural gas

tanks before they reach the end of their serv-

ice life. For further information about the

service life of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer

service or a specialised workshop

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in the

vehicl

e or when refuelling can cause serious

injuries.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

●

Leave the danger zone.

●

If necessary, warn the emergency services.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied

natur

al gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be

added under any circumstances. Liquefied

natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to

explode, resulting in serious injury.

WARNING

Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can result

in serious injur

y or even death.

●

Have the nat

ural gas deposits checked at

least every 4 years (visual check).

●

Natural gas tanks have a limited service

life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced

when required. You can obtain further infor-

mation about this at SEAT dealers or special-

ised workshops.

WARNING

If the vehicle underbody touches the ground

or in the ev

ent of

a rear collision, there could

be damage to the natural gas tanks.

●

Check whether there is a smell of gas.

●

If you notice a smell of gas, take the vehicle

to a specialised workshop immediately and

have the natural gas system checked.

Note

Have the natural gas system checked regular-

ly by

a specialised workshop, according to

the Maintenance Programme.

AdBlue

Inf

orm

ation on AdBlue

The consumption of AdBlue

depend

our personal driving style, the temperature

of the system and on the outdoor tempera-

ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue

freezes at temperatures of -11°C

(+13°F). The system has heating elements

that guarantee its operation even at low tem-

peratures.

The AdBlue

tank level capacity is approxi-

mately 10.4 litres.

The AdBlue

tank should never be empty.

When the distance to empty drops below

2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue

tank

will appear on the dash panel display

››› page 262. If this information is ignored,

later on it will not be possible to re-start the

engine. If this warning does not appear, it is

not necessary to refill the AdBlue

tank.

AdBlue

is a registered brand of the German

Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)

and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel

Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION

Filling the AdBlue

tank e

xcessively can

cause damage to the tank.

261

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 228 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling

ark

the

vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi-

cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-

ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb,

the level indicator may not detect the load

properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue

levels

appears on the dash panel display, fill at

least the minimum amount required (approx.

5 litres). Only after adding this amount will

the system detect that AdBlue

has been

added and you will be able to start the en-

gine again. The maximum amount that can

be refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not

switched off during refilling, the warning to

refill may continue to appear on the instru-

ment panel display.

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 228.

●

Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-

ti-clockwise direction.

●

Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-

tions, indicated on the refill bottle.

●

Check the expiry date.

●

Remove the cap of the refill bottle.

●

Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill-

er neck vertically and screw the bottle on by

hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.

●

Press the refill bottle in the direction of the

filler neck and hold it in this position.

●

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle

have been poured into the AdBlue

tank. Do

not compress or break the bottle!

●

Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc-

tion and gently pull it upwards ›››

●

The AdBlue

ank

s full when no more liq-

uid comes out of the bottle.

●

Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-

tion until it is tightly closed.

●

Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving

●

After refilling the tank, only switch on the

ignition.

●

Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-

onds for the system to detect the fluid load.

●

Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds

before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-

duction.

●

Open the tank cap.

●

Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise

››› Fig. 228.

●

Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the

first time.

●

Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise

until you hear a click.

WARNING

AdBlue

should on

ly be stored in the original

container, which should be tightly closed and

kept in a safe place.

●

Never keep AdBlue

in empty food contain-

ers, bottles or other similar containers. Other

people may confuse it for other products.

●

Keep AdBlue

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

●

When refil

ling, the nozzle grip should be

aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will

not connect automatically.

262

Checking and refilling levels

●

Do not try

to add any more additive after

the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The

AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could

spill out.

●

Only use AdBlue

that complies with ISO

22241-1. Only use original containers.

●

Never mix AdBlue

with water, fuel or addi-

tives. Any type of damage caused by such a

mixture will not be covered by the warranty.

●

Never pour AdBlue

into the fuel tank. This

could result in engine damage.

●

Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehi-

cle. If there is a leak (due to temperature

changes or damage to the bottle), the

AdBlue

may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment-

friendly manner

Note

You can buy refill bottles that are adequate

for AdBlue

use at

SEAT dealerships.

Working in the engine compart-

ment

Saf

ety

not

es for work in the engine

compartment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 17

Before starting any work on the engine or in

the engine compartment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition.

2. Ap

ply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec-

tor lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet

›››

page 264.

You should not do any work in the engine

compartment unless you know exactly how to

carry out the jobs and have the correct tools!

Have the work carried out by a specialised

workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-

ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries,

are under constant development. SEAT pro-

vides a constant flow of information to Tech-

nical Services concerning modifications. For

this reason, we recommend you have service

fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni-

cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-

structions ››› page 247. The engine compart-

ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ›››

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine com-

partment, e.

g. checking and refilling fluids,

involves the danger of injury and burns, acci-

dents and even fire.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam,

smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of

sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or

coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to

cool before carefully opening the bonnet.

●

Switch off the engine and remove the key

from the ignition.

●

Apply the handbrake and move the gear

lever to neutral or selector lever to position P.

●

Keep children away from the vehicle.

●

Never touch hot engine parts. There is a

risk of burns.

●

Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a

hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.

●

Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri-

cal system, particularly at the points where

the jump leads are attached ›››



page 72.

The battery could explode.

●

Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-

ture controlled and could start automatically,

even when the engine has been switched off

and the key removed from the ignition!

263

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

●

Never co

ver the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of

fire!

●

Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-

pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the

coolant is hot, the cooling system will be

pressurised!

●

Protect face, hands and arms by covering

the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect

against escaping coolant and steam.

●

Always make sure you have not left any ob-

jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the

engine compartment.

●

If you have to work underneath the vehicle,

you must use suitable stands additionally to

support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-

dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se-

curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

●

If any work has to be performed when the

engine is started or with the engine running,

there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety

risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive

belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from

the high-voltage ignition system. You should

also observe the following:

–

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

–

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and

long hair do not get trapped in rotating

engine parts. Danger of death. Before

starting any work remove jewellery, tie

back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit-

ting clothes.

–

Never acc

elerate with a gear engaged

without taking the necessary precau-

tions. The vehicle could move, even if the

handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

●

If work has to be carried out on the fuel

system or on electrical components, you

must observe the following safety notes in

addition to the above warnings:

–

Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network. The vehicle must be

unlocked when this is done, otherwise

the alarm will be triggered.

–

Do not smoke.

–

Never work near naked flames.

–

Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could

sudden

ly open while driving leaving the driv-

er without visibility. This could result in a se-

rious accident.

●

After closing the bonnet, always check that

it is properly secured by the locking mecha-

nism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet

must be flush with the surrounding body pan-

els.

●

While driving, if you notice that the bonnet

is not correctly closed then stop immediately

and close it correctly.

●

Only open and close the bonnet when there

is nobody within its range.

CAUTION

When topping up service fluids, make sure

not to mi

stake them. Using the wrong fluids

could cause serious malfunctions and engine

damage!

For the sake of the environment

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-

ronment. F

or this reason you should make

regular checks on the ground underneath

your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other

fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci-

alised workshop.

Opening the bonnet

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 17

The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-

cle.

Before opening the bonnet ensure that the

windscreen wipers are in rest position.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam,

smoke or coo

lant escaping from the engine

compartment.

264

Checking and refilling levels

●

Wait u

ntil no more steam, smoke or coolant

is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully

open the bonnet.

●

When working in the engine compartment,

always observe the safety warnings

››› page 263.

Closing the bonnet

–

Slightly lift the bonnet.

–

ase the bonnet stay and replace it in its

support.

–

At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall

so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press

downwards. Open it again and let it fall as

mentioned above.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could

open while

you are driving and completely

obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci-

dent.

●

After closing the bonnet, always check that

it is properly secured. The bonnet must be

flush with the surrounding body panels.

●

If y

ou notice that the bonnet latch is not se-

cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the

vehicle immediately and close the bonnet

properly. Risk of accident.

265

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Checking levels

Fig. 229 Diagram for the location of the various ele-

ments.

From time to time, the levels of the different

fluid

in the

vehicle must be checked. Never

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious

damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery

Windscreen washer reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluids

are carried out on the components men-

tioned above. These operations are descri-

bed in ›

›

page 263.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc-

tions and restrictions on the technical speci-

fications as of ››› page 281.

Note

The layout of parts may vary depending on

the engine.

Engine oil

Gener

notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade

oil th

at can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-

tial for the correct operation of the engine

and its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that comply

with VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in

the following page should appear on the con-

tainer of the service oil; when the container

displays the specific standards for petrol and

266

Checking and refilling levels

diesel engines together, it means that the oil

an be u

sed f

or both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicated

in the Maintenance Programme, be per-

formed by a technical service or specialised

workshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engine

are listed in the ›››



page 59.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife

service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-

tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of the

Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,

this means that your vehicle has the LongLife

service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2,

QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de-

pendent on the time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife service

intervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel-

oped which, depending on the characteris-

tics and individual driving profiles, enable

the extension of the oil change service (Long-

Life service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending the

service intervals, it must only be used ob-

serving the following indications:

●

Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-

tervals.

●

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the

engine oil level is too low ››› page 268 and

LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to

top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-

vals ›››



page 59 (up to a maximum of 0.5

litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife

service interval” or it has been disabled (by

request), you may use oils for fixed service

intervals, which also appear in

›››



page 59. In this case, your vehicle

must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1

year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever

comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-

gramme.

●

In exceptional circumstances, if the engine

oil level is too low ››› page 268 and you can-

not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,

you can add a small quantity of oil conform-

ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3

(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-

sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whether

your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate

filter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash

formation, may be used in diesel engines

equipped with particulate filter. Using other

types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-

tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-

fore:

●

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

●

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the

engine oil level is too low ››› page 268,

Checking engine oil level and you cannot ob-

tain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can

use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming

to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,

VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification

(up to 0.5 l).

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding an

engine oil

that conforms to the correspond-

ing VW specifications and recommend keep-

ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-

gine oil will always be available for a top-up if

needed.

Warning lamp

If this warning lamp  i

ed it indicates

that the engine oil pressure is too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is

accompanied by three audible warnings,

switch off the engine and check the oil level.

If necessary, add more oil

›››

page 268.

267

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil

is correct, stop driving. Do not even run

the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical as-

sistance.

Checking oil level

If the warning lamp is yellow  the engine

oil level should be checked as soon as possi-

ble. Top up the oil at the next opportunity

››› page 268.

Oil level sensor faulty*

If the  yellow warning lamp flashes, take

the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have

the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is

advisable to check the oil level every time

you refuel.

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 230 Engine oil dipstick.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 58

Checking oil level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until

the operating temperature is reached and

then stop.

–

Wait for about two minutes.

–

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with

a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it

in as far as it will go.

–

Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-

el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-

sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil

consumption is likely to be higher for the first

5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level

must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-

bly when filling the tank and before a jour-

ney.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart-

ment or on the engine mu

st be carried out

cautiously.

●

When working in the engine compartment,

always observe the safety warnings

››› page 263.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area ›››

Fig. 230

, do

not st

art the engine. This could result in dam-

age to the engine and catalytic converter.

Contact a Technical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 58

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe

the warnings

›››

in Safety notes for work in

the en

gine c

omp

artment on page 263.

The position of the filler neck is shown in the

corresponding engine compartment image

›››

page 266.

Engine oil specification

›››



page 59.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil

comes

into contact with hot engine compo-

nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area ›››

Fig. 230

, do

not st

art the engine. This could result in dam-

age to the engine and catalytic converter.

Contact a specialised workshop.

268

Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above area

›››

Fig. 230

. Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the cr

ankcase breather and escape

into the atmosphere via the exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 58

The engine oil must be changed at the inter-

vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oil

changed by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in the

Maintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you

have the s

pecialist knowledge required!

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings ››› page 263, Safety notes

for work in the engine compartment.

●

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil

may cause burn injuries.

●

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such

as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.

●

When removing the oil drain plug with your

fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-

vent oil from running down your arm.

●

Wash

your skin thoroughly if it comes into

contact with engine oil.

●

Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil

must be stored in a safe place out of the

reach of children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

Thi

s c

ould result in engine damage. Any dam-

age caused by the use of such additives

would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment

●

Becau

se of disposal problems and the spe-

cial tools and specialist knowledge required,

we recommend that you have the engine oil

and filter changed by a Technical Service.

●

Never pour oil down drains or into the

ground.

●

Use a suitable container when draining the

used oil. It must be large enough to hold all

the engine oil.

Cooling system

ontr

l lamp

There is a fault if:

●

The  l

amp does not go out again after a

ew sec

onds.

●

The  lamp lights up or flashes while the

vehicle is running, and three acoustic warn-

ing signals are emitted ›››

Thi

ans that either the coolant level is too

low or the coolant temperature is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,

turn off the engine and wait for it to cool

down. Check the coolant level.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating

may be caused by a malfunction of the radia-

tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have

it replaced if necessary ››› page 104.

If the control lamp lights up again after driv-

ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicle

and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni-

cal Service or a specialised workshop.

Coolant level too low

If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,

turn off the engine and wait for it to cool

down. First check the coolant level. If the lev-

el of the coolant is below the “MIN” mark,

top up with coolant liquid ›››

WARNING

●

If y

our vehicle is immobilised for technical

reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf-

fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights

on and place the warning triangle.

269

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

●

Never open the bonnet if

you can see or

hear steam or coolant escaping from the en-

gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un-

til you can no longer see or hear escaping

steam or coolant.

●

The engine compartment is a dangerous

area. Before carrying out any work in the en-

gine compartment, switch off the engine and

allow it to cool down. Always note the corre-

sponding warnings ››› page 263.

Topping up coolant

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 59

Top up coolant when the level is below the

MIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

–

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

–

Switch the ignition off.

–

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-

pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the

coolant level should be between the marks.

When the engine is hot, it may be slightly

above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant

–

Wait for the engine to cool down.

–

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with

a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left

›››

–

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-

ant

in the e

ansion tank, otherwise you

could damage the engine. If there is no

coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-

tinue driving. You should obtain professio-

nal assistance ›››

–

If there is still some coolant in the expan-

ion t

ank, t

op up to the upper mark.

–

Top up with coolant until the level becomes

stable.

–

Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a

leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle

straight to a specialised workshop to have

the cooling system examined. If there are no

leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of

coolant can only occur if the coolant boils

and is forced out of the system as a result of

overheating.

WARNING

●

The coolin

g system is under pressure. Do

not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-

sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of

burns!

●

The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a

health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze

should be stored in the original container in a

safe place out of reach of children. Failure to

comply

could result in poisoning.

●

If working inside the engine compartment,

remember that, even when the ignition is

switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-

tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-

jury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-

ant

sys

tem, the engine may fail leading to se-

rious damage.

●

Please make sure that the percentage of

additive is correct with respect to the lowest

expected ambient temperature in the zone in

which the vehicle is to be used.

●

When the outside temperature is very low,

the coolant could freeze and the vehicle

would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-

ing would not work either and inadequately

dressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-

ant fluid if it

is empty! Air could enter the

cooling system. In this case, stop driving.

Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there

is a risk of engine damage.

270

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixed

with coo

lants which are not approved by

SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing

severe damage to the engine and the engine

cooling system.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-

ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates

that the G13 additive has been mixed with an

inadequate coolant. The coolant must be

changed as soon as possible if this is the

case! This could result in serious faults and

engine damage.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate the

envir

onment. If any fluids are spilled, they

should be collected and correctly disposed

of, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Chec

g the brake fluid level

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 60

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is

shown in the corresponding engine compart-

ment image

›››

page 266. The brake fluid res-

ervoir has a black and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the

vehicle is being used as the brake pads are

automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes down noticeably in

a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,

there may be a leak in the brake system. A

display on the instrument panel will warn you

if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 122.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake

fluid level, r

ead and observe the warnings

››› page 263.

Changing the brake fluid

The Maintenance Programme indicates brake

fluid c

ge intervals.

We recommend that you have the brake fluid

changed by a Technical Service.

Before opening the bonnet, please read and

follow the warnings

›››

in Safety notes for

ork

in the en

gine compartment on

page 263 in section “Safety notes for work-

ing in the engine compartment”.

In the course of time, brake fluid becomes

hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am-

bient air. If the water content in the brake flu-

id is too high, the brake system could cor-

rode. This also considerably reduces the boil-

ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the

brakes may then cause a vapour lock which

could impair the braking effect.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.

Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the

VW 501 14 standard.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid

in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv-

ice. If none is available, use only high-quality

brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one

that is not of a high quality may affect opera-

tion of the brake system and reduce its effec-

tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con-

tainer does not state that it complies with VW

501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or

USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-

pairs

the braking effect.

●

Before opening the bonnet to check the

brake fluid level, read and observe the warn-

ings ››› page 263.

●

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed

original container in a safe place out of reach

of children. There is a toxic risk.

●

Perform the brake fluid change according to

the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of

the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the

brake fluid is left in the brake system for too

271

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

long. This would seriously affect the effec-

tivenes

s of the brakes and the safety of the

vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.

ipe off an

y brake fluid from the paintwork

immediately.

For the sake of the environment

The brake pads and brake fluid must be col-

lected and di

sposed of according the applica-

ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service

network has the necessary equipment and

qualified personnel for collecting and dispos-

ing of this waste material.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Chec

g and topping up the wind-

screen washer reservoir water

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 60

The windscreen washer is supplied with liq-

uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in

the engine compartment. It has a capacity of

approximately 3 litres.

The tank is in the engine compartment.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-

screen and headlights. We recommend that

you always add a product to the windscreen

washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning

products exist on the market with high deter-

gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be

added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu-

tion instructions on the packaging.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart-

ment or on the engine mu

st be carried out

cautiously.

●

When working in the engine compartment,

always observe the safety warnings

››› page 263.

CAUTION

●

Never put

radiator anti-freeze or other addi-

tives into the windscreen washer fluid.

●

Always use approved windscreen cleansing

products diluted as per instructions. If you

use other washer fluids or soap solutions,

the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles

could become blocked.

Vehicle battery

ymbo

s and warnings on handling

the battery

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 60



Wear eye protection



Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec-

tive gloves and eye protection!



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-

hibited!



A highly explosive mixture of gases is released

when the battery is under charge.



Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury and

chemica

l burns as well as the risk of accident

or fire when working on the battery and the

electrical system:

●

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,

skin and clothing from acid and particles con-

taining lead.

●

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear

protective gloves and eye protection. Do not

tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through

the vents.

●

Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately

for several minutes with clear water. Then

272

Checking and refilling levels

seek medical care immediately. Neutralise

any ac

id splashes on the skin or clothing

with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen-

ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake,

consult a doctor immediately.

●

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are

prohibited. When handling cables and electri-

cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and

electrostatic charge. Never short the battery

terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in-

jury.

●

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-

leased when the battery is under charge. The

batteries should be charged in a well-ventila-

ted room only.

●

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

●

Before working on the electrical system,

you must switch off the engine, the ignition

and all electrical devices. The negative cable

on the battery must be disconnected. When a

light bulb is changed, you need only switch

off the light.

●

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock-

ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat-

tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

●

When disconnecting the battery from the

vehicle on-board network, disconnect first

the negative cable and then the positive ca-

ble.

●

Switch off all electrical devices before re-

connecting the battery. Reconnect first the

positive cable and then the negative cable.

Never reverse the polarity of the connections.

This could cause an electrical fire.

●

Never ch

arge a frozen battery, or one which

has thawed. This could result in explosions

and chemical burns. Always replace a battery

which has frozen. A flat battery can also

freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).

●

Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-

ted to the battery.

●

Never use a defective battery. This could

cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat-

tery immediately.

CAUTION

●

Nev

er dis

connect the battery if the ignition

is switched on or if the engine is running.

This could damage the electrical system or

electronic components.

●

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight

over a long period of time, as the intense ul-

traviolet radiation can damage the battery

housing.

●

If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi-

tions for a long period, protect the battery

from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam-

aged.

Warning lamp



It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp  lights

up when the igni-

tion i

switched on. It should go out when the

engine has started running.

If the control lamp  lights up while driving,

the alternator is no longer charging the bat-

tery. You should immediately drive to the

nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment

that is not absolutely necessary because this

will drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level should be checked regu-

arly

in high-mi

leage vehicles, in hot coun-

tries and in older batteries.

–

Open the bonnet and open the battery cov-

er at the front ›››

in Safety notes for work

in the en

gine c

omp

artment on page 263

›››

in Symbols and warnings on handling

the b

att

y on page 272. For vehicles with

the battery under the spare wheel, open

the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The

battery is located next to the spare wheel.

–

Check the colour display in the "magic eye"

on the top of the battery.

–

If there are air bubbles in the window, tap

the window gently until they disperse.

273

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

The position of the battery is shown in the

orr

sponding engine compartment diagram

››› page 266.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top

of the battery changes colour, depending on

the charge state and electrolyte level of the

battery.

There are two different colours:

●

Black: correct charge status.

●

Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must

be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop.

Charging or changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is

hec

ed during the inspection service. All

work on the vehicle battery requires special-

ist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-

hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-

tery should be checked by a specialised

workshop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have

problems starting the vehicle, the battery

might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-

ommend you have the vehicle battery

checked by a Technical Service where it will

be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a

specialised workshop only, as batteries us-

ing special technology have been installed

and they must be charged in a controlled en-

vironment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the

conditions of its location and has special

safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-

nance, performance and safety specifications

of your vehicle.

WARNING

●

We rec

ommend you use only maintenance-

free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which

comply with standards T 825 06 and

VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of

2001.

●

Before starting any work on the batteries,

you must read and observe the warnings

›››

in Symbols and warnings on handling

the batter

y on page 272.

For the sake of the environment

Batteries contain toxic substances such as

sulphuric

acid and lead. They must be dis-

posed of appropriately and must not be dis-

posed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheel

and ty

res

General notes

Avoiding damage

–

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obs

tacle, drive very slowly and at a right

angle.

–

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

–

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage

(cuts, cr

acks or blisters, etc.). Remove any

foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

–

When you remove the tyres, mark them in

order to maintain the same direction of ro-

tation when they are installed again.

–

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres

should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera-

bly dark location.

–

Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are

not fitted on wheel rims.

New tyres

New tyres must be run in

›››

page 199.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

274

Wheels

Concealed damage

Dam

e t

o tyres and rims is often not readily

visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the

vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate

that one of the tyres is damaged. They

should be checked immediately by a Techni-

cal Service.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-

rection of rotation on tyres with directional

tread. Always observe the direction of rota-

tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This

guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid

aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

WARNING

●

New tyre

s do not have maximum grip dur-

ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care-

fully to avoid possible accidents.

●

Never drive with damaged tyres. This may

cause an accident.

●

If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-

hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the

vehicle immediately and check the tyres for

damage.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Fig. 231 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

The maximum tyre pressure values are shown

on a s

tic

er stuck to the back of the left front

door frame

›››

Fig. 231.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure

from the sticker. The values refer to Sum-

mer tyres.

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked

when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised

pressures of warm tyres must not be re-

duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you

are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially impor-

tant at high speeds. The pressure should

therefore be checked at least once a month

and before starting a journey.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can

be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-

ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When

driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-

sumption may increase slightly.

WARNING

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too

low, c

ausing an accident!

●

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-

sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it

becomes too hot, and this can cause tread

separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe

the recommended tyre pressures.

●

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,

the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-

cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

275

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Service life of tyres

Fig. 232 Tyre tread wear indicators.

Fig. 233 Diagram for changing wheels.

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre

sure, driving style and fitting.

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have

1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”

››› Fig. 232, running across the tread. De-

pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of

them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-

ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-

ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-

sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-

mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm

(measured in the tread grooves next to the

tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re-

placed. Different figures may apply in export

countries ›››

e pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature

wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this

reason, the tyre pressure should be checked

at least once per month ››› page 275.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard

braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more

than the rear ones it is advisable to change

them around as shown ››› Fig. 233. The use-

ful life of all the tyres will then be about the

same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.

However, various factors encountered in nor-

mal driving can cause them to become unbal-

anced, which results in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as

they otherwise cause excessive wear on

steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must

also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-

cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the

vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you

should have the wheel alignment checked by

a Technical Service.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre

burs

ts during driving!

●

The tyres must be replaced at the latest

when the tread wear indicators are worn

››› page 276. Failure to follow this instruction

could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not

grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There

is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.

●

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-

sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it

to overheat. This can cause tread separation

and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always

observe the recommended tyre pressures.

●

If tyres show excessive wear, you should

have the running gear checked by a Technical

Service.

●

Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake

fluid away from tyres.

●

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-

placed immediately!

276

Wheels

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyre

s and wheel rims are an essential

part of the vehicle's design. Those approved

by SEAT are specially matched to the charac-

teristics of the vehicle and make a major con-

tribution to good road-holding and safe han-

dling

›››

es should be replaced at least in pairs and

not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both

rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-

ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-

rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-

tions marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/55 R16 91V

This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Tyre construction: Radial

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating code

Speed rating

195

The tyres could also have the following infor-

mation:

●

A direction of rotation symbol

●

“Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on

the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer

side of the wheel).

“DOT... 1116...” means, for example, that the

tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016.

We recommend that work on tyres and

wheels be carried out by a Technical Service.

They are familiar with the procedure and

have the necessary special tools and spare

parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-

posing of the old tyres.

Any technical service has full information on

the technical requirements when installing or

changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

WARNING

●

We rec

ommend that you use only wheels

and tyres which have been approved by SEAT

for your model. Failure to do so could impair

vehicle handling. Risk of accident.

●

Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are

more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-

tive, you should drive slowly and with extra

care at all times.

●

Never use old tyres or those with an un-

known “history of use”.

●

If wheel trims

are retrofitted, you must en-

sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not

restricted. This could cause the brake system

to overheat.

●

All four wheels must be fitted with radial

tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-

ence) and the same tread pattern.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of according to

the l

s in the country concerned.

Note

●

A SEA

T Service Centre should be consulted

to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-

ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT

can be fitted, and to find out about the com-

binations allowed between the front axle

(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

●

For technical reasons, it is not generally

possible to use the wheels from other vehi-

cles. This can also apply to wheels of the

same model. The use of wheels or tyres

which have not been approved by SEAT for

use with your model may invalidate the vehi-

cle's type approval for use on public roads.

●

If the spare tyre is not the same as the

tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.

winter tyres) you should only use the spare

tyre for a short period of time and drive with

extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as

soon as possible.

277

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

Wheel bolts

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the

rims. If differ

ent wheel rims are fitted, the

correct wheel bolts with the right length and

correctly shaped bolt heads must be used.

This ensures that wheels are fitted securely

and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use

wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it

is the same model ››› page 247.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly,

the wheel cou

ld become loose while driving.

Risk of accident.

●

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn

easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

●

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the

wheel.

●

If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-

ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and

threads can be damaged.

CAUTION

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel

bolts

for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Tyre monitoring indicator*

Fig. 234 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-

em b

utt

on.

The tyre monitoring system compares wheel

lutions alongside the wheel diameter of

each wheel, with help from the ESC. If the di-

ameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor-

ing indicator lights up . The wheel diame-

ter changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

●

The tyre structure is damaged.

●

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load.

●

The wheels of one axle are under more

pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or

on steep slopes).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

●

The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

●

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

After modifying tyre pressure or changing any

wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored

in the Easy Connect system with the



but-

on and the

TINGS

function button

›



page 34.

In vehicles without a radio, press and hold

down the   button ››› Fig. 234, with the

ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-

ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),

the tyre pressure must be increased to the

recommended value for a full load (see the

sticker on the back of the left front door

frame). If the tyre monitor system button is

pressed down, the new tyre pressures are

confirmed.

The tyre pressure control lamp  lights up

If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower

than the value set by the driver, then the tyre

pressure control lamp ›››

will light up.

WARNING

●

When the tyre pr

essure control lamp lights

up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any

sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop

when possible, and check the tyre pressure

and status.

●

The driver is responsible for maintaining

correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre

pressure must be regularly checked.

278

Wheels

●

Under cert

ain circumstances (e.g. when

driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-

tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp

may light up belatedly or may function incor-

rectly.

Note

If the battery is disconnected, the yellow

arning l

amp  lights up after turning the

ignition on. This should turn off after a brief

journey.

Spare wheel (temporary spare

wheel)*

ation and u

se of the temporary

spare wheel

Fig. 235 In the luggage compartment: re-

e the s

ubwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under

the floor p

anel

in the lug

gage compartment

and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel

If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of

pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only

intended for temporary use until you reach a

workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon

as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when

using the temporary spare wheel. This tem-

porary spare wheel has been specially de-

signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be

changed with the temporary spare wheel

from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-

ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo-

rary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must not

be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front

wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-

porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear

wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel

that you have removed and replace the punc-

tured front wheel with this wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with

the Beats Audio

sound system (6 speakers

with 1 subwoofer)*

Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel

(carpet) as follows:

●

Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.

●

Disconnect the cable for the subwoofer

speaker

›››

Fig. 235

●

Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise

●

Remove the s

woofer

speaker and the

spare wheel.

279

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Advice

●

When r

acing the spare wheel, place the

subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated

by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac-

ing forward.

●

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-

tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in

place.

WARNING

●

After fittin

g the temporary spare wheel,

check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

Failure to do so may cause an accident. The

tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left

front door frame.

●

Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)

when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on

the vehicle: risk of accident!

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and

fast cornering: risk of accident!

●

Never use more than one temporary spare

wheel at the same time, risk of accident.

●

No other type of tyre (normal summer or

winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact

temporary spare wheel rim.

Winter service

int

er ty

res

In winter conditions winter tyres will consid-

improve the vehicle's handling. The

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice

and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of

0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres-

sures specified for summer tyres (see the

sticker on the back of the left front door

frame).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizes

can be found in the vehicle's registration

documentation. Use only radial winter tyres.

All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta-

tion also apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the

tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code ››› page 277, New

tyres and wheels determines the following

speed limits for winter tyres: ›››

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

ax. 180 km/h (112 mph)

ax. 190 km/h (118 mph)

ax. 210 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed

the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have

an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of

view. These stickers are available from your

technical service. The legal requirements of

each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-

rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres

handle better when the roads are free of

snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the

notes on the spare wheel ››› page 277, New

tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must

not be ex

ceeded. Otherwise, this could lead

to damage and risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment

Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi-

ble.

They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

280

Technical specifications

Technical data

hnic

al specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation

alway

s takes precedence over the informa-

tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this

documentation are valid for the standard

model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-

ded in the Maintenance Programme or the

vehicle registration documents shows which

engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for

different models, for special vehicles and for

other countries.

Abbreviations used in the technical specifi-

cations

section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the diesel

combustion power.

RON

Research octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 236 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-

tment).

Fig. 237 Chassis number.

Chassis number

The

VIN i

located in the Easy Connect, on the

vehicle data sticker and under the wind-

screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 237. Addi-

tionally, the chassis number is located in the

engine compartment, on the right-hand side.

The number is engraved on the top side rail,

and is partially covered.

VIN in the Easy Connect

●

Select:



button > function button SET-

TINGS > Service > Chassis number.

Identific

ation p

ate

The identification plate is located on the rear

pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles

for certain export countries do not have an

identification plate.

281

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Vehicle data sticker

The d

a s

ticker is placed on the inside of the

spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear

cover of the Maintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on the

vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 236

Vehicle identification number (chassis

number)

Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine

type, finish, engine power and gearbox

type

Engine code, gearbox code, external

paint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can be

viewed on the instrument panel when the en-

gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

●

Hold down the button

0.0/SET

on the dash

anel

or more than 15 seconds.

Fuel consumption data

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om me

surements performed or supervised

by certified EU laboratories, according to the

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-

ation, see the P

lications Office of the Eu-

ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and

apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions depend

on the equipment/features of each individual

vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road

conditions, traffic conditions, environmental

conditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors

mentioned here, con

sumption values can dif-

fer from those calculated in the current Euro-

pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a

uel

ank filled to 90% capacity and without

optional extras. The figure quoted includes

75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittings

or retro-fitting accessories will increase the

weight of the vehicle

›››

WARNING

●

Plea

se note that the centre of gravity may

shift when transporting heavy objects; this

may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-

cident. Always adjust your speed and driving

style to suit road conditions and require-

ments.

●

Never exceed the gross axle weight rating

or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-

missible axle load or the permissible total

weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-

tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-

cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Trailer mode

ler weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-

ed are selected in intensive trials accord-

ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-

proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in

the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50

mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100

km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different

in other countries. All data in the official vehi-

cle documentation takes precedence over

these data at all times

›››

282

Technical specifications

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitt

ed dr

wbar load on the

ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-

ceed 50 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend

that you always tow approaching the maxi-

mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-

er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar

load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load

cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and

light-weight single axle trailers or tandem

axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1

metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer

weight is legally required for the drawbar

load.

WARNING

●

For saf

ety reasons, you should not drive at

speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing

a trailer. This also applies in countries where

higher speeds are permitted.

●

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights

or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle

load or the permissible total weight is excee-

ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle

may change, leading to accidents, injuries

and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

e pressure, snow chains and wheel

bolts

Tyre pressure

The stick

er with the tyre pressure values can

be found on the back of the left front door

frame. The tyre pressure values given there

are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly

raised pressures of warm tyres ›››

The pres

sure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher

than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front

wheels, and only for the following tyres:

185/70 R14 Chains with links of maximum 13.5

185/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 13.5

195/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

Wheel bolts

er the wheel

s have been changed, the

tightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench

›››

. The tightening torque for steel

and al

wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

●

Check the ty

re pressure at least once per

month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-

portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too

low, there is an increased danger of accidents

- particularly at high speeds.

●

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-

ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and

threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Technical

Servic

e for information about appropriate

wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

283

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Engine data

etr

l engine 1.0 MPI 48 kW (65 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

48 (65)/5,000-6,000 95/3,000-4,300 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 162 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 15.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,510-1,610

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,091

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 810

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 800

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

284

Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 MPI 55 kW (75 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

55 (75)/6,200 95/3,000-4,300 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 167 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 14.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,500-1,600

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,085

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 800

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 800

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

285

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

66 (90)/4,250-6,000 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 182

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,530-1,630

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,116

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 830

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 560

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

286

Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 70 kW (95 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

70 (95)/5,000-5,500 175/1,500-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 182 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,540-1,640

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,122

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 840

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 560

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

287

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 190 192

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.0 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.4 10.4

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,530-1,630

1,570-1,670

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,123 1,153

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 830 870

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 560 570

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

288

Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 EcoTSI 85 kW (115 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 195 (V) 193 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.3 9.4

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,560-1,660

1,580-1,680

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,140 1,164

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 880

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570 580

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

289

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Petrol engine 1.5 TSI Evo 110 kW (150 CV) ACT

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,498 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,600-1,700

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,184

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 750-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

290

Technical specifications

Petrol engine/CNG 1.0 MPI 66 kW (90 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

66 (90)/4,500-5,800 160/1,900-3,500 3/999

CNG

Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON

Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 181

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,640

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,239

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg)

Data not available as this edition goes to print.

291

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 59 kW (80 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

59 (80)/2,700-4,800 230/1,400-2,400 4/1,598

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 172 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,670-1,750

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,247

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Data not available as this edition goes to print.

292

Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 70 kW (95 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

70 (95)/2,750-4,600 250/1,500-2,600 4/1,598

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 182 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,670-1,750

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,253

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 770-850

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Varies depending on the rear spring.

293

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 85 kW (115 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) Fuel

85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,200 4/1,598

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 195 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,680-1,760

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,258

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200

Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

Data not available as this edition goes to print.

294

Technical specifications

Dimensions

Fig. 238 Dimensions.

Fig. 238 IBIZA

A/B Front and rear projections (mm) 796/699

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,564

D Length (mm) 4,059

E/F Front/rear

track width (mm) 1,525/1,505

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,444

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 185/70 R14 ET38.

295

Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety

Index

ABS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

ontr

ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

ACC

see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 216

deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

function for preventing overtaking in an inside

lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

AdBlue

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Additional consumers (efficiency program) . . . . . 42

Adjusting

CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 155

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Adjusting the front seats

adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Adjusting the head restraints

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Adjustment

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 86

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 88

functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 89

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 88

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Air recirculation

air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Anchoring

the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185, 187

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 98

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 98

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow pro-

tection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Anti-trap function

Sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Assistance systems

adaptive cruise control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

emergency brake assist (Front Assist) . . . . . . . 212

fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Audible signal

unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Audible warning signal

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

297

Index

manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . 50

sel

ect

or l

ever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . . . 192

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 192

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Back seat

folding down and raising the back seat back-

rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 263, 266

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 271

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 199

Brakes

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 188

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Braking

brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Capacity

natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Car care

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Central locking

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . . 134

central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 143

selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

self-locking system to prevent involuntary un-

locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66

Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Changing a bulb

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Changing a double headlight bulb

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Changing settings

CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Childproof locks

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 93

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 92

securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Chrome parts

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Cleaning

adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

298

Index

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

stic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 254

radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

windows and exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Control and warning lamps

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Controls and displays

general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141

Controls on the steering wheel

without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Coolant

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Coolant level

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Coolant temperature

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Cooling

coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Cooling system

checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 270

topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 270

Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 22

Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Detachable ball

assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241

standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Diesel

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118

Display messages

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Disposal

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Distance control

see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Door lock cylinder

de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

299

Index

Doors

dproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78

Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driver information system

additional consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

bonnet, rear lid and doors open . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

engine oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 41

Driving

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 244, 245

with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Driving abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Driving data

data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 123

Easy Connect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Efficiency program

additional consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 143

Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 186

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 187

Electronic differential lock control . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Electronic differential lock (XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 177

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . 183, 185

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

automatic gearbox emergency program . . . . . 196

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Emergency braking assistance system

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Emergency operation

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Emission control system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Engine and ignition

automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

300

Index

starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 179

ping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 263, 266

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 270

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Engine fault

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 266

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 269

checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 266

temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Engine oil pressure

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Environment

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Environmental tip

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185

Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Exhaust purification system for vehicles with

diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Extending

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Exterior lighting

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8

External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Faulty bulbs

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Filling up the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 88

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Front Assist

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front seat

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 258

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 202

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 104

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 197

Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

301

Index

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

aut

atic

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 189

kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 192

General instrument panel

controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 147

warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

General overview of the engine compartment . . 266

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 150

HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . . . 83

Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Headlights

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54, 56

heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

demisting the windscreen and side windows 170

Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 169

Heating and fresh air system

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Hydraulic Brake Assist

automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 186

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 175

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 175

see also Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Emergency brake assist system (Front Assist) 212

journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 41

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

302

Index

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

-oper

ated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Key by remote control

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Keyless Access

Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 135

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Keyless Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Keyless Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Keys

replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 130

vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 194

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 146

additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 149

instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . 111

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Load compartment in the luggage compartment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 160

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Locking and unlocking

in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 16

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 160

luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 163

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

store the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

see also Loading the luggage compartment . 160

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 163

Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

emergency braking assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

MFD

see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Multi-function display (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 260

303

Index

smell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

pec

al features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Noises

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

On-board computer

see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Opening

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 258

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 258

in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 141

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Operating malfunction

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Panoramic sliding sunroof

convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 143

see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 193

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

adjusting the display and audible warnings . 232

parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Parking Aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Parking aid system

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 230

Parking distance warning system

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 230

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 230

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78

Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 254

Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Pre-heating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 219

Radio screen: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 141

Rear lights

access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Rear seat passengers

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78

Rear shelf

store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

304

Index

Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

ar w

indow wiper blades

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

gas gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . . . 155

Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118

Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

RON (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Rubber seals

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Running in

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 22

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Safety instructions

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 92

Saving fuel

inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Saving tips (efficiency program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Seat

heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Seat belt position

for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 84

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 86

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 85

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Selective catalytic reduction

see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . . 261

Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Smell of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 283

Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Special characteristics

tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

305

Index

Start-Stop system

driv

er me

sages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . 205

switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Start-Stop System

the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 176

after the fuel tank has run dry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Steel wheel rims

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 197

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Steering wheel

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 192

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Storage compartment

of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Sun blinds

Anti-trap function (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 31, 175

Tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Tail lights

summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Taking care of your vehicle

interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Technical data

roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Temperature display

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Textiles: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Tightening torque

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 190, 192

Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 100

Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Towing bracket

retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Towing device bracket

operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 100

Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 184, 185

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 244

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Trailer turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Transporting objects

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Turn signals

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

306

Index

Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

omponents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 283

Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Tyre repair kit

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276, 278

service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

with directional tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Unfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unlocking and locking

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Unlocking manually

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Upholstery: cleaning

alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 135

vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 272

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Vehicle care

windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 73

Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . . 158

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 140

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Vehicle paint

code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle paintwork

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 248

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Vehicle underbody

protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 203

gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Warning messages

red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

see also Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . 122

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Washing

care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . . . 75

Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 283

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 278

Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 283

central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66

chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

307

Index

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

wheel

ver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Wheel trim

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Windows

electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141

removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . 100

Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 152

Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Windscreen wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 152

lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Winter conditions

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Winter driving

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Winter tyres

sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

308

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-

stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason

no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error

or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the

equipment supplied with the vehicle at the

time this manual was published. Some of the

units described herein will not be available

until a later date or are only available in cer-

tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the

IBIZA, some of the equipment and functions

that are described in this manual are not in-

cluded in all types or variants of the model;

they may vary or be modiﬁed depending on

the technical requirements and on the mar-

ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general

guide and may vary from the equipment ﬁtted

in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward,

reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the

normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-

cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to

help users to understand certain car function-

alities better. It does not replace the instruc-

tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-

al to obtain more comprehensive information

and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-

isk* is ﬁtted as standard only in certain

versions, and is only supplied as op-

tional extras for some versions, or are

only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with

®. Although the copyright symbol does

not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-

ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-

mation on safety. They warn you about possi-

ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to

potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-

vant information concerning environmental

protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-

nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts,

which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed

alphabetical index that will help you quickly

ﬁnd the information you require.

OWNER’S

MANUAL

Ibiza

6F0012720BC

Inglés

6F0012720BC (11.17)

Ibiza Inglés (11.17)

SEAT recommends

SEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommends

Castrol EDGE Professional

Seat New Ibiza 2017

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat NEW IBIZA 2017 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels